Administrator Manual - Network Video Management

Administrator Manual - Network Video Management
Network Video Management System
Enterprise Edition 2016 R2
Administrator Manual
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Contents
Copyright, trademarks and disclaimer........................ 9
Before you start ....................................................... 10
Introduction to the help ...................................................... 10
Navigate the built-in help system ........................................ 10
System overview ...................................................... 12
Product overview ................................................................ 12
A distributed system setup .................................................. 13
System components ............................................................ 13
Management server ............................................................................ 13
Failover management server .............................................................. 14
Recording server ................................................................................ 14
Event server ....................................................................................... 14
Log server .......................................................................................... 15
SQL server .......................................................................................... 15
Active Directory .................................................................................. 15
Virtual servers .................................................................................... 15
Clients ................................................................................................ 16
About licenses ..................................................................... 18
About local IP address ranges ............................................. 19
About IPv6 and IPv4 ........................................................... 19
About using the system with IPv6 ...................................................... 19
About writing IPv6 addresses ............................................................. 20
System requirements .......................................................... 21
Contents
2
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Installation .............................................................. 22
Before you start installation ................................................ 22
Prepare Active Directory ..................................................................... 22
Installation method ............................................................................ 22
Determine SQL server type ................................................................. 24
Select service account ........................................................................ 25
About virus scanning .......................................................................... 25
Register Software License Code .......................................................... 26
Install the system................................................................ 27
Install your system - Single Server option .......................................... 27
Install your system - Distributed option ............................................. 28
Install your system - Custom option ................................................... 29
Install the recording server ................................................................ 30
Install a recording server silently ....................................................... 31
Installation for workgroups ................................................................ 34
Installation troubleshooting ............................................................... 35
Configure the system in the Management Client .................. 37
Change Software License Code ........................................................... 38
Install clients ...................................................................... 39
Install Network Video Management System Smart Client silently ....... 39
Install NVMS Mobile server ................................................................. 40
Download Manager/download web page ............................. 41
Download Manager's default configuration ......................................... 41
Download Manager's standard installers (user) ................................. 42
Add/publish Download Manager installer components ....................... 42
Hide/remove Download Manager installer components...................... 43
Device pack installer - must be downloaded ....................................... 44
Upgrade ............................................................................... 44
Contents
3
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
About upgrade .................................................................................... 44
Upgrade prerequisites ........................................................................ 45
Upgrade best practices ....................................................................... 46
Alternative upgrade for workgroup .................................................... 46
First time use ........................................................... 47
Best practices ...................................................................... 47
Protect recording databases from corruption ..................................... 47
About daylight saving time ................................................................. 48
About time servers ............................................................................. 48
Management Client overview............................................... 49
Login overview ................................................................................... 49
Management Client window overview ................................................ 49
Panes overview .................................................................................. 51
Menu overview ................................................................................... 52
Management Client elements ................................... 54
Basics .................................................................................. 54
License information ............................................................................ 54
Site information .................................................................................. 58
Servers and hardware ......................................................... 58
Recording servers ............................................................................... 58
Hardware ............................................................................................ 74
Devices ................................................................................ 82
Working with device groups ............................................................... 82
Working with devices ......................................................................... 85
Client ................................................................................. 121
About clients .................................................................................... 121
View groups...................................................................................... 122
Smart Client profiles ......................................................................... 123
Contents
4
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Matrix ............................................................................................... 128
Rules and events ............................................................... 129
About rules and events ..................................................................... 129
About actions and stop actions ......................................................... 130
Events overview ............................................................................... 137
Rules ................................................................................................ 142
Time profiles ..................................................................................... 147
Notification profiles .......................................................................... 151
User-defined events ......................................................................... 154
Analytics events ............................................................................... 155
Generic events .................................................................................. 158
Security ............................................................................. 164
Roles ................................................................................................ 164
Basic users ....................................................................................... 182
System dashboard ............................................................. 182
About system dashboard .................................................................. 182
About system monitor ...................................................................... 183
About system monitor details ........................................................... 184
About system monitor thresholds ..................................................... 185
About current tasks .......................................................................... 187
About configuration reports.............................................................. 187
Server logs ........................................................................ 188
About logs ........................................................................................ 188
Search logs ....................................................................................... 189
Export logs ....................................................................................... 189
Change log language ........................................................................ 190
System log (properties) .................................................................... 190
Audit log (properties) ....................................................................... 190
Rule log (properties) ........................................................................ 191
Contents
5
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Alarms ............................................................................... 192
About alarm configuration ................................................................ 192
About alarms .................................................................................... 193
Alarm Definitions .............................................................................. 194
Alarm Data Settings .......................................................................... 196
Sound Settings ................................................................................. 197
Options dialog box ............................................................. 198
General tab (options) ....................................................................... 199
Server Logs tab (options) ................................................................. 200
Mail Server tab (options) .................................................................. 201
AVI Generation tab (options) ........................................................... 202
Network tab (options) ...................................................................... 202
User Settings tab (options) .............................................................. 203
Analytics Events tab (options) .......................................................... 203
Event Server tab (options) ............................................................... 203
Generic Events tab (options) ............................................................ 204
Feature configuration ............................................. 206
Failover management servers ........................................... 206
About multiple management servers (clustering)............................. 206
Prerequisites for clustering .............................................................. 206
Install in a cluster ............................................................................ 206
Upgrade in a cluster ......................................................................... 208
Network Video Management System Smart Wall ............... 209
About Network Video Management System Smart Wall .................... 209
Configure Smart Walls ...................................................................... 209
Set up user rights for Network Video Management System Smart Wall211
About using rules with Smart Wall presets ....................................... 212
Smart Wall properties ....................................................................... 212
Monitor properties ............................................................................ 214
Contents
6
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
NVMS Mobile...................................................................... 215
NVMS Mobile introduction ................................................................. 215
NVMS Mobile configuration ............................................................... 216
Mobile Server Manager ..................................................................... 226
Frequently asked questions (FAQs) .................................................. 229
Network Video Management System ONVIF Bridge ........... 232
About Network Video Management System ONVIF Bridge ................ 232
Installing Network Video Management System ONVIF Bridge .......... 234
Initial configuring of Network Video Management System ONVIF Bridge236
Managing Network Video Management System ONVIF Bridge .......... 236
ONVIF Bridge properties ................................................................... 239
Multi-domain with one-way trust ...................................... 240
Setup with one-way trust ................................................................. 240
SNMP ................................................................................. 241
About SNMP support ......................................................................... 241
Install SNMP service ......................................................................... 241
Configure SNMP service .................................................................... 242
System maintenance .............................................. 243
Ports used by the system .................................................. 243
Backing up and restoring system configuration ................. 245
About backing up and restoring your system configuration .............. 245
Back up log server database ............................................................. 245
Manual backup and restore of system configuration ......................... 246
Scheduled backup and restore .......................................................... 248
Moving the management server ........................................ 250
About moving the management server ............................................. 250
About unavailable management servers ........................................... 251
Move the system configuration ......................................................... 251
Contents
7
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Managing the SQL server ................................................... 251
About updating the SQL server address ............................................ 251
Update the log server's SQL address ................................................ 252
Update the management server or event server SQL server address 252
Replace hardware .............................................................. 253
Replace a recording server ................................................ 255
Video device drivers .......................................................... 256
About video device drivers ............................................................... 256
About removing video device drivers ................................................ 256
Managing server services .................................................. 257
Start or stop the Management Server service ................................... 257
Start or stop the Recording Server service ....................................... 258
View status messages for Management Server or Recording Server . 258
Start, stop, or restart the Event Server service ................................. 259
View Event Server or MIP logs .......................................................... 261
About the tray icons ......................................................................... 262
Change settings for the Recording Server service ............................ 263
Recording Server Settings ................................................................ 263
Restart Data Collector Server service ............................................... 264
Registered services ........................................................... 264
About the service channel ................................................................ 265
Add and edit registered services....................................................... 265
Manage network configuration ......................................................... 265
Registered services properties ......................................................... 266
Index ..................................................................... 267
Contents
8
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Copyright, trademarks and disclaimer
Copyright
2016 Sony Corporation.
Trademarks
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. App Store is a service
mark of Apple Inc. Android is a trademark of Google Inc.
All other trademarks mentioned in this document are trademarks of their respective owners.
Disclaimer
This text is intended for general information purposes only, and due care has been taken in its
preparation.
Any risk arising from the use of this information rests with the recipient, and nothing herein should
be construed as constituting any kind of warranty.
Sony Corporation reserve the right to make adjustments without prior notification.
All names of people and organizations used in the examples in this text are fictitious. Any
resemblance to any actual organization or person, living or dead, is purely coincidental and
unintended.
This product may make use of third party software for which specific terms and conditions may
apply. When that is the case, you can find more information in the file
3rd_party_software_terms_and_conditions.txt located in your surveillance system
installation folder.
Copyright, trademarks and disclaimer
9
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Before you start
Introduction to the help
The help is divided into sections that each serves a targeted purpose. The sections are structured
in a logical flow:
System overview (on page 12)
Provides an introduction to your video surveillance system, system components, and concepts. This
is useful if you are new to the system. The system overview also provides a comparison chart that
lists the most significant differences between the products.
Installation (on page 22)
Provides installation preconditions and step by step procedures that help you install and upgrade
your system.
First time use (on page 47)
Provides an overview of the Management Client and information about best practices to follow to
have your system running smoothly. This overview is useful if you are new to the system.
Management Client elements (on page 54)
Provides a thorough walk through of each of the nodes in the Site Navigation pane of the
Management Client. This section contains conceptual and procedural information about the basic
elements of your system.
Feature configuration (on page 206)
Provides self-contained, detailed information about the additional features and add-on products
that your system supports.
System maintenance (on page 243)
Provides an overview of the ports used in the system and step-by-step procedures for, for
example, backing up your system and monitoring system performance. This section is useful after
installation and configuration in order to maintain, expand and optimize your system.
Navigate the built-in help system
Press F1 to access a related help topic or select Help > Contents from the Management Client
toolbar to launch the complete help.
You can navigate between the help window's three tabs: Contents, Index, and Search or use the
links inside the help topics.
Tab
Description
Contents
Navigate the help system based on a tree structure.
Index
Select the first letter of the term you are interested in and scroll
until you find it. Click a help topic title in the search results list to
open the required topic.
Before you start
10
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Tab
Description
Search
Search for help topics that contain particular terms of interest.
For example, search for the term zoom and receive a list in the
search result of all help topics that contains the term zoom. Click
a help topic title in the search results list to open the required
topic.
To print a help topic, navigate to the required topic and click the browser's Print button.
Before you start
11
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
System overview
Product overview
This Network Video Management System is a fully distributed solution, designed for large multi-site
and multiple server installations requiring 24/7 surveillance, with support for devices from different
vendors. The solution offers centralized management of all devices, servers, and users, and
empowers an extremely flexible rule system driven by schedules and events.
Your system consists of the following main elements:

The management server - the center of your installation, consists of multiple servers.

One or more recording servers.

One or more Network Video Management System Management Clients.

Network Video Management System Download Manager.

One or more Network Video Management System Smart Clients.

One or more Network Video Management System Web Clients and/or NVMS Mobile
clients if needed.
Your system also includes fully integrated Matrix functionality for distributed viewing of video from
any camera on your surveillance system to any computer with Network Video Management System
Smart Client installed.
You can install your system on virtualized servers or on multiple physical servers in a distributed
setup.
The system also offers the possibility of including the standalone Network Video Management
System Smart Client – Player when you export video evidence from the Network Video
Management System Smart Client. Network Video Management System Smart Client – Player
allows recipients of video evidence (such as police officers, internal or external investigators and
more) to browse and play back the exported recordings without having to install any software on
their computers.
Your system can handle an unlimited number of cameras, servers, and users and across multiple
sites if required. Your system can handle IPv4 as well as IPv6.
System overview
12
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
A distributed system setup
Example of a system setup. The number of cameras, recording servers, and connected clients, can
be as high as you require.
Legend:
1.
Management Client(s)
2.
Event server
3.
Microsoft cluster
4.
Management server
5.
Failover management server
6.
SQL server
7.
Recording server(s)
8.
Network Video Management System Smart Client(s)
9.
IP video cameras
10. Video server
11. Analog cameras
12. PTZ IP camera
13. Camera network
14. Server network
System components
Management server
The management server is the central component of the VMS system. It stores the configuration of
the surveillance system in a relational database, either on the management server computer itself
or on a separate SQL server on the network. It also handles user authentication, user rights, the
System overview
13
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
rule system and more. To improve system performance, you can run several management servers
as a . The management server runs as a service, and is typically installed on a dedicated server.
Users connect to the management server for initial authentication, then transparently to the
recording servers for access to for video recordings, etc.
Failover management server
Failover support on the management server is achieved by installing the management server in a
Microsoft Windows Cluster. The cluster will then ensure that another server take over the
management server function should the first server fail.
Recording server
The recording server is responsible for communicating with the network cameras and video
encoders, recording the retrieved audio and video as well as providing client access to both live and
recorded audio and video.
Device Drivers

Communication with the network cameras and video encoders are done through a device
driver developed specifically for individual devices or a series of similar devices from the
same manufacture.

The device drivers are by default installed when the recording server is installed, but can
later be updated by downloading and installing a newer version of the device pack.
Media Database

The retrieved audio and video data is stored in the tailor-made high performance media
database optimized for recording and storing audio and video data.

The media database supports various unique features like; multistage archiving, video
grooming, and adding a digital signature to the recordings.
Event server
The event server handles various tasks related to events, alarms, maps and 3rd party integrations
via the MIP Software Development Kit (SDK).
Events:

All system events are consolidated in the event server so there are one place and interface
for partners to make integrations that utilize system events.

Furthermore, the event server offers 3rd party access to sending events to the system via
the Generic events or Analytics events interface.
Alarms:

The event server hosts the alarm feature, alarm logic, alarm state as well as handling the
alarm database. The alarm database is stored in the same SQL server the management
server uses.
Maps:

The event server also hosts the maps that are configured and used in Network Video
Management System Smart Client.
System overview
14
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
MIP SDK:

Finally third-party-developed plug-ins can be installed on the event server and utilize
access to system events.
Log server
The log server is responsible for storing all log messages for the entire system. The log server uses
the same SQL server as the management server and is typically installed on the same server as
the management server, but can be installed on a separate server if needed to increase
performance of the management and log servers.
SQL server
The management server, event server and log server uses an SQL server to store, for example, the
configuration, alarms, events and log messaged.
The system installer includes Microsoft SQL Server Express that can be used freely for systems up
to 300 cameras.
For larger systems over 300 cameras it is recommended to use the SQL Server 2008 R2 Standard
or Enterprise edition on a dedicated server as these editions can handle larger databases and offer
backup functionality.
Active Directory
Active Directory is a distributed directory service implemented by Microsoft for Windows
domain networks. It is included in most Windows Server operating systems. It identifies resources
on a network in order for users or applications to access them.
With the Active Directory installed, you can add Windows users from Active Directory, but you also
have the option of adding basic users without Active Directory. Note that there are certain system
limitations related to basic users.
Virtual servers
You can run all system components on virtualized Windows® servers, such as VMware® and
Microsoft® Hyper-V®.
Virtualization is often preferred to better utilize hardware resources. Normally, virtual servers
running on the hardware host server do not load the virtual server to a great extent, and often not
at the same time. However, recording servers record all cameras and video streams. This puts high
load on CPU, memory, network, and storage system. So, when run on a virtual server, the normal
gain of virtualization disappears to a large extent, since - in many cases - it uses all available
resources.
If run in a virtual environment, it is important that the hardware host has the same amount of
physical memory as allocated for the virtual servers and that the virtual server running the
recording server is allocated enough CPU and memory - which it is not by default. Typically, the
recording server needs 2-4 GB depending on configuration. Another bottleneck is network adapter
allocation and hard disk performance. Consider allocating a physical network adapter on the host
server of the virtual server running the recording server. This makes it easier to ensure that the
network adapter is not overloaded with traffic to other virtual servers. If the network adapter is
System overview
15
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
used for several virtual servers, the network traffic might result in the recording server not
retrieving and recording the configured amount of images.
Clients
About the Management Client
Feature-rich administration client for configuration and day-to-day management of the system.
Available in several languages.
Typically installed on the surveillance system administrator's workstation or similar.
For a detailed overview of the Management Client, see Management Client overview (on page 49).
About Network Video Management System Smart Client
Designed for Sony – Network Video Management System IP video management software, the
Network Video Management System Smart Client is an easy-to-use client application that provides
intuitive control over security installations. Manage security installations with Network Video
Management System Smart Client which gives users access to live and recorded video, instant
control of cameras and connected security devices, and an overview of recordings. Available in
multiple local languages, Network Video Management System Smart Client has an adaptable user
interface that can be optimized for individual operators’ tasks and adjusted according to specific
skills and authority levels.
The interface allows you to tailor your viewing experience to specific working environments by
selecting a light or dark theme, depending on room lighting or brightness of the video. It also
features work-optimized tabs and an integrated video timeline for easy surveillance operation.
Using the MIP SDK, users can integrate various types of security and business systems and video
analytics applications, which you manage through Network Video Management System Smart
Client.
Network Video Management System Smart Client must be installed on users' computers.
Surveillance system administrators manage clients' access to the surveillance system through the
Management Client. Recordings viewed by clients are provided by your Network Video Management
System's Image Server service. The service runs in the background on the surveillance system
server. Separate hardware is not required.
To download Network Video Management System Smart Client, you must connect to the
surveillance system server which presents you with a welcome page that lists available clients and
System overview
16
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
language versions. System administrators can use Network Video Management System Download
Manager to control what clients and language versions should be available to users on the welcome
page of the Network Video Management System Download Manager.
About NVMS Mobile client
NVMS Mobile client is a mobile surveillance solution closely integrated with the rest of your Network
Video Management System. It runs on your Android tablet or smartphone, your Apple® tablet,
smartphone or portable music player and gives you access to cameras, views and other
functionality set up in the management clients.
Use the NVMS Mobile client to view and play back live and recorded video from one or multiple
cameras, control pan-tilt-zoom (PTZ) cameras, trigger output and events and use the Video push
functionality to send video from your device to your Network Video Management System.
If you want to use NVMS Mobile client with your system, you must add a Mobile server to establish
the connection between the NVMS Mobile client and your system. Once the Mobile server is set up,
download the NVMS Mobile client for free from Google Play or App Store to start using NVMS
Mobile.
You need one hardware device license per device that should be able to push video to your
Network Video Management System.
System overview
17
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
About Network Video Management System Web Client
Network Video Management System Web Client is a web-based client application for viewing,
playing back and sharing video. It provides instant access to the most commonly used surveillance
functions, such as viewing live video, play back recorded video, print and export evidence. Access
to features depends on individual user rights which are set up in the management client.
To enable access to the Network Video Management System Web Client, you must install a Mobile
server to establish the connection between the Network Video Management System Web Client and
your system. The Network Video Management System Web Client itself does not require any
installation itself and works with most Internet browsers. Once you have set up the Mobile server,
you can monitor your Network Video Management System anywhere from any computer or tablet
with Internet access (provided you know the right external/Internet address, user name and
password).
About licenses
In the navigation tree, you can also see your SLC if you select Basics > License Information.
You have purchased at least two types of licenses:
Base licenses: As a minimum, you have a base license for one of the Network Video Management
System products. You may also have one or more base licenses for Network Video Management
System add-on products.
Hardware device licenses: Every hardware device that you add to your Network Video
Management System requires a hardware device license. You do not need hardware device licenses
for speakers, microphones or input and output devices attached to your cameras. You need only
one hardware device license per video encoder IP address even if you connect several cameras to
the video encoder. A video encoder can have one or more IP addresses.
For more information, see the list of supported hardware on the Sony website
http://www.sony.net/CameraSystem/NVMS/Technical-documents. If you want to use the video
push feature in NVMS Mobile, you also need one hardware device license per mobile device or
tablet that should be able to push video to your system.
System overview
18
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Most Network Video Management System add-on products require additional license types. The
software license file also includes information about your licenses for add-on products. Some addon products have their own separate software license files. You can find more information about
add-on product licenses here:
About local IP address ranges
When a client, such as Network Video Management System Smart Client, connects to a surveillance
system, an amount of initial data communication, including the exchange of contact addresses
goes on in the background. This happens automatically, and is transparent to users.
Clients may connect from the local network as well as from the Internet, and in each case the
surveillance system should be able to provide suitable addresses so the clients can get access to
live and recorded video from the recording servers:

When clients connect locally, the surveillance system should reply with local addresses and
port numbers.

When clients connect from the Internet, the surveillance system should reply with the
recording servers' public addresses, that is the address of the firewall or NAT (Network
Address Translation) router, and often also a different port number (which is then
forwarded to recording servers).
The surveillance system must therefore be able to determine whether a client belongs on a local IP
range or on the Internet. For this purpose, you can define a list of IP ranges which the surveillance
system should recognize as coming from a local network.
About IPv6 and IPv4
Your system supports IPv6 as well as IPv4. So does Network Video Management System Smart
Client.
IPv6 is the latest version of the Internet Protocol (IP). The Internet protocol determines the format
and use of IP addresses. IPv6 coexists with the still much more widely used IP version IPv4. IPv6
was developed in order to solve the address exhaustion of IPv4. IPv6 addresses are 128 bit long,
whereas IPv4 addresses are only 32 bit long. IPv6 offers more than ten billion billion billion times
as many addresses as IPv4.
More and more organizations are implementing IPv6 on their networks. For example, all US federal
agency infrastructures are required to be IPv6 compliant. Examples and illustrations in this manual
reflect use of IPv4 because this is still the most widely used IP version. IPv6 works equally well
with the system.
About using the system with IPv6
The following conditions apply when using the system with IPv6:
Servers
Servers can often use IPv4 as well as IPv6. However, if just one server in your system (for
example, a management server or recording server) requires a particular IP version, all other
servers in your system must communicate using the same IP version.
System overview
19
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Example: All of the servers in your system except one can use IPv4 as well as IPv6.
The exception is a server which is only capable of using IPv6. This means that all
servers must communicate with each other using IPv6.
Devices
You can use devices (cameras, inputs, outputs, microphones, speakers) with a different IP version
than that being used for server communication provided your network equipment and the
recording servers also support the devices' IP version. See also the illustration below.
Clients
If your system uses IPv6, users should connect with the Network Video Management System Smart
Client. The Network Video Management System Smart Client supports IPv6 as well as IPv4.
If one or more servers in your system can only use IPv6, Network Video Management System
Smart Client users must use IPv6 for their communication with those servers. In this context, it is
important to remember that Network Video Management System Smart Clients technically connect
to a management server for initial authentication, and then to the required recording servers for
access to recordings.
However, the Network Video Management System Smart Client users do not have to be on an IPv6
network themselves, provided your network equipment supports communication between different
IP versions, and they have installed the IPv6 protocol on their computers. See also illustration. To
install IPv6 on a client computer, open a command prompt, type Ipv6 install, and press ENTER.
Example illustration
Example: Since one server in the system can only use IPv6, all communication with
that server must use IPv6. However, that server also determines the IP version for
communication between all other servers in the system.
No Matrix Monitor compatibility
If using IPv6, you cannot use the Matrix Monitor application with your system. Matrix functionality
in Network Video Management System Smart Client is not affected.
About writing IPv6 addresses
An IPv6 address is usually written as eight blocks of four hexadecimal digits, with each block
separated by a colon.
Example: 2001:0B80:0000:0000:0000:0F80:3FA8:18AB
You may shorten addresses by eliminating leading zeros in a block. Also note that some of the
four-digit blocks may consist of zeros only. If any number of such 0000 blocks are consecutive, you
System overview
20
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
may shorten addresses by replacing the 0000 blocks with two colons as long as there is only one
such double colon in the address.
Example:
2001:0B80:0000:0000:0000:0F80:3FA8:18AB can be shortened to
2001:B80:0000:0000:0000:F80:3FA8:18AB if removing the leading zeros, or to
2001:0B80::0F80:3FA8:18AB if removing the 0000 blocks, or even to
2001:B80::F80:3FA8:18AB if removing the leading zeros as well as the 0000 blocks.
Using IPv6 Addresses in URLs
IPv6 addresses contain colons. Colons, however, are also used in other types of network
addressing syntax. For example, IPv4 uses a colon to separate IP address and port number when
both are used in a URL. IPv6 has inherited this principle. Therefore, to avoid confusion, square
brackets are put around IPv6 addresses when they are used in URLs.
Example of a URL with an IPv6 address:
http://[2001:0B80:0000:0000:0000:0F80:3FA8:18AB], which may of course be shortened
to, for example, http://[2001:B80::F80:3FA8:18AB]
Example of a URL with an IPv6 address and a port number:
http://[2001:0B80:0000:0000:0000:0F80:3FA8:18AB]:1234, which may of course be
shortened to, for example, http://[2001:B80::F80:3FA8:18AB]:1234
For more information about IPv6, see, for example, the IANA website
http://www.iana.org/numbers/. IANA, the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority, is the
organization responsible for the global coordination of IP addressing.
System requirements
For information about the minimum system requirements to the various components of your
system, go to the Sony website http://www.sony.net/CameraSystem/Product-info.
System overview
21
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Installation
If you upgrade from a previous Network Video Management System version, see About upgrade
(on page 44).
Before you start installation
Go through all these mandatory and important prerequisites before you start the actual installation.
Prepare Active Directory
If you want to add users to your system through the Active Directory service, you must have a
server with Active Directory installed and acting as domain controller available on your network.
For easy user and group management, Sony recommends that you have Microsoft Active
Directory® installed and configured before you install your Network Video Management System. If
you add the management server to the Active Directory after installing, you must reinstall the
management server, and replace users with new Windows users defined in the Active Directory.
Installation method
As part of the installation wizard, you must decide which installation method to use. You should
base your selection on your organization's needs, but it is very likely that you already decided on
the method when you purchased the system.
Options
Description
Single Server
Installs all management server components, recording server,
and Network Video Management System Smart Client on the
current computer. You only need to make a minimum of
selections and all components are preselected in the un-editable
component list. Depending on hardware and configuration,
smaller systems with up to 50-100 cameras can run on a single
server. The SQL server is not in the list, but is also installed on
the current computer.
Distributed
Installs only the management server components on the current
computer. This means that the recording server and Network
Video Management System Smart Client are not visible in the
component list. You cannot edit anything in the component list.
You must install the recording server, Network Video
Management System Smart Client, and SQL server on other
computers afterwards.
Installation
22
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Options
Description
Custom
The management server is always selected in the system
component list and is always installed, but you can select freely
what to install on the current computer, such as the other
management server components, the recording server and
Network Video Management System Smart Client.
By default, the recording server is cleared in the component list,
but you can change this. Depending on your selections, you must
install the cleared components and the SQL server on other
computers afterwards.
Single Server
Typical system components in a system:
1.
Active Directory
2.
Devices
3.
SQL server
4.
Event server
5.
Log server
6.
Service channel
7.
Network Video Management System Smart Client
8.
Management Client
9.
Management server
10. Recording server
11. NVMS Mobile server
12. Network Video Management System Web Client
Installation
23
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
13. NVMS Mobile client
14. Network Video Management System Smart Client with Network Video Management System
Smart Wall
Distributed
Determine SQL server type
The Microsoft SQL Server Express Edition is a "lightweight" version of a full SQL server. It is easy
to install and prepare for use, and is often a good choice for systems with less than 300 cameras.
This version of the SQL Server is included in the single server installation.
For large installations with more than 300 cameras, Sony recommends that you use a dedicated
existing SQL server on a dedicated computer on the network. You must have administrator rights
on the SQL server.
Sony recommends that you install the database on a dedicated hard disk drive that is not used for
other purposes. Installing the database on its own drive improves the entire system performance.
When you select Distributed or Custom as part of the installation wizard, you must decide what
to do regarding the SQL server.
If you do not have an SQL server installed, the options are:

Install SQL Server Express on this computer.

Use an existing SQL Server on the network: When you use a dedicated computer for
the SQL database on the network, the list of SQL servers that your account can access
appears.
If you have an SQL server installed, the options are:
Installation
24
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual

Use the installed Microsoft SQL Server Express database on this computer.

Use an existing SQL Server on the network: When you use a dedicated computer for
the SQL database on the network, the list of SQL servers that your account can access
appears.
You are also asked whether you want to create a new database, use an existing database,
or overwrite an existing database.

Create new database: For a new installation.

Use existing database: If you are installing the database as part of an upgrade of
the system, and you want to use your existing database.
Select service account
As part of the installation, you are asked to specify an account to run the Sony services on this
computer. The services always run on this account no matter which user is logged in. Make sure
that the account has all necessary user rights, for example, the proper rights to perform tasks,
proper network and file access, and access to network shared folders.
You can select either a predefined account, or a user account. Base your decision on the
environment that you want to install your system in:
Domain environment
In a domain environment:

Sony recommends that you use the built-in Network Service account. It is easier to use
even if you need to expand the system to multiple computers.

You can also use domain user accounts, but they are potentially more difficult to configure.
Workgroup environment
In a workgroup environment, Sony recommends that you use a local user account that has all
necessary rights. This is often the administrator account.
Important: If you have installed your system components on multiple computers, the selected user
account must be configured on all computers in your installations with identical user name,
password, and access rights.
About virus scanning
As is the case with any other database software, if an antivirus program is installed on a computer
running Network Video Management System software, it is important that you exclude specific file
types and folders, as well as certain network traffic. Without implementing these exceptions, virus
scanning uses a considerable amount of system resources. On top of that, the scanning process
can temporarily lock files, which could result in a disruption in the recording process or even
corruption of databases.
When you need to perform virus scanning, do not scan Recording Server folders that contain
recording databases (by default C:\mediadatabase\, as well as all subfolders). Also, avoid
performing virus scanning on archive storage directories.
Create the following additional exclusions:

File types: .blk, .idx, .pic
Installation
25
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual


Folders and subfolders:

C:\Program Files\Sony or C:\Program Files (x86)\Sony

C:\ProgramData\Sony\MIPSDK

C:\ProgramData\Sony\NVMS Mobile Server\Logs

C:\ProgramData\Sony\- Network VMS Data Collector Server\Logs

C:\ProgramData\Sony\- Network VMS Event Server\logs

C:\ProgramData\Sony\- Network VMS Log Server

C:\ProgramData\Sony\- Network VMS Management Server\Logs

C:\ProgramData\Sony\- Network VMS Recording Server\Logs

C:\ProgramData\Sony\- Network VMS Report Web Server\Logs

C:\ProgramData\Sony\- Network VMS Service Channel\Logs
Exclude network scanning on the following TCP ports:
Product
TCP ports
Network Video Management
System Enterprise Edition
80, 8080, 7563, 25, 21, 9993
NVMS Mobile
8081
or

Exclude network scanning of the following processes:
Product
Processes
Network Video Management
System Enterprise Edition
VideoOS.Recording.Service.exe,
VideoOS.Server.Service.exe,
VideoOS.Administration.exe
NVMS Mobile
VideoOS.MobileServer.Service.exe
Your organization may have strict guidelines regarding virus scanning, but it is important that you
exclude the above folders and files from virus scanning.
Register Software License Code
Before you install, you must have the name and location of the software license file that you
received from Sony.
Installation
26
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Sony recommends that you register your SLC before installation. See the license guide on our
website http://www.sony.net/CameraSystem/NVMS/Manuals.
Install the system
Select one of the installation options:

Install your system - Single Server option (on page 27)

Install your system - Distributed option (on page 28)

Install your system - Custom option (on page 29)
Install your system - Single Server option
The Single Server option installs all management server components, recording server, and
Network Video Management System Smart Client on the current computer. Depending on hardware
and configuration, smaller systems with up to 50-100 cameras can run on a single server. You only
need to make a minimum of selections and all components are preselected in the un-editable
component list. The SQL server is not in the list, but is also installed on the current computer.
1. If you are installing a version downloaded from the Internet, run the Sony - Network VMS
Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 System Installer.exe file from the location where you
saved it.
Alternatively, insert the software DVD. If the dialog box does not open automatically, run
the Sony - Network VMS Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 System Installer.exe file from
the DVD.
2. The installation files unpack. Depending on your security settings, one or more Windows ®
security warnings appear. Accept these and the unpacking continues.
3. When done, the Sony - Network VMS Enterprise Edition dialog box appears,
a) Select the Language to use during the installation (this is not the language your
system uses once installed, this is selected later). Click Continue.
b) In Type the location of the license file, enter your license file from your Network
Video Management System provider. Alternatively, use the browse function to locate it.
The system verifies your license file before you can continue. Click Continue.
c) Read the Sony End-user License Agreement. Select the I accept the terms in the
license agreement check box.
4. Select Single Server. A list of components to install appears (you cannot edit this list).
Click Continue.
5. Select File location for the program file. In Product language, select the language in
which your Network Video Management System product should be installed. Click Install.
6. The software now installs. When done, you see a list of successfully installed components.
Click Close.
Microsoft® IIS is automatically installed during the process. Afterwards, you may be
prompted to restart your computer. Do so and after restart, depending on your security
settings, one or more Windows security warnings may appear. Accept these and the
installation completes.
Installation
27
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
7. When done, your installation completes and you can continue with configuration, see
Configuration process (see "Configure the system in the Management Client" on page 37).
Install your system - Distributed option
The Distributed option installs only the management server components on the current computer.
This means that the recording server and Network Video Management System Smart Client are not
visible in the un-editable component list. You must install the recording server, Network Video
Management System Smart Client, and SQL server on other computers.
1. If you are installing a version downloaded from the Internet, run the Sony - Network VMS
Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 System Installer.exe file from the location where you
saved it.
Alternatively, insert the software DVD. If the dialog box does not open automatically, run
the Sony - Network VMS Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 System Installer.exe file from
the DVD.
2. The installation files unpack. Depending on your security settings, one or more Windows ®
security warnings appear. Accept these and the unpacking continues.
3. When done, the Sony – Network VMS Enterprise Edition dialog box appears,
a) Select the Language to use during the installation (this is not the language your
system uses once installed, this is selected later). Click Continue.
b) In Type the location of the license file, enter your license file from your Network
Video Management System provider. Alternatively, use the browse function to locate it.
The system verifies your license file before you can continue. Click Continue.
c) Read the Sony End-user License Agreement. Select the I accept the terms in the
license agreement check box.
4. Select Distributed. A non-editable list of components to be installed appears. Click
Continue.
5. Select the type of SQL server database you want. Also specify the name of the SQL server.
Click Continue.
6. Select either Create new database or Use existing database and name the database. If
you choose the latter, select to Keep or Overwrite existing data. Click Continue.
7. Select File location for the program file. In Product language, select the language in
which your Network Video Management System product should be installed. Click Install.
8. The software now installs. When done, you see a list of successfully installed components.
Click Close.
Microsoft® IIS is automatically installed during the process. Afterwards, you may be
prompted to restart your computer. Do so and after restart, depending on your security
settings, one or more Windows security warnings may appear. Accept these and the
installation completes.
9. Install at least one recording server and Network Video Management System Smart Client
on another computer.
Installation
28
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
See also
Install the recording server (on page 30)
Install clients (on page 39)
Install your system - Custom option
The Custom option installs the management server always, but you can select freely among the
other management server components, recording server, and Network Video Management System
Smart Client to install on the current computer. By default, the recording server is unselected in
the component list, but you can edit this. Depending on your selections you must install the
unselected components afterwards on other computers plus the SQL server.
1. If you are installing a version downloaded from the Internet, run the Sony - Network VMS
Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 System Installer.exe file from the location where you
saved it.
Alternatively, insert the software DVD. If the dialog box does not open automatically, run
the Sony - Network VMS Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 System Installer.exe file from
the DVD.
2. The installation files unpack. Depending on your security settings, one or more Windows ®
security warnings appear. Accept these and the unpacking continues.
3. When done, the Sony – Network VMS Enterprise Edition dialog box appears,
a) Select the Language to use during the installation (this is not the language your
system uses once installed, this is selected later). Click Continue.
b) In Type the location of the license file, enter your license file from your Network
Video Management System provider. Alternatively, use the browse function to locate
it. The system verifies your license file before you can continue. Click Continue.
c) Read the Sony End-user License Agreement. Select the I accept the terms in the
license agreement check box.
4. Select Custom. A list of components to be installed appears. Apart from the management
server, all elements in the list are optional. The recording server is by default deselected,
but you can change this if needed. Click Continue.
5. Select the type of SQL server database you want. If relevant, also specify the name of the
SQL server. Click Continue.
6. Select either Create new database or Use existing database and name the database. If
you choose the latter, select to Keep or Overwrite existing data. Click Continue.
7. Select either This predefined account or This account to select the service account. If
needed, enter a password and confirm this. Click Continue.
8. If you have more than one available IIS website, you can select any of these. However, if
any of your websites have HTTPS binding, select one of these. Click Continue.
9. Select File location for the program file. In Product language, select the language in
which your Network Video Management System product should be installed. Click Install.
10. The software now installs. When done, you see a list of successfully installed components.
Click Close.
Installation
29
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Microsoft® IIS is automatically installed during the process. Afterwards, you may be
prompted to restart your computer. Do so and after restart, depending on your security
settings, one or more Windows security warnings may appear. Accept these and the
installation completes.
11. Depending on your selections, install the remaining servers on other computers:
a) Go to the Management server's download web page from Windows' Start menu.
b) Select Programs > Sony > Administrative Installation Page and copy the
Internet address.
c) Log into each of the computers to install:
 Log server.
 Event server.
 Management Client.
d) Open an Internet browser, paste the address of the Management server's download
web page into the address field and download the relevant installer.
e) Run the installer.
12. Install the recording server on a separate computer, see Install the recording server (on
page 30).
Install the recording server
Once you have installed the management server, download the separate recording server installer
from the management server's web page.
1. On the management server, go to the Management server's download web page from
Windows' Start menu.
2. Select Programs > Sony > Administrative Installation Page and copy the Internet
address.
3. Log into the computer where you want to install the recording server.
4. Open an Internet browser, paste the address of the Management server's download web
page into the address field and select the Recording Server installer. Save the installer
somewhere appropriate and run it from here or run it directly from the web page.
5. Select the Language you want to use during the installation. Click Continue.
6. Select:
Typical: to install a recording server with default values, or
Custom: to install a recording server with custom values.
7. Specify the recording server settings:
Installation

Name.

Management server address.
30
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual

Path to save recordings, and click Continue.
8. If you selected Custom:
a) Specify the number of recording servers you want to install on this computer. Click
Continue.
b) Specify the service account. If needed, enter a password and confirm this. Click
Continue.
9. Select Files location for the program file. In Product language, select the language in
which to install your system. Click Install.
10. The software is now installed. Once it is completed, you see a list of successfully installed
components. Click Close.
When you have installed the recording server, you can check its state from the Recording
Server service icon.
11. When done, your installation completes and you can continue with configuration, see
Configuration process (see "Configure the system in the Management Client" on page 37).
Install a recording server silently
The advantage of a silent install is that you can do it remotely. Follow the steps below:
1. Locate the recording server installation file: Sony–
NetworkVMSRecordingServerInstaller_x64.exe.
1. Log into the management server.
2. Open an internet browser and type the address: http://localhost/Installation/Admin/
3. Save the recording server installation file on the server where you want to install the
new recording server.
Or you can browse to the file. The path is typically:
C:\Program Files\Sony\- Network VMS Management
Server\IIS\httpdocs\Admin\Recording Server Installer\[version number]
[bit-version]\All Languages\en-US
2. Run a silent installation using these options:

Run with default parameter settings:
To run a silent installation using the default values for all parameters, start a command
prompt (cmd.exe) in the directory where the installation program is located and
perform following command:
>Sony–NetworkVMSRecordingServerInstaller_x64.exe --quiet

To do customized installation you need to specify the list of parameters that you
want to overwrite:
For example, to change the path to Management Server of the installation, run:
Installation
31
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
><Sony–NetworkVMSRecordingServerInstaller_x64.exe --quiet -parameters=SERVERHOSTNAME:DKWS-OKR-02
These are the parameters that you may use through command line parameters:

To change name of the recording server:
RECORDERNAME – name of the recorder that will appear in Management Client.
--quiet --parameters=RECORDERNAME:NewRecorderName

To change Management Server:
SERVERHOSTNAME – hostname of the Management Server where Recording Server will
connect to
SERVERPORT – port of the Management Server (80 by default)
--quiet --parameters=SERVERHOSTNAME:DKWS-OKR-02

To install Recording Server as different user than NT AUTHORITY\NETWORK
SERVICE:
RECUSERACCOUNT – flag that determines if user account is used or one of the
predefined accounts
RECSERVICEACCOUNT – name of the used user or predefined service account
RECPASSWORD – encrypted! password for the user. Leave empty for predefined
accounts.
To find out the encrypted version of the password you can run installer in usual mode.
Open c:\ProgramData\Sony\Installer\Sony–NetworkVMSRecordingServer (64_bit)I.log
(there could be number added in the end of the name if more than one installation was
ran on the computer)
Find string ‘Command Line’. This would be full list of parameters that was used during
installation. The one marked with ENCRYPTEDPASSWORD will have encrypted password.
--quiet -parameters=RECUSERACCOUNT:true:RECSERVICEACCOUNT:Sony\okr:RECPAS
SWORD:encryptedpasswork

In order to change the location of the installation from default you must first
perform:
><Sony–NetworkVMSRecordingServerInstaller_x64.exe -generateargsfile=C:\temp
In the specified location you will find .xml file with the parameters. So you would need
to change parameters in this file and run your installation with the newly modified file.

To change location of the installation:
INSTALLDIR - path where Recording Server should be installed to
TARGETDIR – should be the same as INSTALLDIR
INSTALLLOCATION – should be the same as INSTALLDIR
Installation
32
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual

To change location of recordings:
MEDIADBPATH – path to the Media database with all recordings
E.g. modifications in my Argements_.xml were. My new location of the installation will
be %ProgramFiles(x86)%\Sony\bla and new location for recordings is C:\MD
<KeyValueParametersOfStringString>
<Value>%ProgramFiles(x86)%\Sony\bla</Value>
<Key>INSTALLDIR</Key>
</KeyValueParametersOfStringString>
<KeyValueParametersOfStringString>
<Value>%ProgramFiles(x86)%\Sony\bla</Value>
<Key>TARGETDIR</Key>
</KeyValueParametersOfStringString>
<KeyValueParametersOfStringString>
<Value>%ProgramFiles(x86)%\Sony\bla</Value>
<Key>INSTALLLOCATION</Key>
</KeyValueParametersOfStringString>
<KeyValueParametersOfStringString>
<Value>C:\MD</Value>
<Key>MEDIADBPATH</Key>
</KeyValueParametersOfStringString>
Run the:
><Sony–NetworkVMSRecordingServerInstaller_x64.exe --quiet -arguments=C:\temp\Arguments_.xml
Troubleshooting
Where can I find the log files of the installation?
The log files of the installation are located under C:\ProgramData\Sony\Installer\
How do I see a list of default parameters that will be used during a single server installation?
To see a list of parameters with all default values you can run Sony–
NetworkVMSRecordingServerInstaller_x64.exe --generateargsfile=C:\temp
It will generate a file called Arguments.xml in the specified folder.
Installation
33
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
How do I see the parameters that were used during my customized installation?
The full list of parameters used to run the installation are in
C:\ProgramData\Sony\Installer\Sony–NetworkVMSRecordingServer (64_bit)I.log +
search for ‘Command line’
How do I see a full list of possible parameters?
Run Sony –Network Video Management SystemRecordingServerInstaller_x64.exe --help
Installation for workgroups
If you do not use a domain setup with an Active Directory server, but a workgroup setup, do the
following when you install:
1. Log in to Windows using a common administrator account.
Make sure to use the same account on all computers in the system.
2. Depending on your needs, start the management or recording server installation and click
Custom.
3. Depending on what you selected in step 2, select to install the Management or Recording
Server service using a common administrator account.
4. Finish the installation.
5. Repeat steps 1-4 to install any other systems you want to connect. They must all be
installed using a common administrator account.
You cannot use this approach when you upgrade workgroup installations. See instead Alternative
upgrade for workgroup (on page 46).
Installation
34
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Installation troubleshooting
The following issues may occur during or upon installation of the management server or recording
servers. For each issue, one or more solutions are available.
Issue: Recording server startup fails due to port conflict
This issue can only appear if the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) service is running as it uses
port 25. If port 25 is already in use for, it may not be possible to start the Recording Server
service. It is important that port number 25 is available for the recording server's SMTP service.
SMTP Service: Verification and solutions
To verify whether SMTP Service is installed:
1. From Windows' Start menu, select Control Panel.
2. In the Control Panel, double-click Add or Remove Programs.
3. In the left side of the Add or Remove Programs window, click Add/Remove Windows
Components.
4. In the Windows Components wizard, select Internet Information Services (IIS), and
click Details.
5. In the Internet Information Services (IIS) window, verify whether the SMTP Service
check box is selected. If so, SMTP Service is installed.
If SMTP Service is installed, select one of the following solutions:
Solution 1: Disable SMTP Service, or set it to manual startup
This solution lets you start the recording server without having to stop the SMTP Service every
time:
1. From Windows' Start menu, select Control Panel.
2. In the Control Panel, double-click Administrative Tools.
3. In the Administrative Tools window, double-click Services.
4. In the Services window, double-click Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP).
5. In the SMTP Properties window, click Stop, then set Startup type to either Manual or
Disabled.
When set to Manual, the SMTP Service can be started manually from the Services
window, or from a command prompt using the command net start SMTPSVC.
6. Click OK.
Solution 2: Remove SMTP service
Removing the SMTP Service may affect other applications using the SMTP Service.
1. From Windows' Start menu, select Control Panel.
2. In the Control Panel window, double-click Add or Remove Programs.
3. In the left side of the Add or Remove Programs window, click Add/Remove Windows
Components.
Installation
35
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
4. In the Windows Components wizard, select the Internet Information Services (IIS)
item, and click Details.
5. In the Internet Information Services (IIS) window, clear the SMTP Service check box.
6. Click OK, Next, and Finish.
Issue: Changes to SQL server location prevents database
access
This is an issue if the location of the SQL Server is changed, for example by changing the host
name of the computer running the SQL Server. The result of this issue is that the access to the
database is lost.
Solution: Use the update SQL address tool found at the tray icon.
Issue: Automatic installation of IIS failed
The Internet Information Services (IIS) is normally installed automatically. If the automatic
installation fails, you must install the IIS manually:
1. If automatic IIS installation fails, you see an error message asking you to install the IIS
manually. In the error message box, click Install IIS Manually.
2. Select Server Manager from Windows' Start menu. In the left side of the Server
Manager window, select Roles, then the Roles Summary.
3. Now select Add Roles to start a wizard.
4. In the wizard, click Next, select Web Server (IIS), and follow the wizard's steps.
5. When you reach the wizard's Select Role Services step, you see that some role services
are selected by default. However you should select some additional role services:
Installation

Under Security, select Basic Authentication and Windows authentication.

Under Management Tools, select IIS Management Console, expand it, and
select IIS 6 Metabase Compatibility, IIS 6 WMI Compatibility, IIS 6
Scripting Tools, and IIS 6 Management Console.
36
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
When ready, the relevant part of the Role services tree should look like this:
6. Complete the wizard by following the remaining steps.
Configure the system in the Management
Client
In the following, you see a list of the typical tasks for configuring your system.
Even if the tasks are listed as a checklist, a completed checklist does not in itself guarantee that
the system matches the exact requirements of your organization. To make the system match the
needs of your organization, Sony recommends that you monitor and adjust the system
continuously.
For example, it is a good idea to test and adjust the motion detection sensitivity settings of
individual cameras under different physical conditions, including day/night and windy calm
weather, once the system is running.
The setup of rules, which determine most of the actions your system performs, including when to
record video, is another example of configuration that you can change according to your
organization's needs.
Installation
37
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
You have finished the initial installation of your system.
See Install the system (on page 27).
Change the trial SLC to a permanent SLC (if required).
See Change Software License Code (on page 38).
Log in to the Management Client.
Authorize use of your system's recording servers.
See Authorize a recording server (on page 59).
Verify that each recording server's storage settings meet your needs.
See About storage and archiving (on page 62).
Verify that each recording server's archiving settings meet your needs.
See Archive settings properties (on page 69).
Detect the hardware, cameras or video encoders to add to each recording server.
See Add hardware (on page 74).
Configure each recording server's individual cameras.
See About camera devices (on page 85).
Enable storage and archiving for individual cameras or for a group of cameras. This is
done from the individual cameras or from the device group.
See Attach a device or group of devices to a storage (on page 65).
Enable and configure devices.
See Working with devices (on page 85).
Rules determine the system's behavior to a large extent. You create rules to define when
cameras should record, when pan-tilt-zoom (PTZ) cameras should patrol, and when
notifications should be sent, for example.
Create rules.
See About rules and events (on page 129).
Add roles to the system.
See About roles (on page 164).
Add users and/or groups of users to each of the roles.
See Assign/remove users and groups to/from roles (on page 167).
Activate licenses.
See Activate licenses offline (on page 56).
Change Software License Code
If you run your installation on a trial Software License Code (SLC) during the first period, you can
change it into a permanent SLC without any un- or reinstallation actions when you have received
your new software license file.
Installation
38
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Important: This must be done locally on the management server. You cannot do this from the
Management Client.
1. On the management server, go to the notification area of the taskbar.
2. Right-click the Management Server icon and select Change License.
3. Click Import License.
4. Next, select the software license file saved for this purpose. When done, the selected
software license file location is added just below the Import License button.
5. Click OK and you are now ready to register SLC. See Register Software License Code (on
page 26).
Install clients
Install Network Video Management System Smart Client
silently
You can deploy Network Video Management System Smart Client or your surveillance software to
users’ computers using tools such as Microsoft Systems Management Server (SMS). Such tools let
you build up databases of hardware and software on local networks. The databases can then,
among other things, be used for distributing and installing software applications, such as Network
Video Management System Smart Client, over local networks.
1. Locate the Smart Client installation program (.exe) file – Sony-NetworkVMSSmartClient.exe
or Sony-NetworkVMSSmartClient_x64.exe for 32-bit and 64-bit versions respectively. You
find the file in a subfolder under the folder httpdocs. The httpdocs folder is located under
the folder in which your Sony surveillance software is installed.
The path is typically:
C:\Program Files\Sony\- Network VMS Management
Server\IIS\httpdocs\Network Video Management System Smart Client
Installer\[version number] [bit-version]\All Languages\en-US
For example:
C:\Program Files\Sony\- Network VMS Management
Server\IIS\httpdocs\Network Video Management System Smart Client
Installer\2016 (32-bit)\All Languages\en-US
2. Run a silent installation using one of the following two options:
a
Run with default parameter settings:
To run a silent installation using the default values for all parameters, start a command
prompt (cmd.exe) in the directory where the installation program is located and perform
following command:
>Sony-NetworkVMSSmartClient.exe -–quiet
Installation
39
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
This performs a quiet installation of the Network Video Management System Smart Client
using default values for parameters such as target directory and so on. To change the
default settings, see below.
b
Customize default parameters using an xml argument file as input:
To customize the default installation settings, provide an xml file with modified values as
input. To generate the xml file with default values, open a command prompt in the
directory where the installation program is located and perform the following command:
>Sony-NetworkVMSSmartClient.exe --generateargsfile=[path]
Open the generated Arguments.xml file, using for example Windows Notepad, and perform
any changes needed. Then, to run silent installation using these modified values, perform
the following command in the same directory.
>Sony-NetworkVMSSmartClient.exe --arguments=args.xml --quiet
Install NVMS Mobile server
Once you have installed the NVMS Mobile server, you can use NVMS Mobile client and Network
Video Management System Web Client with your system. To reduce the overall use of system
resources on the computer running the management server, install the NVMS Mobile server on a
separate computer.
The management server has a built-in public installation webpage. From this webpage,
administrators and end-users can download and install the required Network Video Management
System components from the management server or any other computer in the system.
To access the installation webpage:
1. Enter the following URL in your browser: http://[management server
address]/installation/admin
[management server address] is the IP address or host name of the management server.
2. Click All Languages for the NVMS Mobile server installer.
3. Run the downloaded file. Click Yes to all warnings. Unpacking starts.
4. Select language for the installer. Click Continue.
5. Read and accept the license agreement. Click Continue.
6. Select the installation type. Click Typical to install with the default selections.
7. Specify the primary surveillance system server:

Management server URL

Log in

User name and password. Click Continue.
8. Select the file location and product language. Click Install. When the installation is
complete, a list of successfully installed components is displayed. Click Close.
You are ready for configuration of NVMS Mobile (see "NVMS Mobile configuration" on page 216).
Installation
40
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Download Manager/download web page
The management server has a built-in web page. This web page enables administrators and end
users to download and install required Network Video Management System components from any
location, locally or remotely.
The web page is capable of displaying two sets of content, both in a language version that by
default matches the language of the system installation:

One web page is targeted at administrators, enabling them to download and install key
system components. Most often the web page is automatically loaded at the end of the
management server installation and the default content is displayed. On the management
server, you can access the web page from Windows' Start menu, select Programs >
Sony > Administrative Installation Page. Otherwise you can enter the URL:
http://[management server address]:[port]/installation/admin/
[management server address] is the IP address or host name of the management server,
and [port] is the port number which you have configured IIS to use on the management
server. If not accessing the web page on the management server itself, log in with an
account which has administrator rights on the management server.

One web page is targeted at end users, providing them access to client applications with
default configuration. On the management server, you can access the web page from
Windows' Start menu, select Programs > Sony > Public Installation Page. Otherwise
you can enter the URL:
http://[management server address]:[port]/installation/
[management server address] is the IP address or host name of the management server,
and [port] is the port number which you have configured IIS to use on the management
server.
The two web pages have some default content so you can use them straight away after
installation. As administrator however, by using the Download Manager, you can customize what
should be displayed on the web pages. You can also move components between the two versions
of the web page. To move a component, right-click it, and select the web page version you want to
move the component to.
Even though you can control which components users can download and install in Download
Manager, you cannot use it as a users' rights management tool. Such rights are determined by
roles defined in the Management Client.
On the management server, you can access the Network Video Management System Download
Manager from Windows' Start menu, select Programs > Sony > Network Video Management
System Download Manager.
Download Manager's default configuration
The Download Manager has a default configuration. This ensures that your organization's users can
access standard components from the start.
The default configuration provides you a default setup with access to downloading extra or optional
components. Usually you access the web page from the management server computer, but you can
also access the web page from other computers.
Installation
41
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual

The first level: Refers to your Network Video Management System product.

The second level: Refers to the two targeted versions of the web page. Default refers to
the web page version viewed by end users. Administration refers to the web page version
viewed by system administrators.

The third level: Refers to the languages in which the web page is available.

The fourth level: Refers to the components which are - or can be made - available to users.

The fifth level: Refers to particular versions of each component, which are - or can be
made - available to users.

The sixth level: Refers to the language versions of the components which are - or can be
made - available to users.
The fact that only standard components are initially available - and only in the same language
version as the system itself - helps reduce installation time and save space on the server. There is
no need to have a component or language version available on the server if nobody uses it.
You can make more components or languages available as required and you can hide or remove
unwanted components or languages.
Download Manager's standard installers (user)
By default, the following components are available for separate installation from the management
server's download web page targeted at users (controlled by the Download Manager):

Recording servers.

Management Client

Network Video Management System Smart Client

Event server, used in connection with map functionality

Log server, used for providing the necessary functionality for logging system information

Service channel, enables automatic and transparent configuration communication between
servers and clients

NVMS Mobile server - only available here

More options may be available in your organization.
For installation of device packs, see Device pack installer - must be downloaded (on page 44).
Add/publish Download Manager installer components
You must complete two procedures to make non-standard components and new versions available
on the management server's download page.
First you add new and/or non-standard components to the Download Manager. Then you
use it to fine-tune which components should be available in the various language versions of
the web page.
If the Download Manager is open, close it before installing new components.
Adding new/non-standard files to the Download Manager:
Installation
42
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
1. On the computer where you downloaded the component(s), go to Window's Start, enter a
Command Prompt
2. In the Command Prompt, execute the name of the file (.exe) with:[space]--ss_registration
Example: RecordingServer_setup_x64.exe --ss_registration
The file is now added to the Download Manager, but not installed on the current computer.
To get an overview of installer commands, in the Command Prompt, type [space]--help and the
following window appears:
When you have installed new components they are by default selected in the Download Manager
and are immediately available to users via the web page. You can always show or hide features on
the web page by selecting or clearing check boxes in the Download Manager's tree structure.
You can change the sequence in which components are displayed on the web page. In the
Download Manager's tree structure, drag component items and drop them at the required position.
Hide/remove Download Manager installer components
You have three options:

Hide components from the web page by clearing check boxes in the Download Manager's
tree structure. The components are still installed on the management server, and by
selecting check boxes in the Download Manager's tree structure you can quickly make the
components available again.

Remove the installation of components on the management server. The components
disappear from the Download Manager, but installation files for the components are kept at
C:\Program Files (x86)\Sony\- Network VMS Download Manager, so you can re-install them
later if required.
1. In the Download Manager, click Remove features.
Installation
43
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
2. In the Remove Features window, select the feature(s) you want to remove.
3. Click OK and Yes.

Remove installation files for non-required features from the management server.
This can help save disk space on the server if you know that your organization is not going
to use certain features.
Device pack installer - must be downloaded
The device pack (containing device drivers) included in your original installation is not included on
the download website. So, if you need to reinstall the device pack or make the device pack installer
available, you must first add or publish the latest device pack installer to the Download Manager:
1. Get the newest device pack from the download page on the Sony website
http://www.sony.net/CameraSystem/NVMS/Software.
2. Add/publish it to the Download Manager by calling it with the --ss_registration command.
If you do not have a network connection, you can reinstall the entire recording server from the
Download Manager. The installation files for the recording server is placed locally on your computer
and in this way you automatically get a reinstall of the device pack.
Upgrade
About upgrade
This information is only relevant if you are upgrading a previous Network Video Management
System installation.
Important: Your Network Video Management System no longer supports Microsoft Windows XP.
When you upgrade, all components, except the management server database, are automatically
removed and replaced. This includes the drivers of your device pack.
Installation
44
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
The management server database contains the entire system configuration (recording server
configurations, camera configurations, rules, and so on). As long as you do not remove the
management server database, no reconfiguration of your system configuration is needed, even if
you may want to configure some of the new features in the new version.
Backward compatibility with recording servers from Network Video Management System versions
older than this current version is limited. You can still access recordings on such older recording
servers, but to be able to change their configuration, they must be of the same version as this
current one. Sony recommends that you upgrade all recording servers in your system.
When you do an upgrade including your recording servers, you are asked whether you want to
update or keep your video device drivers. If you choose to update, it might take a few minutes for
your hardware devices to make contact with the new video device drivers after restarting your
system. This is due to several internal checks being performed on the newly installed drivers.
Upgrade prerequisites

Have your software license file (see "About licenses" on page 18) (.lic) ready.

Service pack upgrade: During the installation of the management server, the
wizard may ask you to specify the location of the software license file. You can use
both the software license file you got after your purchase of your system (or latest
upgrade) and the activated software license file you got after your last license
activation.

Version upgrade: After you purchased the new version, you receive a new
software license file. During the installation of the management server, the wizard
asks you to specify the location of the new software license file.
The system verifies the software license file before you can continue. Already added
hardware devices and other devices, which require licenses go into a grace period. If you
have not enabled automatic license activation, remember to activate your licenses manually
before the grace period expires. If you do not have your software license file, contact your
Network Video Management System reseller.

Have your new product version software ready. If you have not purchased the software
on a DVD, you can download it from the download page on the Sony website
http://www.sony.net/CameraSystem/NVMS/Software.

Make sure that you have backed up your system configuration (see "About backing up and
restoring your system configuration" on page 245).
The management server stores your system's configuration in a database. The system
configuration database can be stored in two different ways:
1. In a SQL Server Express Edition database on the management server itself.
2. In a database on an existing SQL Server on your network.
If using 2), you must have Administrator rights on the SQL Server whenever you
want to create, move or upgrade the management server's system configuration
database on the SQL Server. Once you are done creating, moving or updating, it is
sufficient to be the database owner of the management server's system configuration
database on the SQL Server.
When you are ready to start the upgrade, follow the procedures in Upgrade best practices (on page
46).
Installation
45
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Upgrade best practices
Read about upgrade prerequisites (on page 45) including SQL database backup before you start
the actual upgrade.
If your system is a single server system, you can simply install the new Network Video
Management System Enterprise Edition software on top of the existing installation.
In a or system, you must start upgrading the central site and afterwards the remote sites.
Perform the upgrade in this order:
1. Upgrade the management server with the Distributed option in the installer.
1. On the wizard page where you choose components, all management servers
components are preselected.
2. Specify your SQL server, and choose to keep the database.
2. Upgrade the recording servers. You can install recording servers using the installation
wizard (see "Install the recording server" on page 30) or silently (see "Install a recording
server silently" on page 31). The advantage of a silent install is that you can do it remotely.
3. Upgrade the event server. From your management server's download web page, install the
Event Server.
Continue these steps for the other sites in your system.
Alternative upgrade for workgroup
If you do not use a domain setup, but a workgroup setup, you must do the following when you
upgrade:
1. On the recording server, create a local Windows user.
2. From the Windows Control Panel, find the Sony – Network Video Management
System Data Collector service. Right-click it, select Properties, and select the Log on
tab. Set the Data Collector service to run as the local windows user you just created on the
recording server.
3. On the management server, create the same local Windows user (with the same user name
and password).
4. In the Management Client, add this local Windows user to the Administrator's group.
For installing with workgroups, see Installation for workgroups (on page 34).
Installation
46
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
First time use
Best practices
Protect recording databases from corruption
You can select which action to take if a camera database becomes corrupted. The actions include
several database repair options. While it is good to have such options, Sony – recommends that
you take steps to ensure that your camera databases do not become corrupted.
Hard disk failure: protect your drives
Hard disk drives are mechanical devices and are vulnerable to external factors. The following are
examples of external factors which may damage hard disk drives and lead to corrupt camera
databases:

Vibration (make sure the surveillance system server and its surroundings are stable)

Strong heat (make sure the server has adequate ventilation)

Strong magnetic fields (avoid)

Power outages (make sure you use an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS))

Static electricity (make sure you ground yourself if you are going to handle a hard disk
drive).

Fire, water, etc. (avoid)
Windows Task Manager: be careful when you end processes
When you work in Windows Task Manager, be careful not to end any processes which affect the
surveillance system. If you end an application or system service by clicking End Process in the
Windows Task Manager, the process is not be given the chance to save its state or data before it is
terminated. This may lead to corrupt camera databases.
Windows Task Manager typically displays a warning if you attempt to end a process. Unless you are
absolutely sure that ending the process is not going to affect the surveillance system, click No
when the warning message asks you if you really want to terminate the process.
Power outages: use a UPS
The single-most common reason for corrupt databases is the recording server being shut down
abruptly, without files being saved and without the operating system being closed down properly.
This may happen due to power outages, due to somebody accidentally pulling out the server's
power cable, or similar.
The best way of protecting your recording servers from being shut down abruptly is to equip each
of your recording servers with a UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply).
The UPS works as a battery-driven secondary power source, providing the necessary power for
saving open files and safely powering down your system in the event of power irregularities. UPSs
First time use
47
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
vary in sophistication, but many UPSs include software for automatically saving open files, for
alerting system administrators, etc.
Selecting the right type of UPS for your organization's environment is an individual process. When
you assess your needs, however, bear in mind the amount of runtime you require the UPS to be
able to provide if the power fails. Saving open files and shutting down an operating system
properly may take several minutes.
About daylight saving time
Daylight saving time (DST) is the practice of advancing clocks in order for evenings to have more
daylight and mornings to have less. The use of DST varies between countries/regions.
When you work with a surveillance system, which is inherently time-sensitive, it is important that
you know how the system handles DST.
Spring: Switch from Standard Time to DST
The change from standard time to DST is not much of an issue since you jump one hour forward.
Example:
The clock jumps forward from 02:00 standard time to 03:00 DST, and the day has 23 hours. In
that case, there is no data between 02:00 and 03:00 in the morning since that hour, for that day,
did not exist.
Fall: Switch from DST to Standard Time
When you switch from DST to standard time in the fall, you jump one hour back.
Example:
The clock jumps backward from 02:00 DST to 01:00 standard time, repeating that hour, and the
day has 25 hours. You reach 01:59:59, then immediately revert back to 01:00:00. If the system
did not react, it would essentially re-record that hour, so the first instance of 01:30 would be
overwritten by the second instance of 01:30.
To solve such an issue from happening, your system archives the current video in the event the
system time changes by more than five minutes. You cannot view the first instance of the 01:00
hour directly in any clients, but the data is recorded and safe. You can browse this video in
Network Video Management System Smart Client by opening the archived database directly.
About time servers
Once your system receives images, they are instantly time-stamped. Since cameras are separate
units which may have separate timing devices, camera time and your system time may not
correspond fully. This may occasionally lead to confusion. If your cameras support timestamps,
Sony recommends that you auto-synchronize camera and system time through a time server for
consistent synchronization.
For information about how to configure a time server, search the Microsoft website
http://www.microsoft.com/ for 'time server', 'time service', or similar terms.
First time use
48
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Management Client overview
Login overview
When you launch the Management Client, you must first enter your login information to connect to
a system.
About login authorization
The system allows administrators to set up users so they can only log into a system if a second
user with sufficient rights authorizes their login. In this case, Network Video Management System
Smart Client or the Management Client asks for the second authorization during login.
A user associated with the built-in Administrators role has always permission to authorize and is
not asked for a second login, unless the user is associated with another role that requires a second
login.
To associate login authorization with a role:

Set Login authorization required for the selected role on the Info tab (see "Info tab
(roles)" on page 169) under Roles, so that the user is asked for additional authorization
during login.

Set Authorize users for the selected role on the Overall Security tab (see "Overall
Security tab (roles)" on page 169) under Roles, so that the user can authorize other users'
logins.
You can choose both options for the same user. This means that the user is asked for additional
authorization during login, but can also authorize other users' logins, except for his/her own.
Management Client window overview
The Management Client window is divided into panes. The number of panes and layout depend on
your:

system configuration

task

available functions.
Below are some examples of typical layouts:
First time use
49
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual

When you work with recording servers and devices:

When you work with rules, time and notification profiles, users, roles:

When you view logs:
First time use
50
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Panes overview
The illustration outlines a typical window layout. You can customize the layout so it may look
different on your computer.
1.
Site Navigation pane
2.
Overview pane
3.
Properties pane
4.
Preview pane
Site Navigation pane: This is your main navigation element in the Management Client. It reflects
the name, settings and configurations of the site that you have logged into. The site name is visible
at the top of the pane. The features are grouped into categories that reflect the functionality of the
software.
Overview pane: Provides an overview of the element you have selected in the Site Navigation
pane, for example as a detailed list. When you select an element in the Overview pane, it typically
displays the properties in the Properties pane. When you right-click elements in the Overview
pane you get access to the management features.
Properties pane: Displays the properties of the element selected in the Overview pane. The
properties appear on several dedicated tabs:
Example of properties displayed on tabs
Preview pane: The Preview pane appears when you work with recording servers and devices. It
shows preview images from the selected cameras or displays information about the state of the
device. The example shows a camera preview image with information about the resolution and
data rate of the camera's live stream:
By default, the information shown with the camera preview images concerns live streams. This is
displayed in green text above the preview. If you want recording stream information instead (red
text), select View > Show Recording Streams in the menu.
First time use
51
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Performance can be affected if the Preview pane displays preview images from many cameras at a
high frame rate. To control the number of preview images, and their frame rate, select Options >
General in the menu.
Menu overview
Example only - some menus change depending on context.
File menu
You can save changes to the configuration and exit the application. You can also back up your
configuration, see About backing up and restoring your system configuration (on page 245).
Edit menu
You can undo changes.
View menu
Name
Description
Reset Application Layout
Reset the layout of the different panes in the Management Client
to their default settings.
Preview Window
Toggle the Preview pane on and off when working with recording
servers and devices.
Show Recording Streams
By default, the information shown with preview images in the
Preview pane concerns live streams of the cameras. If you want
information about recording streams instead, select Show
Recording Streams.
Action menu
The content of the Action menu differs depending on the element you have selected in the Site
Navigation pane. The actions you can choose from are the same as when you right-click the
element. The elements are described in Management Client elements (on page 54).
First time use
52
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Name
Description
Refresh
Is always available and reloads the requested information from
the management server.
Tools menu
Name
Registered Services
Description
Manage registered services.
See About the service channel (on page 265).
View all roles of a selected user or group.
Effective Roles
Options
Only relevant if you run Network Video Management System
Enterprise Edition.
Opens the Options dialog box, which lets you define and edit
global system settings.
Only relevant if you run Network Video Management System
Enterprise Edition.
Help menu
You can access the help system and information about the version of the Management Client.
First time use
53
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Management Client elements
Basics
License information
You can keep track of all licenses that share the same software license file both on this site and on
all other sites, your SUP subscriptions and decide how you want to activate your licenses. For basic
information about the different Network Video Management System licenses, see About licenses
(on page 18).
Software Upgrade Plan
Here you can find a link to the end user license agreement, which you accepted prior to the
installation.
Installed Products
Lists the following information about all your installed base licenses for Network Video Management
System VMS and add-on products that share the same software license file:

Products and versions

The products' software license code (SLC).

The expiration date of your SLC. Typically unlimited.

The expiration date of your SUP subscription.
License Overview - All sites
Lists the number of activated hardware device licenses or other licenses in your software license
file and the total amount of available licenses on your system. Here you can easily see if you can
still grow your system without purchasing additional licenses.
If you have licenses for add-on products, you can see additional details about these under the addon product specific nodes in the Site Navigation Pane.
License Details - Current Site
The Activated column lists the number of activated hardware device licenses or other licenses on
this site.
You can also see the number of used device changes without activation (see "About device changes
without activation" on page 55) and how many you have available per year in the Changes
without activation column.
If you have licenses that you have not yet activated and that therefore run in a grace period, these
are listed in the In Grace Period column. The expiration date of the first license which expires,
appears in red below the table.
Management Client elements
54
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
If you forget to activate licenses before the grace period expires, they will stop sending video to
the system. These licenses are shown in the Grace Period Expired column. See also Activate
licenses after grace period (on page 57).
If you have used more licenses than you have available, these are listed in the Without License
column and cannot be used in your system. See also Get additional licenses (on page 57).
If you have licenses in a grace period, with an expired grace period or without license, a message
will pop up to remind you every time you log into your Management Client.
Hardware devices without licenses are identified by an exclamation mark in the Management
Client. Note that the exclamation mark is also used for other purposes. Place your mouse over the
exclamation mark to see the purpose.
Features for activating licenses
Below the three tables are

A check box for enabling automatic license activation and a link to edit the user credentials
for automatic activation. For more information see About automatic license activation and
Enable automatic license activation. If the automatic activation has failed, a failed message
will appear in red. For more information, click the Details link.

A drop-down list for manually activating licenses. For more information see Activate
licenses offline (on page 56).

In the lower right corner of the page, you can see when your licenses were activated last
(automatically or manually) and when the information on the page were refreshed. The
time stamps are from the server and not from the local computer.
About device changes without activation
On the Basics > License Information page, the column Changes without activation shows
the number of hardware devices you can replace or add without having to activate your hardware
device licenses and how many changes you have already made since the last activation. Hardware
devices added within your device changes without activation run as fully activated hardware device
licenses.
How the number of device changes without activation is calculated
The device changes without activation are calculated based on three variables. If you have several
installations of the Sony software, the variables apply to each of them separately. The variables
are:

C% that is a fixed percentage of the total amount of activated licenses.

Cmin that is a fixed minimum value of the number of device changes without
activation.

Cmax that is a fixed maximum value of the number of devices changes without
activation.
Management Client elements
55
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
The number of device changes without activation can never be lower than the Cmin value or
higher than the Cmax value. The calculated value based on the C% variable changes according to
how many activated devices you have on each installation in your system. Devices added with
device changes without activation are not counted as activated by the C% variable.
Sony defines the values of all three variables and the values are subject to change without
notification. The values of the variables differ depending on the product.
Examples based on C% = 15%, Cmin = 10 and Cmax =100
A customer buys 100 hardware device licenses. He adds 100 cameras to his system. Unless he has
enabled automatic license activation, his device changes without activation is still zero. He
activates his licenses and he now has 15 device changes without activation.
A customer buys 100 hardware device licenses. He adds 100 cameras to his system and activates
his licenses. His device changes without activation is now 15. The customer decides to delete a
hardware device from his system. He has now 99 activated devices and his number of device
changes without activation drops to 14.
A customer buys 1000 hardware device licenses. He adds 1000 cameras and activates his licenses.
His device changes without activation is now 100. According to the C% variable, he should now
have had 150 devices changes without activation, but the Cmax variable only allows him to have
100 devices changes without activation.
A customer buys 10 hardware device licenses. He adds 10 cameras to his system and activates his
licenses. His number of device changes without activation is now 10 because of the Cmin variable.
If the number was only calculated based on the C% variable, he would only have had 1 (15% of
10 = 1.5 rounded off to 1).
A customer buys 115 hardware device licenses. He adds 100 cameras to his system and activates
his licenses. His device changes without activation is now 15. He adds another 15 cameras without
activating them, using 15 out of 15 of his device changes without activation. He removes 50 of the
cameras from the system and his device changes without activation goes down to 7. This means
that 8 of the cameras previously added within the 15 device changes without activation go into a
grace period. The customer now adds 50 new cameras. Because the customer activated 100
cameras on his system last time he activated his licenses, the device changes without activation
goes back to 15 and the 8 cameras, which were moved into a grace period, moves back as device
changes without activation. The 50 new cameras go into a grace period.
Activate licenses offline
If the computer that runs the management server does not have Internet access, you can activate
licenses offline.
1. On the License Information node, select Activate License Manually -> Offline ->
Export License for Activation to export a license request file (.lrq) with information
about your added hardware devices.
2. The license request file (.lrq) is automatically given the same name as your SLC. If you
have several sites, remember to make the name unique so you easily can identify which
file belong to which site.
3. Copy the license request file to a computer with internet access and log into our website to
obtain the activated software license file (.lic). See the license guide on our website
http://www.sony.net/CameraSystem/NVMS/Manuals.
4. Copy the .lic file that has the same name as your license request file to your computer with
Management Client.
Management Client elements
56
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
5. In Management Client on the License Information page, select Activate License Offline
> Import Activated License, and select the activated software license file to import it
and thereby activate your licenses.
6. Click Finish to end the activation process.
Activate licenses after grace period
If you do not activate a license within the grace period, the device becomes unavailable and cannot
send data to the surveillance system.

The device itself, its configuration and other settings are not removed from the system
configuration.

To be able to receive data from the expired device again, simply activate the license. For
more information, see Activate licenses offline (on page 56).
Get additional licenses
If you want to add or if you have already added more hardware devices than you currently have
licenses for, you must buy additional licenses to enable the devices to send data to your system.

To get additional licenses for your system, contact your Network Video Management
System product reseller.
New licenses to your existing surveillance system version:

Simply activate your licenses manually to get access to the new licenses. For more
information, see Activate licenses offline (on page 56).
New licenses and an upgraded surveillance system version:

You receive an updated software license file (.lic) (see "About licenses" on page 18)
with the new licenses and the new version. You must use the new software license
file during the installation of the new version. For more information, see Upgrade
prerequisites (on page 45).
Licenses and hardware device replacement
You can replace a hardware device, such as a camera, licensed in your system with a new
hardware device, and have the new hardware device activated and licensed instead.
If you remove a hardware device from a recording server, you free a hardware device license.
If you replace a camera with a similar camera (manufacturer, brand, and model), and give the new
camera the same IP address, you maintain full access to all the camera's databases. In this case,
you move the network cable from the old camera to the new one without changing any settings in
the Management Client.
If you replace a hardware device with a different model, you must use the Replace Hardware
wizard (see Replace hardware (on page 253)) to map all relevant databases of cameras,
microphones, inputs, outputs, and settings.
Management Client elements
57
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Site information
You can add additional information to a site for an easier identification of each site, for example, in
a large setup. Apart from the site name, you can describe:

Address/location

Administrator(s)

Additional information
Update site information
To update site information:
1. Select Edit.
2. Select a tag.
3. Enter information in the Value field.
4. Click OK.
Servers and hardware
Recording servers
About recording servers
You use recording servers for recording of video feeds, and for communicating with cameras and
other devices. A surveillance system typically consists of several recording servers.
Recording servers are computers where you have installed the recording server software, and
configured it to communicate with a management server. You can see your recording servers in the
Overview pane when you expand the Servers folder and then select Recording Servers.
Recording server listed in Overview pane
Backward compatibility with recording server versions older than this version of the management
server is limited. You can still access recordings on recording servers with older versions, but if you
want to change their configuration, make sure they match this version of the management server.
Sony recommends that you upgrade all recording servers in your system to the same version as
your management server.
You have several options related to management of your recording servers:
Management Client elements
58
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual

Authorize a recording server (on page 59)

Add hardware (on page 74)

Move hardware (on page 77)

Delete all hardware (see "Delete all hardware on a recording server" on page 74)

Remove a recording server (on page 73)
Important: When the Recording Server service is running, it is very important that Windows
Explorer or other programs do not access Media Database files or folders associated with your
system setup. If they do, it is likely that the recording server cannot rename or move relevant
media files. This might bring the recording server to a halt. To restart a stopped recording server,
stop the Recording Server service, close the program accessing the relevant media file(s) or
folder(s), and restart the Recording Server service.
Authorize a recording server
When you first use the system, or when you have added new recording servers to the system, you
must authorize the new recording servers.
When you authorize a recording server, you configure it to connect to your management server.
1. Right-click the required recording server in the Overview pane.
2. Select Authorize Recording Server:
3. After a moment, the recording server is authorized and ready for further configuration via
the tabs. You can also Add hardware (on page 74).
Change/verify the basic configuration of a recording server
If your Management Client does not list all the recording servers you have installed, the most likely
reason is that you have configured the setup parameters (for example, the IP address or host
name of the management server) incorrectly during installation.
You do not need to re-install recording servers to specify the parameters of the management
servers, but you can change/verify its basic configuration:
1. On the computer that runs the recording server, right-click the Recording Server icon in
the notification area.
2. Select Stop Recording Server service.
3. Right-click the Recording Server icon again and select Change Settings.
Management Client elements
59
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
The Recording Server Settings window appears.
4. Verify/change the following settings:

Management server hostname/IP address: Specify the IP address or host
name of the management server to which the recording server should be
connected.

Management server port: Specify the port number to be used when
communicating with the management server. Default is port 9993. You can change
this if required, but the port number must always match the port number set up on
the management server.
5. Click OK.
6. To start the Recording Server service again, right-click the Recording Server icon, and
select Start Recording Server service.
Important: Stopping the Recording Server service means that you cannot record and view live
video while you verify/change the recording server's basic configuration.
Recording server status icons
The Management Client uses the following icons to indicate the state of individual recording
servers:
Icon
Description
Recording server is running
Recording server is communicating
Recording server requires attention: This icon typically appears because the
Recording Server service is stopped.
1) Right-click the recording server icon in the notification area.
2) Start/stop the Recording Server service and view recording server status
messages.
Recording server must be authorized: Appears when you load the recording
server for the first time. When you first use a recording server, you must authorize
it:
1) Right-click the required recording server icon.
2) Select Authorize Recording Server. After a moment, the recording server is
authorized and ready for further configuration.
Ongoing database repair: Appears when databases are corrupted, for example
due to a power failure, and the recording server is repairing them. The repair
process may take some time if the databases are large.
See Protect recording databases from corruption (on page 47) for information
about how to avoid corrupt databases.
Important: During a database repair at startup, you cannot record video from
cameras connected to the recording server. Only live viewing is available.
A database repair at normal operation does not affect any recordings.
Management Client elements
60
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Info tab (recording server)
You can verify or edit the name and description of a selected recording server on the Info tab.
Info tab, displaying information about a recording server.
Info tab properties
Name
Name
Description
Used when the recording server is listed in the system and
clients. The name does not have to be unique.
When you rename a recording server, the name is changed
globally in the Management Client.
Description
The description appears in a number of listings within the system.
A description is not mandatory.
Host name
Displays the recording server's host name.
Web server URL
Displays the URL of the recording server's web server. You use
the web server, for example, for handling PTZ camera control
commands, and for handling browse and live requests from
Network Video Management System Smart Client. The URL
includes the port number used for web server communication
(typically port 7563).
Time zone
Displays the time zone in which the recording server is located.
Management Client elements
61
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Storage tab (recording server)
On the Storage tab, you can set up, manage and view storages for a selected recording server.
About storage and archiving
When a camera records video or audio, all specified recordings are per default stored in the storage
defined for the device. Each storage saves recordings in the recording database Recording. A
storage has no default archive(s), but you can create these.
To avoid that the recording database runs full, you can create additional storages (see "Add a new
recording storage" on page 64). You can also create archives (see "Create an archive within a
storage" on page 64) within each storage and start an archiving process to store data.
Archiving is the automatic transfer of recordings from, for example, a camera's recording database
to another location. In this way, the amount of recordings that you can store is not limited to the
size of the recording database. With archiving you can also back up your recordings to another
media.
You configure storage and archiving on a per-recording server basis.
As long as you store archived recordings locally or on accessible network drives, you can use
Network Video Management System Smart Client to view them. This is also how you view
recordings stored in a cameras' regular databases.
The following mostly mentions cameras and video, but speakers, microphones, audio and sound
also apply.
Important: Sony recommends that you use a dedicated hard disk drive for the recording server
database to prevent low disk performance. When you format the hard disk, it is important to
change its Allocation unit size setting from 4 to 64 kilobytes. This is to significantly improve
recording performance of the hard disk. You can read more about allocating unit sizes and find help
on the Microsoft website http://support.microsoft.com/kb/140365/en-us.
Important: The oldest data in a database is always auto-archived (or deleted if no next archive is
defined) when less than 5GB of space is free. If less than 1GB space is free, data is deleted. A
database always requires 250MB of free space. If you reach this limit because data is not deleted
fast enough, no more data is written to the database until you free up enough space. The actual
maximum size of your database becomes the amount of gigabytes that you specify, minus 5GB.
Management Client elements
62
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Attaching devices to a storage
Once you have configured the storage and archiving settings for a recording server, you can enable
storage and archiving for individual cameras or a group of cameras. This is done from the
individual devices or from the device group. See Attach a device or group of devices to a storage
(on page 65).
Effective archiving
When you enable archiving for a camera or a group of cameras, the content of the camera
database is automatically moved to an archive at intervals that you define.
Depending on your requirements, you can configure one or more archives for each of your
databases. Archives can be located either on the recording server computer itself, or at another
location which can be reached by the system, for example on a network drive.
By setting up your archiving in an effective way, you can prune and groom your database storage
usage if needed. Often, you want to make archived recordings take up as little space as possible
especially on a long-term basis, where it is perhaps even possible to slacken image quality a bit.
You can handle effective pruning and grooming from the Storage tab of a recording server by
adjusting several interdependent settings:

Recording database retention

Recording database size

Archive retention

Archive size

Archive schedule

Frames Per Second (FPS).
The size fields define the size of the camera's database, exemplified by the cylinder, and its
archive(s) respectively:
Recordings' way from recording database to archive to deletion
By means of retention time and size setting for the recording database, exemplified by the white
area in the cylinder, you define how old recordings must be before they are archived. In our
illustrated example, you archive the recordings when they are old enough to be archived.
The retention time and size setting for archives define how long the recordings remain in the
archive. Recordings remain in the archive for the time specified, or until the archive has reached
the specified size limit. When these settings are met, the system begins to overwrite old recordings
in the archive.
Management Client elements
63
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
The archiving schedule defines how often and at what times archiving takes place.
FPS determines the size of the data in the databases.
To archive your recordings, you must set all these parameters up in accordance with each other.
This means that the retention period of a next coming archive must always be longer than the
retention period of a current archive or recording database. This is because the number of
retention days stated for an archive includes all retention stated earlier in the process. Archiving
must also always take place more frequently than the retention period, otherwise you risk losing
data. If you have a retention time of 24 hours, any data older than 24 hours is deleted. Therefore,
to get your data safely moved to the next archive, it is important to run archiving more often than
every 24 hours.
Example: These storages (image to the left) have a retention time of 4 days and the
following archive (image to the right) a retention time of 10 days. Archiving is set to occur
every day at 10:30, ensuring a much more frequent archiving than retention time.
You can also control archiving by use of rules and events.
Add a new recording storage
You always create one storage with a predefined recording database named Recording. You
cannot rename it. Apart from a recording database, a storage can contain a number of archives.
1. To add an extra storage to a selected recording server, click the
button located below
the Storage configuration list. This opens the Storage and Recording Settings dialog
box.
2. Specify the relevant settings (see "Storage and Recording Settings properties" on page 68).
3. Click OK.
If needed, you are now ready to create archive(s) within your new storage. See Create an archive
within a storage (on page 64).
Create an archive within a storage
A storage has no default archive when it is created.
1. To create an archive, select the relevant storage in the Recording and archiving
configuration list.
2. Click the
button below the Recording and archiving configuration list.
3. In the Archive Settings dialog box, specify the required settings (see Archive settings
properties (on page 69)).
4. Click OK.
Management Client elements
64
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Attach a device or group of devices to a storage
Once a storage area is configured for a recording server, you can enable it for individual devices
such as cameras, microphones or speakers or a group of devices. You can also select which of a
recording server's storage areas you want to use for the individual device or the group.
1. Expand Devices and select either Cameras, Microphones or Speakers as required.
2. Select the device or a device group.
3. Select the Record tab.
4. In the Storage area, select Select.
5. In the dialog box that appears, select the database that should store the recordings of the
device and then click OK.
6. In the toolbar, click Save.
When you click the device usage number for the storage area on the Storage tab of the recording
server, the device is visible in the message report that appears.
Edit settings for a selected storage or archive
1. To edit a storage, select its recording database in the Recording and archiving
configuration list. To edit an archive, select the archive database.
2. Click the Edit Recording Storage button
archiving configuration list.
located below the Recording and
3. Either edit a recording database or edit an archive.
If you change the maximum size of a database, the system auto-archives recordings that exceed
the new limit. It auto-archives the recordings to the next archive or deletes them depending on
archiving settings.
Back up archived recordings
Many organizations want to back up their recordings by using tape drives or similar. Exactly how
you do this is highly individual and depends on the backup media used in your organization.
However, the following is worth bearing in mind:
Back up archives rather than camera databases
Always create backups based on the content of archives, not based on individual camera
databases. If you create backups based on the content of individual camera databases you may
cause sharing violations or other malfunctions.
When scheduling a backup, make sure the backup job does not overlap with your specified
archiving times. To view each recording server's archiving schedule in each of a recording server's
storage areas, see the Storage tab.
Know your archive structure so that you can target backups
When you archive recordings, you store them in a certain sub-directory structure within the
archive.
During all regular use of your system, the sub-directory structure is completely transparent to the
system's users when they browse all recordings with the Network Video Management System
Smart Client. This is true both with archived and non-archived recordings. It is relevant to know
the sub-directory structure if you want to back up your archived recordings. See About archive
Management Client elements
65
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
structure (on page 66) and Backing up and restoring configuration (see "Backing up and restoring
system configuration" on page 245).
About archive structure
When you archive recordings, they are stored in a certain sub-directory structure within the
archive.
During all regular use of your system, the sub-directory structure is completely transparent to the
system's users, as they browse all recordings with the Network Video Management System Smart
Client regardless of whether the recordings are archived or not. Knowing the sub-directory
structure is primarily interesting if you want to back up your archived recordings.
In each of the recording server's archive directories, the system automatically creates separate
sub-directories. These sub-directories are named after the name of the device and the archive
database.
Because you can store recordings from different cameras in the same archive, and since archiving
for each camera is likely to be performed at regular intervals, further sub-directories are also
automatically added.
These sub-directories each represent approximately an hour's worth of recordings. The one-hour
split makes it possible to remove only relatively small parts of an archive's data if you reach the
maximum allowed size of the archive.
The sub-directories are named after the device, followed by an indication of where the recordings
came from (edge camera or via SMTP), plus the date and time of the most recent database record
contained in the sub-directory.
Naming structure:
...[Storage Path]\[Storage name]\[device-name] - plus date and time of most
recent recording]\
If from edge camera:
...[Storage Path]\[Storage name]\[device-name] (Edge) - plus date and time of
most recent recording]\
If from SMTP:
...[Storage Path]\[Storage name]\[device-name] (SMTP) - plus date and time of
most recent recording]\
Real life example:
...F:\OurArchive\Archive1\Camera 1 on Axis Q7404 Video Server(10.100.50.137)
- 2011-10-05T11:23:47+02:00\
Sub-directories:
Even further sub-directories are automatically added. The amount and nature of these subdirectories depend on the nature of the actual recordings. For example, several different subdirectories are added if the recordings are technically divided into sequences. This is often the case
if you have used motion detection to trigger recordings.

Media: This folder contains the actual media that is either video or audio (not both).

MotionLevel: This folder contains motion level grids generated from the video data using
our motion detection algorithm. This data allows the Smart Search feature in Network
Video Management System Smart Client to do very fast searches.

Signature: This folder holds the signatures generated for the media data (in the Media
folder). With this information you can verify that the media data has not been tampered
with since it was recorded.
Management Client elements
66
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual

Motion: In this folder the system stores motion sequences. A motion sequence is a time
slice for which motion has been detected in the video data. This information is, for
example, used in the time line in Network Video Management System Smart Client.

Recording: In this folder the system stores recording sequences. A recording sequence is
a time slice for which there are coherent recordings of media data. This information is, for
example, used to draw the time line in Network Video Management System Smart Client.
If you want to back up your archives, you can target your backups if you know the basics of the
sub-directory structure.
Examples of backup:
To back up the content of an entire archive, back up the required archive directory and all of its
content. For example everything under:
...F:\OurArchive\
To back up the recordings from a particular camera from a particular period of time, back up the
contents of the relevant sub-directories only. For example everything under:
...F:\OurArchive\Archive1\Camera 1 on Axis Q7404 Video Server(10.100.50.137)
- 2011-10-05T11:23:47+02:00\
Delete an archive from a storage
1. Select the archive from the Recording and archiving configuration list.
It is only possible to delete the last archive in the list. The archive does not have to be
empty.
2. Click the
button located below the Recording and archiving configuration list.
3. Click Yes.
Delete a storage
You cannot delete the default storage or storages that devices use as the recording storage for live
recordings.
This means that you may need to move devices (see "Move hardware" on page 77) and any not
yet archived recordings to another storage before you delete the storage.
1. To see the list of devices that use this storage, click the device usage number.
If the storage has data from devices that have been moved to another recording server, a
warning appears. Click the link to see the list of devices.
2. Follow the steps in Move non-archived recordings from one storage to another (on page
68).
3. Continue until you have moved all devices.
4. Select the storage that you want to delete.
Management Client elements
67
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
5. Click the
button located below the Storage configuration list.
6. Click Yes.
Move non-archived recordings from one storage to another
You move recordings from one live recording database to another from the Record tab of the
device.
1. Select the device type. In the Overview pane, select the device.
2. Click the Record tab. In the upper part of the Storage area, click Select.
3. In the Select Storage dialog box, select the database.
4. Click OK.
5. In the Recordings Action dialog box, select if you want to remove already existing - but
non-archived - recordings to the new storage or if you want to delete them.
6. Click OK.
Storage and Recording Settings properties
In the Storage and Recording Settings dialog box, specify the following:
Name
Description
Name
Rename the storage if needed. Names must be unique.
Path
Specify the path to the directory to which you save recordings in
this storage. The storage does not necessarily have to be located
on the recording server computer.
If the directory does not exist, you can create it. Network drives
must be specified by using UNC (Universal Naming Convention)
format, example: \\server\volume\directory\.
Specify for how long recordings should stay in the archive before
they are deleted or moved to the next archive (depending on
archive settings).
Retention time
Management Client elements
The retention time must always be longer than the retention time
of the previous archive or the default recording database. This is
because the number of retention days specified for an archive
includes all the retention periods stated earlier in the process.
68
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Name
Description
Select the maximum number of gigabytes of recording data to
save in the recording database.
Recording data in excess of the specified number of gigabytes is
auto-moved to the first archive in the list - if any is specified - or
deleted.
Maximum size
Important: When less than 5GB of space is free, the system
always auto-archives (or deletes if no next archive is defined) the
oldest data in a database. If less than 1GB space is free, data is
deleted. A database always requires 250MB of free space. If you
reach this limit (if data is not deleted fast enough), no more data
is written to the database until you have freed enough space. The
actual maximum size of your database is the amount of gigabytes
you specify, minus 5GB.
Signing
Enables a digital signature to the recordings. This means, for
example, that the system confirms that exported video has not
been modified or tampered with when played back.
Password
Enter a password.
Archive Settings properties
In the Archive Settings dialog box, specify the following:
Name
Description
Name
Rename the storage if needed. Names must be unique.
Path
Specify the path to the directory to which you save recordings in
this storage. The storage does not necessarily have to be located
on the recording server computer.
If the directory does not exist, you can create it. Network drives
must be specified by using UNC (Universal Naming Convention)
format, example: \\server\volume\directory\.
Specify for how long recordings should stay in the archive before
they are deleted or moved to the next archive (depending on
archive settings).
Retention time
Management Client elements
The retention time must always be longer than the retention time
of the previous archive or the default recording database. This is
because the number of retention days specified for an archive
includes all the retention periods stated earlier in the process.
69
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Name
Description
Select the maximum number of gigabytes of recording data to
save in the recording database.
Recording data in excess of the specified number of gigabytes is
auto-moved to the first archive in the list - if any is specified - or
deleted.
Maximum size
Schedule
Important: When less than 5GB of space is free, the system
always auto-archives (or deletes if no next archive is defined) the
oldest data in a database. If less than 1GB space is free, data is
deleted. A database always requires 250MB of free space. If you
reach this limit (if data is not deleted fast enough), no more data
is written to the database until you have freed enough space. The
actual maximum size of your database is the amount of gigabytes
you specify, minus 5GB.
Specify an archiving schedule that outlines the intervals with
which the archiving process should start. You can archive very
frequently (in principle every hour all year round), or very
infrequently (for example, every first Monday of every 36
months).
To reduce FPS when archiving, select the Reduce frame rate
check box and set a frame per second (FPS).
Reduce frame rate
Reduction of frame rates by a selected number of FPS makes
your recordings take up less space in the archive, but it also
reduces the quality of your archive.
MPEG/H.264 reduces automatically to key-frames as a minimum.
0.1 = 1 frame per 10 seconds.
Multicast tab (recording server)
Your system supports multicasting of live streams from recording servers. If multiple Network
Video Management System Smart Client users want to view live video from the same camera,
multicasting helps saving considerable system resources. Multicasting is particularly useful if you
use the Matrix functionality, where multiple clients require live video from the same camera.
Multicasting is only possible for live streams, not for recorded video/audio.
If a recording server has more than one network interface card, it is only possible to use multicast
on one of them. Through the Management Client you can specify which one to use.
The successful implementation of multicasting also requires that you have set up your network
equipment to relay multicast data packets to the required group of recipients only. If not,
multicasting may not be different from broadcasting, which can significantly slow down network
communication.
About multicasting
In regular network communication, each data packet is sent from a single sender to a single
recipient - a process known as unicasting. But with multicasting you can send a single data packet
Management Client elements
70
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
(from a server) to multiple recipients (clients) within a group. Multicasting can help save
bandwidth.

When you use unicasting, the source must transmit one data stream for each recipient.

When you use multicasting, only a single data stream is required on each network
segment.
Multicasting as described here is not streaming of video from camera to servers, but from servers
to clients.
With multicasting, you work with a defined group of recipients, based on options such as IP address
ranges, the ability to enable/disable multicast for individual cameras, the ability to define largest
acceptable data packet size (MTU), the maximum number of routers a data packet must be
forwarded between (TTL), and so on.
Multicasting should not be confused with broadcasting, which sends data to everyone connected
to the network, even if the data is perhaps not relevant for everyone:
Name
Description
Unicasting
Sends data from a single source to a single recipient.
Multicasting
Sends data from a single source to multiple recipients within a
clearly defined group.
Broadcasting
Sends data from a single source to everyone on a network.
Broadcasting can therefore significantly slow down network
communication.
Enable multicasting
To use multicasting, your network infrastructure must support the IP multicasting standard IGMP
(Internet Group Management Protocol).

On the Multicast tab, select the Multicast check box.
If the entire IP address range for multicast is already in use on one or more recording servers, you
first release some multicast IP addresses before you can enable multicasting on additional
recording servers.
Assign IP address range
Specify the range you want to assign as addresses for multicast streams from the selected
recording server. The clients connect to these addresses when the users view multicast video from
the recording server.
For each multicast camera feed, the IP address and port combination must be unique (IPv4
example: 232.0.1.0:6000). You can either use one IP address and many ports, or many IP
addresses and fewer ports. By default, the system suggests a single IP address and a range of
1000 ports, but you can change this as required.
IP addresses for multicasting must be within the range defined for dynamic host allocation by
IANA. IANA is the authority overseeing global IP address allocation.
Management Client elements
71
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Name
Description
IP address
In the Start field, specify the first IP address in the required
range. Then specify the last IP address in the range in the End
field.
Port
In the Start field, specify the first port number in the required
range. Then specify the last port number in the range in the End
field.
You can only multicast on one network interface card, so this field
is relevant if your recording server has more than one network
interface card or if it has a network interface card with more than
one IP address.
Source IP address for all
multicast streams
To use the recording server's default interface, leave the value
0.0.0.0 (IPv4) or :: (IPv6) in the field. If you want to use another
network interface card, or a different IP address on the same
network interface card, specify the IP address of the required
interface.

IPv4: 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255.

IPv6, the range is described on the IANA website
http://www.iana.org.
Specify datagram options
Specify the settings for data packets (datagrams) transmitted through multicasting.
Name
Description
MTU
Maximum Transmission Unit, the largest allowed physical data
packet size (measured in bytes). Messages larger than the
specified MTU are split into smaller packets before they are sent.
The default value is 1500, which is also the default on most
Windows computers and Ethernet networks.
TTL
Time To Live, the largest allowed number of hops a data packet
should be able to travel before it is discarded or returned. A hop
is a point between two network devices, typically a router.
Default value is 128.
Enable multicasting for individual cameras
Multicasting only works when you enable it for the required cameras:
1. Select the recording server and select the required camera in the Overview pane.
2. On the Client tab, select the Live multicast check box. Repeat for all required cameras.
Management Client elements
72
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Network tab (recording server)
You define a recording server's public IP address on the Network tab.
Why use a public address?
When an access client, such as Network Video Management System Smart Client, connects to a
surveillance system, an amount of initial data communication, including the exchange of contact
addresses, is shared in the background. This happens automatically, and is completely transparent
to the users.
Clients may connect from the local network as well as from the Internet, and in both cases the
surveillance system must provide suitable addresses so the clients can get access to live and
recorded video from the recording servers:

When clients connect locally, the surveillance system should reply with local addresses and
port numbers.

When clients connect from the Internet, the surveillance system should reply with the
recording server's public address. This is the address of the firewall or NAT (Network
Address Translation) router, and often also a different port number. The address and the
port can then be forwarded to the server's local address and port.
To provide access to the surveillance system from outside a NAT (Network Address
Translation) firewall, you can use public addresses and port forwarding. This allows clients
from outside the firewall to connect to recording servers without using VPN (Virtual Private
Network). Each recording server can be mapped to a specific port and the port can be
forwarded through the firewall to the server's internal address.
Define public address and port
1. To enable public access, select the Enable public access check box.
2. Define the recording server's public address. Enter the address of the firewall or NAT router
so clients that access the surveillance system from the Internet can connect to the
recording servers.
3. Specify a public port number. It is always a good idea that port numbers used on the
firewall or NAT router are different from the ones used locally.
If you use public access, configure the firewall or NAT router so requests sent to the public address
and port are forwarded to the local address and port of relevant recording servers.
Assign local IP ranges
You define a list of local IP ranges which the surveillance system should recognize as coming from
a local network.

On the Network tab, click Configure.
Remove a recording server
Important: If you remove a recording server, all configuration specified in the Management Client
is removed for the recording server, including all of the recording server's associated hardware
(cameras, input devices, and so on).
1. Right-click the recording server you want to remove in the Overview pane.
Management Client elements
73
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
2. Select Remove Recording Server.
3. If you are sure, click Yes.
4. The recording server and all of its associated hardware are removed.
Delete all hardware on a recording server
Important: When you delete hardware, all recorded data related to the hardware is deleted
permanently.
1. Right-click the recording server on which you want to delete all hardware.
2. Select Delete All Hardware.
3. Confirm the deletion.
Hardware
About hardware
Hardware represents:

The physical unit that connects directly to the recording server of the surveillance system
via IP, for example a camera, a video encoder, an I/O module or,
See Add hardware (on page 74) to read about how to add hardware to your system.
Add hardware
You have several options for adding hardware for each recording server you have authorized on
your system.
Important: If your hardware are located behind a NAT-enabled router or a firewall, you may need
to specify a different port number and configure the router/firewall so it maps the port and IP
addresses that the hardware uses.
The Add Hardware wizard helps you detect hardware like cameras and video encoders on your
network and add them to the recording servers on your system. The wizard also helps you add
remote recording servers for setups. Only add hardware to one recording server at a time.
1. To access Add Hardware, right-click the required recording server and select Add
Hardware.
2. Select one of the wizard options (see below) and follow the instruction on the screen.
3. After installation, you can see the hardware and it's devices in the Overview pane.
Management Client elements
74
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Name
Description
The system scans automatically for new hardware on the
recording server's local network.
Express (Recommended)
Select the Show hardware running on other recording
servers check box to see if detected hardware is running on
other recording servers.
You can select this option every time you add new hardware to
your network and want to use it in your system.
You cannot use this option to add remote systems in setups.
The system scans your network for relevant hardware and
remote systems based on your specifications of:
Address range scanning

hardware user names and passwords. Not needed if your
hardware use the factory default user names and passwords.

drivers

IP ranges (IPv4 only)

port number (default = 80)
You can select this option when you only want to scan a part of
your network, for example, when you expand your system.
Manual
Specify details about each hardware and remote systems
separately. This can be a good choice if you want to add only a
few pieces of hardware, and you know their IP addresses,
relevant user names and passwords or if a camera does not
support the automatic discovery function.
Disable/enable hardware
Added hardware is by default enabled.
You can see if hardware is enabled or disabled in this way:
Enabled
Disabled
To disable added hardware, for example, for licensing or performance purposes:
1. Expand the recording server, right-click the hardware you want to disable.
2. Select Enabled to clear or select it.
Edit hardware
You can edit basic settings, such as IP address/host name, for added hardware:
1. Expand the recording server, right-click the hardware you want to edit.
Management Client elements
75
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
2. Select Edit Hardware. This opens the Edit Hardware window, where you can edit
relevant properties.
3. Click OK.
Enable/disable individual devices
Cameras are by default enabled.
Microphones, speakers, metadata, inputs and outputs are by default disabled.
This means that microphones, speakers, metadata, inputs and outputs must be individually
enabled before you can use them in the system. The reason for this is that surveillance systems
rely on cameras, whereas the use of microphones and so on is highly individual depending on the
needs of each organization.
You can see if devices are enabled or disabled (the examples show an output):
Disabled
Enabled
The same method for enabling/disabling is used for cameras, microphones, speakers, metadata,
inputs, and outputs.
1. Expand the recording server and the device. Right-click the device you want to enable.
2. Select Enabled to clear or select it.
Set up a secure connection to the hardware
You can set up a secure HTTPS connection using SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) between the
hardware and the recording server.
Consult your camera vendor to get a certificate for your hardware and upload it to the hardware,
before you continue with the steps below:
1. In the Overview pane, right-click the recording server and select the hardware.
Selecting hardware under a recording server
2. On the Settings tab, enable HTTPS. This is not enabled by default.
Management Client elements
76
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
3. Enter the port on the recording server to which the HTTPS connection is connected. The
port number must correspond with the port set up on the device’s homepage.
4. Make changes as needed and save.
Move hardware
About moving hardware
You can move hardware between recording servers that belong to the same site. After a move, the
hardware and its devices run on the new recording server and new recordings are stored on this
server. The move is transparent to the client users.
The recordings on the old recording server remain there until:

You delete them from each device's new recording server on the Record tab.
If you try to remove a recording server that still contains recordings, you receive a warning.
If you move hardware to a recording server that currently has no hardware added to it, the client
users must log out and log in to receive data from the devices.
You can use the move hardware feature to:

Load balance: If, for example, the disk on a recording server is overloaded, you can add a
new recording server and move some of your hardware.

Upgrade: If you, for example, have to replace the server that hosts the recording server
with a newer model, you can install a new recording server and move the hardware from
the old server to the new server.

Replace a defective recording server: If, for example, the server is offline and will
never come online again, you can move the hardware to other recording servers and
thereby keep the system running. You cannot access the old recordings. See also Replace a
recording server (on page 255).
Remote recordings
When you move hardware to another recording server, the system cancels ongoing or scheduled
retrievals from edge storages on cameras. The recordings are not deleted, but the data is not
retrieved and saved in the databases as expected. You receive a warning if this is the case. For the
Network Video Management System Smart Client user, who has started a retrieval when you
initiate moving the hardware, the retrieval fails. The Network Video Management System Smart
Client user is notified and can try again later.
If someone has moved hardware on a remote site, you must manually synchronize the central site
with the Update hardware option to reflect the new configuration of the remote site. If you do
not synchronize, the moved cameras remain disconnected on the central site.
See also
Move hardware (wizard) (on page 77)
Move hardware (wizard)
To move hardware from one recording server to another, run the Move hardware wizard. The
wizard takes you through the necessary steps to complete a move for one or more hardware
devices.
Management Client elements
77
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Prerequisites
Before you start the wizard:

Make sure that the new recording server can access the physical camera via the network.

Install the recording server (on page 30) that you want to move hardware to.

Authorize it (see "Authorize a recording server" on page 59) and verified that it is online.

Install the same device pack version (see "About video device drivers" on page 256) on the
new recording server that you run on the existing server.
To run the wizard:
1. In the Site Navigation pane, select Recording Servers.
2. In the Overview pane, right-click the recording server you want to move hardware from or
right-click a specific hardware device.
3. Select Move Hardware.
If the recording server that you move hardware from is disconnected, an error message
appears. You should only choose to move hardware from a disconnected recording server if
you are sure that it will never come online again. If you move hardware anyway and the
server comes back online, you risk an unexpected behavior from the system due to having
the same hardware running on two recording servers for a period. Possible issues are, for
example, license errors or events that are not sent to the correct recording server.
4. If you started the wizard from the recording server level, the Select the hardware you
want to move page appears. Select the hardware devices you want to move.
5. On the Select the recording server you want to move the hardware to page, select
from the list of recording servers installed on this site.
6. On the Select the storage you want to use for future recordings page, the storage
usage bar indicates the free space in the recording database for live recordings only, not
the archives. The total retention time is the retention period for both the recording
database and the archives.
7. The system processes your request.
8. If the move was successful, click Close. If you select the new recording server in the
Management Client, you can see the moved hardware and now recordings are stored on
this server.
If the move failed, you can troubleshoot the issue below.
Move hardware troubleshooting
If a move did not succeed, one of the following reasons can be the cause:
Management Client elements
78
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Error type
Troubleshooting
The recording server is not connected.
Make sure that the recording server is online.
You may need to authorize it.
The recording server is not the latest version.
Update the recording server so it runs the same
version as the management server.
The recording server could not be found in the
configuration.
Make sure that you have authorized the
recording server or that it has not been
removed.
Updating the configuration or communication
with the configuration database failed.
Make sure that your SQL server is connected
and running.
Stopping the hardware on the current recording
server failed
The hardware does not exist.
The recording server that hardware was moved
from is back online, but you chose to ignore it
when it was offline.
Maybe another process has locked the recording
server or the recording server is in error mode.
Make sure that the recording server is running
and try again.
Make sure that the hardware you try to move
has not simultaneously been removed from the
system by another user. The scenario is quit
unlikely.
Most likely, you have accepted that the old
recording server will never get online again
when you started the Move Hardware wizard,
but during the move, the server came online.
Start the wizard again, and select No when you
are asked to confirm if the server comes online
again.
Manage hardware
Info tab (hardware)
For information about the Info tab for remote servers, see Info tab (remote server).
Management Client elements
79
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Info tab (hardware)
Name
Description
Name
Enter a name. The system uses the name whenever the hardware
is listed in the system and in the clients. The name does not have
to be unique.
When you rename hardware, the name is changed globally in the
Management Client.
Enter a description of the hardware (optional). The description
appears in a number of listings within the system. For example,
when pausing the mouse pointer over the hardware name in the
Overview pane:
Description
Example from a camera.
Model
Identifies the hardware model.
Version
Displays the firmware version of the system as specified by the
manufacturer.
Serial number
Hardware serial number as specified by the manufacturer. The
serial number is often, but not always, identical to the MAC
address.
Driver
Identifies the driver that handles the connection to the hardware.
IE
Opens the default home page of the hardware vendor. You can
use this page for administration of the hardware.
Address
The host name or IP address of the hardware.
MAC address
Specifies the Media Access Control (MAC) address of the system
hardware. A MAC address is a 12-character hexadecimal number
uniquely identifying each piece of hardware on a network.
Settings tab (hardware)
On the Settings tab, you can verify or edit settings for the hardware.
The content of the Settings tab is determined by the selected hardware, and varies depending on
the type of hardware. For some types of hardware, the Settings tab displays no content at all or
read-only content.
PTZ tab (video encoders)
On the PTZ tab, you can enable PTZ (pan-tilt-zoom) for video encoders. The tab is available if the
selected device is a video encoder or if the driver supports both non-PTZ and PTZ cameras.
You must enable the use of PTZ separately for each of the video encoder's channels on the PTZ tab
before you can use the PTZ features of the PTZ cameras attached to the video encoder.
Management Client elements
80
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Not all video encoders support the use of PTZ cameras. Even video encoders that support the use
of PTZ cameras may require configuration before the PTZ cameras can be used. It is typically the
installation of additional drivers through a browser-based configuration interface on the device's IP
address.
PTZ tab, with PTZ enabled for two channels on a video encoder
Enable PTZ on a video encoder
To enable the use of PTZ cameras on a video encoder, do the following on the PTZ tab:
1. In the list of devices connected to the video encoder, select the Enable PTZ box for the
relevant cameras:
2. In the PTZ Device ID column, verify the ID of each camera.
3. In the COM Port column, select which video encoder's COM (serial communications) ports
to use for control of the PTZ functionality:
4. In the PTZ Protocol column, select which positioning scheme you want to use:

Absolute: When operators use PTZ controls for the camera, the camera is adjusted
relative to a fixed position, often referred to as the camera's home position

Relative: When operators use PTZ controls for the camera, the camera is adjusted
relative to its current position
The content of the PTZ protocol column varies a lot depending on the hardware. Some
have 5 to 8 different protocols. See also the camera documentation.
5. In the toolbar, click Save.
Management Client elements
81
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
You are ready to configure preset positions and patrolling for each PTZ camera:

Add a preset position (type 1) (on page 102)

Add a patrolling profile (on page 109)
Devices
The devices appear in the Management Client when you add hardware with the Add Hardware
wizard.
You can manage devices via the device groups if they have the same properties, see About device
groups (on page 82).
You can also manage the devices individually:

Cameras

Microphones

Speakers

Metadata

Inputs

Outputs
See About devices (on page 85).
Working with device groups
About device groups
Grouping of devices into device groups is part of the Add Hardware wizard, but you can always
modify the groups and add more groups if needed.
You can benefit from grouping different types of devices (cameras, microphones, speakers,
metadata, inputs, and outputs) on your system:

Device groups help you maintain an intuitive overview of devices on your system.

Devices can exist in several groups.

You can create subgroups and subgroups in subgroups.

You can specify common properties for all devices within a device group in one go.

Device properties set via the group are not stored for the group but on the individual
devices.

When dealing with roles, you can specify common security settings for all devices within a
device group in one go.

When dealing with rules, you can apply a rule for all devices within a device group in one
go.
Management Client elements
82
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
You can add as many device groups as required, but you cannot mix different types of devices (for
example cameras and speakers) in a device group.
Example: cameras grouped into device groups
Create device groups with less than 400 devices so you can view and edit all properties.
If you delete a device group, you only delete the device group itself. If you want to delete a device,
for example a camera, from your system, do it on the recording server level.
The following examples are based on grouping cameras into device
groups, but the principles apply for all devices:
Add a device group (on page 83)
Specify which devices to include in a device group (on page 84)
Specify common properties for all devices in a device group (on page 84)
Add a device group
1. In the Overview pane, right-click the device type under which you want to create a device
group.
2. Select Add Device Group.
3. In the Add Device Group dialog box, specify a name and description of the new device
group:
The description appears when you pause the mouse pointer over the device group in the
device group list.
4. Click OK. A folder representing the new device group appears in the list.
5. Continue with Specify which devices to include in a device group (on page 84).
Management Client elements
83
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Specify which devices to include in a device group
1. In the Overview pane, right-click the relevant device group folder.
2. Select Edit Device Group Members.
3. In the Select Group Members window, select one of the tabs to locate the device.
A device can be a member of more than one device group.
4. Select the devices you want to include, and click Add or double-click the device:
5. Click OK.
6. If you exceed the limit of 400 devices in one group, you can add device groups as
subgroups under other device groups:
Specify common properties for all devices in a device group
With device groups, you can specify common properties for all devices within a given device group:
1. In the Overview pane, click the device group.
In the Properties pane, all properties which are available on all of the device group's
devices are listed and grouped on tabs.
2. Specify the relevant common properties.
On the Settings tab, you can switch between settings for all devices and settings for
individual devices.
3. In the toolbar, click Save. The settings are saved on the individual devices, not in the
device group.
Management Client elements
84
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Working with devices
About devices
Hardware has a number of devices that you can manage individually, for example:

A physical camera has devices that represent the camera part (lenses) as well as
microphones, speakers, metadata, input and output either attached or built-in.

A video encoder has multiple analog cameras connected that appear in one list of devices
that represent the camera part (lenses) as well as microphones, speakers, metadata, input
and output either attached or built-in.

An I/O module has devices that represent the input and output channels for, for example,
lights.

A dedicated audio module has devices that represent microphones and speaker inputs and
outputs.
The system automatically adds the hardware’s devices when you add hardware.
The following sections describe each of the device types with links to the tabs you can use to
manage them.
About camera devices
Camera devices are added automatically when you add hardware to the system and are by default
enabled.
Camera devices deliver video streams to the system that the client users can use to view live video
or that the system can record for later playback by the client users. Roles determine the users'
right to view video.
The system comes with a default start feed rule which ensures that video feeds from all connected
cameras are automatically fed to the system. Like other rules, the default rule can be deactivated
and/or modified as required.
Enabling/disabling and renaming of individual devices take place on the recording server hardware.
See Enable/disable devices via device groups (on page 89).
For all other configuration and management of cameras, expand Devices in the Site Navigation
pane, then select Cameras. In the Overview pane, you group your cameras for an easy overview
of your cameras. Initial grouping is done as part of the Add hardware wizard.
Follow this configuration order to complete the most typical tasks related to configuration of a
camera device:
1. Configure camera settings (see Settings tab (see "Settings tab (devices)" on page 92)).
2. Configure streams (see Streams tab (see "Streams tab (devices)" on page 93)).
3. Configure motion (see Motion tab (see "Motion tab (devices)" on page 117)).
4. Configure recording (see Record tab (see "Record tab (devices)" on page 95)).
5. Configure the remaining settings as needed.
Management Client elements
85
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
About microphone devices
On many devices you can attach external microphones. Some devices have built-in microphones.
Microphone devices are added automatically when you add hardware to the system. They are per
default disabled, so you must enable them before use, either as part of the Add Hardware wizard
or afterwards. Microphones do not require separate licenses. You can use as many microphones as
required on your system.
You can use microphones completely independently of cameras.
Microphone devices deliver audio streams to the system that the client users can listen to live or
the system can record for later playback by the client users. You can set up the system to receive
microphone specific events that trigger relevant actions.
Roles determine the users' right to listen to microphones. You cannot listen to microphones from
the Management Client.
The system comes with a default start audio feed rule which ensures that audio feeds from all
connected microphones are automatically fed to the system. Like other rules, the default rule can
be deactivated and/or modified as required.
Enabling/disabling and renaming of individual devices take place on the recording server hardware.
See Enable/disable devices via device groups (on page 89).
For all other configuration and management of cameras, expand Devices in the Site Navigation
pane, then select Microphones. In the Overview pane, you group your microphones for an easy
overview. Initial grouping is done as part of the Add hardware wizard.
You can configure microphone devices on these tabs:

Info tab (see "Info tab (devices)" on page 91)

Settings tab (see "Settings tab (devices)" on page 92)

Record tab (see "Record tab (devices)" on page 95)

Events tab (see "Events tab (devices)" on page 112)
About speaker devices
On many devices you can attach external speakers. Some devices have built-in speakers.
Speaker devices are added automatically when you add hardware to the system. They are per
default disabled, so you must enable them before use, either as part of the Add Hardware wizard
or afterwards. Speakers do not require separate licenses. You can use as many speakers as
required on your system.
You can use speakers completely independently of cameras.
The system sends an audio stream to the speakers when a user presses the talk button in Network
Video Management System Smart Client. Speaker audio is only recorded when talked to by a user.
Roles determine users' right to talk through speakers. You cannot talk through speakers from the
Management Client.
If two users want to speak at the same time, the roles determine users' right to talk through
speakers. As part of the roles definition, you can specify a speaker priority from very high to very
low. If two users want to speak at the same time, the user whose role has the highest priority wins
the ability to speak. If two users with the same role want to speak at the same time, the first-come
first-served principle applies.
The system comes with a default start audio feed rule that starts the device so the device is ready
to send user activated audio to the speakers. Like other rules, the default rule can be deactivated
and/or modified as required.
Management Client elements
86
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Enabling/disabling and renaming of individual devices take place on the recording server hardware.
See Enable/disable devices via device groups (on page 89).
For all other configuration and management of cameras, expand Devices in the Site Navigation
pane, then select Speakers. In the Overview pane, you group your speakers for an easy overview.
Initial grouping is done as part of the Add hardware wizard.
You can configure speaker devices on these tabs:

Info tab (see "Info tab (devices)" on page 91)

Settings tab (see "Settings tab (devices)" on page 92)

Record tab (see "Record tab (devices)" on page 95)
About metadata devices
Metadata devices deliver data streams to the system that the client users can use to view data
about data, for example, data that describes the video image, the content or objects in the image,
or the location of where the image was recorded. Metadata can be attached to cameras,
microphones, or speakers.
Metadata can be generated by:

The device itself delivering the data, for example the camera delivering video.

A third party system or integration via a generic metadata driver.
The device-generated metadata is automatically linked to one or more devices on the same
hardware.
Roles determine the users' right to view metadata.
The system comes with a default start feed rule which ensures that metadata feeds from all
connected hardware that supports metadata, are automatically fed to the system. Like other rules,
the default rule can be deactivated and/or modified as required.
Enabling/disabling and renaming of individual devices take place on the recording server hardware.
See Enable/disable devices via device groups (on page 89).
For all other configuration and management of metadata devices, expand Devices in the Site
Navigation pane, then select Metadata. In the Overview pane, you group your metadata devices
for an easy overview. Initial grouping is done as part of the Add hardware wizard.
You can configure metadata devices on these tabs:

Info tab (see "Info tab (devices)" on page 91)

Settings tab (see "Settings tab (devices)" on page 92)

Record tab (see "Record tab (devices)" on page 95)
About input devices
On many devices you can attach external units to input ports on the device. Input units are
typically external sensors. You can use such external sensors, for example, for detecting if doors,
windows, or gates are opened. Input from such external input units is treated as events by the
system.
You can use such events in rules. For example, you could create a rule specifying that a camera
should begin recording when an input is activated, and stop recording 30 seconds after the input is
deactivated.
Management Client elements
87
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
You can use input devices completely independently of cameras.
Before you specify use of external input units on a device, verify that the device itself recognize the
sensor operation. Most devices can show this in their configuration interfaces, or via Common
Gateway Interface (CGI) script commands.
Input devices are added automatically when you add hardware to the system. They are per default
disabled, so you must enable them before use, either as part of the Add Hardware wizard or
afterwards. Input devices do not require separate licenses. You can use as many input devices as
required on your system.
Enabling/disabling and renaming of individual devices take place on the recording server hardware.
See Enable/disable devices via device groups (on page 89).
For all other configuration and management of cameras, expand Devices in the Site Navigation
pane, then select Input. In the Overview pane, you group your input devices for an easy overview.
Initial grouping is done as part of the Add hardware wizard.
You can configure input devices on these tabs:

Info tab (see "Info tab (devices)" on page 91)

Settings tab (see "Settings tab (devices)" on page 92)

Events tab (see "Events tab (devices)" on page 112)
Activate input manually for test
With the rules feature, you define rules that automatically activate or deactivate input or you can
activate them manually and check the result in the Management Client:
1. In the Overview pane, select the relevant input device.
2. Activate the input on the physical device.
3. In the Preview pane, see if the indicator lights up green. Then the input device works.
About output devices
On many devices you can attach external units to output ports on the device. This allows you to
activate/deactivate lights, sirens, etc. through the system.
You can use output when creating rules. You can create rules that automatically activate or
deactivate outputs, and rules that trigger actions when the state of an output is changed.
Output can be triggered manually from the Management Client and Network Video Management
System Smart Client.
Before you specify use of external output units on a device, verify that the device itself can control
the device attached to the output. Most devices can show this in their configuration interfaces, or
via Common Gateway Interface (CGI) script commands.
Output devices are added automatically when you add hardware to the system. They are per
default disabled, so you must enable them before use, either as part of the Add Hardware wizard
Management Client elements
88
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
or afterwards. Output devices do not require separate licenses. You can use as many output
devices as required on your system.
Enabling/disabling and renaming of individual devices take place on the recording server hardware.
See Enable/disable devices via device groups (on page 89).
For all other configuration and management of cameras, expand Devices in the Site Navigation
pane, then select Output. In the Overview pane, you group your input devices for an easy
overview. Initial grouping is done as part of the Add hardware wizard.
You can configure output devices on these tabs:

Info tab (see "Info tab (devices)" on page 91)

Settings tab (see "Settings tab (devices)" on page 92)
Activate output manually for test
With the rules feature, you define rules that automatically activate or deactivate output or you can
activate them manually from a client.
You can activate an output manually from the Management Client to test the functionality:
1. In the Overview pane, select the relevant output device.
2. Typically, the following elements are shown for each output in the Preview pane:
3. Select/clear the check box
to activate/deactivate the selected output. When an
output is activated, the indicator lights up green:
4. Alternatively, click the rectangular button
to activate the output for the duration
defined in the Output Trigger Time setting on the Settings tab (this feature/setting may
not be available for all outputs). After the defined duration, the output is automatically
deactivated.
Enable/disable devices via device groups
You can enable/disable devices only via the configured hardware. Unless manually
enabled/disabled in the add hardware wizard, camera devices are per default enabled and all other
devices are per default disabled.
To locate a device via the device groups to enable or disable:
1. In the Site Navigation pane, select the device.
Management Client elements
89
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
2. In the Overview pane expand the relevant group and find the device.
3. Right-click the device, and select Go To Hardware.
4. Click the plus node to see all devices on the hardware.
5. Right-click the device you want to enable/disable, and select Enabled.
Status icons of devices
When you select a device, information about the current status appears in the Preview pane.
The following icons indicate the status of the devices:
Micro
Cam- Spea- Meta- Inera
phon ker
data put
e
Output
Description
Device enabled and retrieving data: The device is
enabled and you retrieve a live stream.
Device recording: The device is recording data on the
system.
Device temporarily stopped or has no feed: When
stopped, no information is transferred to the system. If
it is a camera, you cannot view live video. A stopped
device can still communicate with the recording server
for retrieving events, setting settings etc., as opposed
to when a device is disabled.
Devices disabled: Cannot be started automatically
through a rule and cannot communicate with the
recording server. If a camera is disabled, you cannot
view live or recorded video.
Device database being repaired.
Device requires attention: The device does not
function correctly. Pause the mouse pointer over the
device icon to get a description of the problem in the
tooltip.
Status unknown: Status of the device is unknown, for
example, if the recording server is offline.
Note that some icons can be combined, as in this
example where Device enabled and retrieving data
is combined with Device recording.
Management Client elements
90
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Info tab (devices)
About the Info tab
On the Info tab, you can view and edit basic information about a device in a number of fields.
All devices have an Info tab.
Example of Info tab from a camera.
Info tab properties
Name
Name
Description
The name is used whenever the device is listed in the system and
clients.
When you rename a device, the name is changed globally in the
Management Client.
Enter a description of the device (optional).
Description
Hardware name
The description appears in a number of listings within the system.
For example, when you pause the mouse pointer over the name
in the Overview pane.
Displays the name of the hardware, with which the device is
connected. The field is non-editable from here, but you can be
change it by clicking Go To next to it. This takes you to hardware
information where you can change the name.
Displays the port on which the device is attached on the
hardware.
Port number
Management Client elements
For single-device hardware, the port number is typically 1. For
multi-device hardware, such as video servers with several
channels, the port number typically indicates the channel on
which the device is attached, for example 3.
91
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Settings tab (devices)
About the Settings tab
On the Settings tab, you can view and edit settings for a device in a number of fields.
All devices have a Settings tab.
The values appear in a table as changeable or read-only. When you change a setting to a nondefault value, the value appears in bold.
The content of the table depends on the device driver.
Allowed ranges appear in the information box below the settings table:
Settings tab, example from camera.
About camera settings
You can view or edit settings, such as:

default frame rate
Management Client elements
92
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual

resolution

compression

the maximum number of frames between keyframes

on-screen date/time/text display for a selected camera, or for all cameras within a device
group.
The drivers for the cameras determine the content of the Settings tab. The drivers vary depending
on the type of camera.
For cameras that support more than one type of stream, for example MPEG4, MJPEG, and H.264,
you can use multi-streaming, see About multi-streaming (on page 94).
When you change a setting, you can quickly verify the effect of your change if you have the
Preview pane enabled. You cannot use the Preview pane to judge the effect of frame rate
changes because the Preview pane's thumbnail images use another frame rate defined in the
Options dialog box.
If you change the settings for Max. frames between keyframes and Max. frames between
keyframes mode, it may lower the performance of some functionalities in Network Video
Management System Smart Client. For example, Network Video Management System Smart Client
requires a keyframe to start up showing video, so a longer period between keyframes, prolongs the
Network Video Management System Smart Client start up.
Streams tab (devices)
About the Streams tab
The following devices have a Streams tab:

Cameras
The Streams tab lists by default a single stream. It is the selected camera's default stream, used
for live and recorded video.
Management Client elements
93
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
For live streaming, you can set up and use as many live streams as the camera supports, but you
can only select one stream for recording at a time. To change which stream to use for recording,
select the Record box for the stream to be recorded.
About multi-streaming
Playback of recorded video and viewing live video do not necessarily require the same video quality
and frame rate to achieve the best result. You can have either one stream for live viewing and
another stream for playback purposes or multiple separate live streams with different resolution,
encoding, and frame rate.
Example 1, live and recorded video:

For viewing live video, your organization may prefer MPEG4 at a high frame rate.

For playing back recorded video, your organization may prefer MJPEG at a lower frame
rate because this preserves disk space.
Example 2, multiple live videos:

For viewing live video from a local operating point, your organization may prefer
MPEG4 at a high frame rate to have the highest quality of video available.
Management Client elements
94
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual

For viewing live video from a remotely connected operating point, your organization
may prefer MJPEG at a lower frame rate and quality in order to preserve network
bandwidth.
Even when cameras support multi-streaming, individual multi-streaming capabilities may vary
between different cameras. See the camera's documentation for more information.
To see if a camera offers different types of streams, see the Settings tab.
Add a stream
1. On the Streams tab, click Add. This adds a second stream to the list.
2. In the Name column, edit the name of the stream. The name appears in Network Video
Management System Smart Client.
3. In the Live Mode column, select when live streaming is needed.

Always: the stream runs even if no Network Video Management System Smart
Client users request the stream.

Never: the stream is off. Only use this for recording streams, for example, if you
want recordings in high quality and need the bandwidth.

When needed: the stream starts when a user of Network Video Management
System Smart Client requests for it.
4. In the Default column, select which stream is default.
5. In the Record column, select the check box if you want to record this stream or leave it
cleared if you only want to use it for live video.
6. In the Remote Recording column, select the check box if you want to use this recording
stream for retrieving remote- and edge recordings.
7. Click Save.
Important: If you set a stream to Default or Record, the stream is always running independent
of the Live Mode setting. Selecting When needed and Always have the same effect in the
system and if you select Never, the stream is running, but cannot be viewed live.
If you do not want the streams to run at all unless someone is viewing live video, you can modify
the Default Start Feed Rule to start on request with the predefined Live Client Feed
Requested event.
Record tab (devices)
About the Record tab
The following devices have a Record tab:

Cameras

Microphones

Speakers
Management Client elements
95
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual

Metadata
The system saves recordings from a device as soon as you have enabled recording and the
recording-related rule criteria are met.
The parameters you cannot configure for a device are unavailable.
Record tab, example from camera
Enable/disable recording
Recording is by default enabled. To enable/disable recording:
1. In the Site Navigation pane, select Recording Servers.
Management Client elements
96
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
2. Select the relevant device in the Overview pane.
3. On the Record tab, select or clear the Recording check box.
You must enable recording for the device before you can record data from the camera. A rule that
specifies the circumstances for a device to record does not work if you have disabled recording for
the device.
Enable recording on related devices
For camera devices, you can enable recording for related devices, for example, microphones that
are connected to the same recording server. It means that the related devices record when the
camera records.
Recording on related devices are enabled by default for new camera devices, but you can disable
and enable as you want. For existing camera devices in the system, the check box is cleared by
default.
1. In the Site Navigation pane, select Recording Servers.
2. Select the relevant camera device in the Overview pane.
3. On the Record tab, select or clear the Record on related devices box.
4. On the Client tab, specify the devices that relate to this camera.
If you want to enable recording on related devices that are connected to another recording server,
you must create a rule.
About pre-buffering
Pre-buffering is the ability to record audio and video before the actual triggering event occurs. This
is useful when you want to record the audio or video that leads up to an event that triggers
recording, for example, opening a door.
Pre-buffering is possible because the system continuously receives audio and video streams from
the connected devices and temporarily stores them in the media database for the defined prebuffer period.

If a recording rule is triggered, the temporary recordings are made permanent for the
rule’s configured pre-recording time.

If no recording rule is triggered the temporary recordings in the pre-buffer are
automatically deleted after the defined pre-buffer time.
To use the pre-buffer function, the devices must be enabled and sending a stream to the system.
Devices that support pre-buffering
Cameras, microphones and speakers support pre-buffering. For speakers, the streams are only
sent when the Network Video Management System Smart Client user uses the Talk to speaker
function. This means that depending on how your speaker streams are triggered to be recorded
there is little or no pre-buffering available.
In most cases you set up speakers to record when the Network Video Management System Smart
Client user uses the Talk to speaker function. In such cases, no speaker pre-buffer is available.
Management Client elements
97
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Manage pre-buffering
Enable and disable pre-buffering:
Pre-buffering is enabled by default with a pre-buffer size of three seconds.
1. To enable/disable pre-buffering, select/clear the Pre-buffer (in seconds) check box.
2. When you enable it, specify a pre-buffer size. The number of seconds you specify must be
sufficiently large to accommodate your requirements in the various recording rules you
define.
Use pre-buffer in rules:
When you create rules that trigger recording, you can select that recordings should start some time
before the actual event (pre-buffer).
Example: The below rule specifies that recording should start on the camera 5 seconds
before motion is detected on the camera.
Detail from a rule relying on pre-buffering
To use the pre-buffer recording function in the rule, you must enable pre-buffering on the device
being recorded and you must set the pre-buffer length to at least the same length as specified in
the rule.
Manage manual recording
Stop manual recording after is enabled by default with a recording time of five minutes. This is
to ensure that the system automatically stops all recordings started by the Network Video
Management System Smart Client users.
1. To enable and disable manual recording to be stopped automatically by the system,
select/clear the Stop manual recording after check box.
2. When you enable it, specify a recording time. The number of minutes you specify must be
sufficiently large to accommodate the requirements of the various manual recordings
without overloading the system.
Add to roles:
You must grant the right to start and stop manual recording to the client users on each camera in
Roles on the Device tab.
Use in rules:
The events you can use when you create rules related to manual recording are:

Manual Recording Started

Manual Recording Stopped
Management Client elements
98
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Specify recording frame rate
You can specify the recording frame rate for JPEG.

Select or type the recording frame rate (in FPS, frames per second) in the Recording
frame rate: (JPEG) box.
Specifying a specific recording frame rate
Enable keyframe recording
You can enable keyframe recording for H.264 and MPEG4 streams. It means that the system
switches between recording keyframes only and recording all frames depending on your rule
settings.
You can, for example, let the system record keyframes when there is no motion in the view and
switch to all frames only in case of motion detection to save storage.
1. Select the Record keyframes only box.
Enabling keyframe recording
2. Set up a rule that activates the function, see About actions and stop actions (on page 130).
About storage
Under Storage, you can monitor and manage the databases for a device or a group of devices
added to the same recording server.
Management Client elements
99
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Above the table, you can see the selected database and its status. In this example, the selected
database is the default Local Default and the status is Recordings also located on other
recording servers. The other server is the recording server in building A.
Possible statuses for selected database:
Name
Description
Recordings also located on
other recording servers
The database is active and running and has recordings located in
storages on other recording servers as well.
Archives also located in old
storage
The database is active and running and has archives located in
other storages as well.
Active
The database is active and running.
Data for some of the devices The database is active and running and the system is moving
chosen is currently moving
data for one or more selected devices in a group from one
to another location
location to another.
Data for the device is
currently moving to another
location
The database is active and running and the system is moving
data for the selected device from one location to another.
Further down in the window, you can see the status of each database (OK, Offline or Old
Storage), the location of each database and how much space each database uses.
Management Client elements
100
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
If all servers are online, you can see the total spaced used for the entire storage in the Total used
space field.
With the Delete All Recordings button, you can delete all recordings for the device or device
group if you have added all devices in the group to the same server. Protected data is not deleted.
For information about configuration of storage, see About storage and archiving (on page 62).
About remote recording
To ensure that all recordings are saved in case of network issues, select Automatically retrieve
remote recordings when connections are restored. This enables automatic retrieval of
recordings once connection is re-established.
The type of hardware selected determines where recordings are retrieved from:

For a camera with local recording storage, recordings are retrieved from the camera's local
recording storage.
You can use the following functionality independently of the automatic retrieval:

Manual recording.

The Retrieve and store remote recordings from <devices> rule.

The Retrieve and store remote recordings between <start and end time> from
<devices> rule.
Presets tab (devices)
About the Presets tab
The following devices have a Presets tab:

PTZ cameras that support preset positions
On the Presets tab, you can create or import preset positions, for example:

In rules for making a PTZ (pan-tilt-zoom) camera move to a specific preset position when
an event occurs.

In patrolling, for the automatic movement of a PTZ camera between a number of preset
positions.

For manual activation by the Network Video Management System Smart Client users.
You can lock a preset position if you want to prevent users in Network Video Management System
Smart Client or users with limited security rights from updating this preset. Locked presets are
indicated with this icon
.
You assign PTZ permission to roles on the Overall Security tab (see "Overall Security tab (roles)"
on page 169) or the PTZ tab (see "PTZ tab (roles)" on page 178).
You can monitor if the system is currently patrolling or a user has taken control, in the PTZ
session area. (see "PTZ session properties" on page 107)
Management Client elements
101
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
You also change the PTZ session timeouts for the camera.
Presets tab, with preset positions defined
Add a preset position (type 1)
To add a preset position for the camera:
1. Click Add New. The Add Preset window appears:
Management Client elements
102
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
2. The Add Preset window displays a live preview image from the camera. Use the
navigation buttons and/or sliders to move the camera to the required position.
3. Specify a name for the preset position in the Name field.
4. Optionally, type a description of the preset position in the Description field.
5. Select Locked if you want to lock the preset position. Only users with sufficient rights can
unlock the position afterwards.
6. Click Add to specify presets. Keep adding until you have the presets you want.
7. Click OK. The Add Preset window closes, and adds the position to the Presets tab's list of
available preset positions for the camera.
Management Client elements
103
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Use preset positions from the camera (type 2)
As an alternative to specifying preset positions in the system, you can specify preset positions for
some PTZ cameras on the camera itself. You can typically do this by accessing a product-specific
configuration web page.
1. Import the presets into the system by selecting Use presets from device.
Any presets you have previously defined for the camera are deleted and affect any defined
rules and patrolling schedules as well as remove the presets available for the Network Video
Management System Smart Client users.
2. Click Delete to delete presets that your users do not need.
3. Click Edit if you want to change the display name of the preset (see "Edit a preset position
name (type 2 only)" on page 105).
4. If you later want to edit such device-defined presets, edit on the camera and then reimport.
Assign a default preset position
If required, you can assign one of a PTZ camera's preset positions as the camera's default preset
position.
It can be useful to have a default preset position because it allows you to define rules that specify
that the PTZ camera should go to the default preset position under particular circumstances, for
example after you have operated the PTZ camera manually.
1. To assign a preset position as the default, select the preset in your list of defined preset
positions.
2. Select the Default preset check box below the list.
You can only define one preset position as the default preset position.
Edit a preset position (type 1 only)
To edit an existing preset position defined in the system:
1. Select the preset position in the Presets tab's list of available preset positions for the
camera.
Management Client elements
104
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
2. Click Edit. This opens the Edit Preset window:
Example only. Features are camera-dependent
3. The Edit Preset window displays live video from the preset position. Use the navigation
buttons and/or sliders to change the preset position as required.
4. Change the name/number and description of the preset position if needed.
5. Select Locked if you want to lock the preset position. Only users with sufficient rights can
unlock the position afterwards.
6. Click OK.
Edit a preset position name (type 2 only)
To edit the name of a preset position defined in the camera:
1. Select the preset position in the Presets tab's list of available presets for the camera.
Management Client elements
105
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
2. Click Edit. This opens the Edit Preset window:
Example of a preset defined in the camera
3. Change the name and add a description of the preset position if needed.
4. Select Locked if you want to lock the preset name. You can lock a preset name if you want
to prevent users in Network Video Management System Smart Client or users with limited
security rights from updating the preset name or deleting the preset. Locked presets are
indicated with this icon
afterwards.
. Only users with sufficient rights can unlock the preset name
5. Click OK.
Lock a preset position
You can lock a preset position if you want to prevent users in Network Video Management System
Smart Client or users with limited security rights from updating or deleting a preset. Locked presets
are indicated with this icon
.
You lock presets as part of adding (see "Add a preset position (type 1)" on page 102) and editing
(see "Edit a preset position (type 1 only)" on page 104).
Test a preset position (type 1 only)
1. Select the preset position in the Presets tab's list of available preset positions for the
camera.
2. Click Activate.
3. The camera moves to the selected preset position.
Specify PTZ session timeouts
Management Client and Network Video Management System Smart Client users with the necessary
user rights can manually interrupt the patrolling of PTZ cameras.
You can specify how much time should pass before regular patrolling is resumed for all PTZ
cameras on your system:
Management Client elements
106
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
1. Select Tools > Options.
2. On the Options window's General tab, select the amount of time in the:

Timeout for manual PTZ sessions list (default is 15 seconds).

Timeout for pause patrolling sessions list (default is 10 minutes).
The settings apply for all PTZ cameras on your system.
You can change the timeouts individually for each camera.
1. In the Site Navigation pane, click Camera.
2. In the Overview pane, select the camera.
3. On the Presets tab, select the amount of time in the:

Timeout for manual PTZ session list (default is 15 seconds).

Timeout for pause patrolling session list (default is 10 minutes).
The settings apply for this camera only.
PTZ session properties
The PTZ session table shows the current status of the PTZ camera.
Name
User
Description
Displays the user that has pressed the Reserved button and
currently controls the PTZ camera.
If a patrolling session is activated by the system, it displays
Patrolling.
Priority
Displays the user's PTZ priority. You can only take over PTZ
sessions from users with a lower priority than you.
Timeout
Displays the remaining time of the current PTZ session.
You can change the following timeouts for each PTZ camera.
Name
Description
Timeout for manual PTZ
session
Specify the timeout period for manual PTZ sessions on this
camera if you want the timeout to be different from the default
period. You specify the default period in the Tools menu under
Options.
Specify the timeout period for pause patrolling PTZ sessions on
Timeout for pause patrolling this camera if you want the timeout to be different from the
PTZ session
default period. You specify the default period in the Tools menu
under Options.
Management Client elements
107
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Patrolling tab (devices)
About the Patrolling tab
The following devices have a Patrolling tab:

PTZ cameras
On the Patrolling tab, you can create patrolling profiles - the automatic movement of a PTZ (pantilt-zoom) camera between a number of preset positions.
Before you can work with patrolling, you must specify at least two preset positions for the camera
in the Presets tab.
Patrolling profiles are the definitions of how patrolling should take place. This includes the order in
which the camera should move between preset positions and how long it should remain at each
position. You can create an unlimited number of patrolling profiles and use them in your rules. For
example, you may create a rule specifying that one patrolling profile should be used during
daytime opening hours and another during nights.
Patrolling tab, displaying a patrolling profile with
customized transitions
Management Client elements
108
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Add a patrolling profile
Add a profile that you want to use in a rule:
1. Click Add. The Add Profile dialog box appears.
2. In the Add Profile dialog box, specify a name for the patrolling profile.
3. Click OK. The button is disabled if the name is not unique.
The new patrolling profile is added to the Profile list. You can now specify the preset
positions and other settings for the patrolling profile.
Specify preset positions in a patrolling profile
1. Select the patrolling profile in the Profile list:
2. Click Add.
3. In the Select Preset dialog box, select the preset positions for your patrolling profile:
4. Click OK. The selected preset positions are added to the list of preset positions for the
patrolling profile:
5. The camera uses the preset position at the top of the list as the first stop when it patrols
according to the patrolling profile. The preset position in the second position from the top is
the second stop, and so forth.
Specify the time at each preset position
When patrolling, the PTZ camera by default remains for 5 seconds at each preset position specified
in the patrolling profile.
To change the number of seconds:
1. Select the patrolling profile in the Profile list.
Management Client elements
109
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
2. Select the preset position for which you want to change the time:
3. Specify the time in the Time on position (sec) field:
4. If required, repeat for other preset positions.
Customize transitions
By default, the time required for moving the camera from one preset position to another, known as
transition, is estimated to be three seconds. During this time, motion detection is by default
disabled on the camera, because irrelevant motion is otherwise likely to be detected while the
camera moves between the preset positions.
You can only customize speed for transitions if your camera supports PTZ scanning and is of the
type where preset positions are configured and stored on your system's server (type 1 PTZ
camera). Otherwise the Speed slider is grayed out.
You can customize the following:

The estimated transition time.

The speed with which the camera moves during a transition.
To customize transitions between the different preset positions:
1. Select the patrolling profile in the Profile list.
2. Select the Customize transitions check box:
Transition indications are added to the list of preset positions.
3. In the list, select the transition:
4. Specify the estimated transition time (in number of seconds) in the Expected time (sec)
field:
5. Use the Speed slider to specify the transition speed. When the slider is in its rightmost
position, the camera moves with its default speed. The more you move the slider to the
left, the slower the camera moves during the selected transition.
Management Client elements
110
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
6. Repeat as required for other transitions.
Specify an end position
You can specify that the camera should move to a specific preset position when patrolling according
to the selected patrolling profile ends.
1. Select the patrolling profile in the Profile list.
2. Select the Go to specific position on finish check box. This opens the Select preset
dialog box.
3. Select the end position, and click OK.
You can select any of the camera's preset positions as the end position, you are not limited
to the preset positions used in the patrolling profile.
4. The selected end position is added to the profile list.
When patrolling according to the selected patrolling profile ends, the camera moves to the
specified end position.
Fisheye lens tab (devices)
About the Fisheye Lens tab
The following devices have a Fisheye Lens tab:

Fixed cameras with a fisheye lens
On the Fisheye Lens tab, you can enable and configure fisheye lens support for the selected
camera.
Management Client elements
111
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Enable and disable fisheye lens support
The fisheye lens support is disabled by default.
To enable or disable it, select or clear the Fisheye Lens tab's Enable fisheye lens support check
box.
Specify fisheye lens settings
When you enable the fisheye lens support:
1. Select the lens type.
2. Specify the physical position/orientation of the camera from the Camera
position/orientation list.
3. Select a Registered Panomorph Lens (RPL) number from the ImmerVision Enables®
panomorph RPL number list.
This ensures the identification and correct configuration of the lens used with the camera.
You usually find the RPL number on the lens itself or on the box it came in. For details of
ImmerVision, panomorph lenses, and RPLs, see the Immervision website
https://www.immervisionenables.com/.
Events tab (devices)
About the Events tab
The following devices have an Events tab:

Cameras

Microphones

Inputs
In addition to the system's event, some devices can be configured to trigger events. You can use
these events when creating event-based rules in the system. Technically, they occur on the actual
hardware/device rather than on the surveillance system.
Management Client elements
112
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Event tab, example from camera
When you delete an event, it affects all rules that use the event.

Add an event (on page 113)

Specify event properties (on page 113)

Use several instances of an event (on page 113)
Add an event
1. In the Overview pane, select a device.
2. Select the Events tab and click Add. This opens the Select Driver Event window.
3. Select an event. You can only select one event at a time.
4. Click OK.
5. In the toolbar, click Save.
Specify event properties
You can specify properties for each event you have added. The number of properties depends on
the device and the event. In order for the event to work as intended, you must specify some or all
of the properties identically on the device as well as on this tab.
Use several instances of an event
To be able to specify different properties for different instances of an event, you can add an event
more than once.
The following example is specific to cameras.
Example: You have configured the camera with two motion windows, called A1, and A2.
You have added two instances of the Motion Started (HW) event. In the properties of one
instance, you have specified the use of motion window A1. In the properties of the other
instance, you have specified the use of motion window A2.
When you use the event in a rule, you can specify that the event should be based on
motion detected in a specific motion window for the rule to be triggered:
Example: Specifying specific motion window
as part of a rule's conditions
Management Client elements
113
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Event tab (properties)
Name
Description
Configured events
Which events you may select and add in the Configured events
list is determined entirely by the device and its configuration. For
some types of devices, the list is empty.
General
The list of properties depends on the device and the event. In
order for the event to work as intended, you must specify some
or all of the properties identically on the device as well as on this
tab.
Client tab (devices)
About the Client tab
The following devices have a Client tab:

Cameras
On the Client tab you can specify which other devices are viewed and heard when you use the
camera in Network Video Management System Smart Client.
The related devices also record when the camera records, see Enable recording on related devices
(on page 97).
Management Client elements
114
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Client tab properties
Name
Description
The system supports multicast of live streams from the recording
server to Network Video Management System Smart Client. To
enable multicast of live streams from the selected camera, select
the check box.
Live multicast
You must also configure multicasting for the recording server.
See About multicasting (on page 70).
If multicast streams do not work, for example due to restrictions
on the network or on individual clients, the system reverts to
unicast.
Related microphone
Specify from which microphone on the camera, that Network
Video Management System Smart Client users by default receive
audio. The Network Video Management System Smart Client user
can manually select to listen to another microphone if needed.
The related microphones record when the camera records.
Related speaker
Specify through which speakers on the camera, that Network
Video Management System Smart Client users speak by default.
The Network Video Management System Smart Client user can
manually select another speaker if needed.
The related speakers record when the camera records.
Related metadata
Specify one or more metadata devices on the camera, that
Network Video Management System Smart Client users receive
data from.
The related metadata devices record when the camera records.
To ease the selection of cameras for the Network Video
Management System Smart Client users, define keyboard
shortcuts to the cameras.
Shortcut

Create each shortcut so it uniquely identifies the cameras.

A camera shortcut number cannot be longer than four digits.
Privacy mask tab (devices)
About the Privacy Mask tab
The following devices have a Privacy Mask tab:

Cameras
On the Privacy Mask tab, you can enable and configure privacy masking for the selected camera.
You can define which areas of the image to mask before distribution. For example, if a surveillance
camera covers a street, in order to protect residents privacy, you can mask certain areas of a
building (could be windows and doors) with privacy masking.
Management Client elements
115
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
When viewed via Network Video Management System Smart Client or any other media, privacy
masked areas appear as black areas which no one can remove.
Red areas indicate the areas masked for privacy.
When you use privacy masks with PTZ cameras and you pan-tilt-zoom the camera, the selected
area masked for privacy does not move accordingly because the masked area is locked to the
camera image. As an alternative, some PTZ cameras support enabling of a position based privacy
mask in the camera itself.
In a setup, the central site disregards privacy masking defined in a remote site. If you want to
apply the same privacy masking, you must redefine it on the central site.
Enable/disable privacy masking
The privacy masking feature is disabled by default.
To enable/disable the privacy masking feature for a camera:

Select/clear the Privacy Mask tab's Privacy masking check box.
Specify privacy mask settings
When you enable privacy masking, the preview image is divided into selectable sections by a grid.
1. To define privacy mask regions, drag the mouse pointer over the required areas in the
preview image. Press down the left mouse button to select a grid section. Right mouse
button clears a grid section.
Management Client elements
116
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
2. You can define as many privacy mask regions as needed. Privacy mask regions are shown
in red.
Three privacy mask regions defined in the preview window. In this case, the grid is visible.
The red privacy mask indications also appears in the preview image on the Motion tab.
Privacy mask tab (properties)
Name
Description
Grid Size
The value you selected in the Grid size list determines the
density of the grid, regardless whether the grid is shown or not.
Select between the values 8×8, 16×16, 32×32 or 64×64.
Show Grid
Select the Show grid check box to make the grid visible.
When you select the Show privacy mask check box (default),
selected regions are highlighted in red in the preview image.
Show Privacy Mask
Hiding regions may provide a less obscured view of the preview
image.
Sony recommends that you keep the Show privacy mask box
selected to avoid that regions exist without you or your
colleagues being aware of it.
Pen size
Use the Pen size slider to indicate the size of the selections you
wish to make when you click and drag the grid to select regions.
Default is set to small, which is equivalent to one square in the
grid.
Motion tab (devices)
About the Motion tab
The following devices have a Motion tab:

Cameras
Management Client elements
117
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
On the Motion tab, you can enable and configure motion detection for the selected camera. Motion
detection configuration is a key element in your system: Your motion detection configuration
determines when the system generates motion events and typically also when video is recorded.
Time spent on finding the best possible motion detection configuration for each camera helps you
later avoid, for example, unnecessary recordings. Depending on the physical location of the
camera, it may be a good idea to test motion detection settings under different physical conditions
such as day/night and windy/calm weather.
Before you configure motion detection for a camera, Sony recommends that you have configured
the camera's image quality settings, for example resolution, video codec and stream settings on
the Settings tab. If you later change image quality settings, you should always test any motion
detection configuration afterwards.
Camera properties: Motion tab with red
deflection on the motion indication bar
You can configure all the settings for a group of cameras, but you would typically set the exclude
regions per camera.

Enable and disable motion detection (on page 118)

Specify motion detection settings (on page 119)
Enable and disable motion detection
You specify the default setting of motion detection for cameras on the Tools > Options > General
tab.
To enable or disable motion detection afterwards for a camera:

Select or clear the Motion tab's Motion detection check box.
Management Client elements
118
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Important: When you disable motion detection for a camera, motion detection-related rules for
the camera do not work.
Specify motion detection settings
You can specify settings related to the amount of changes required in a camera's view in order for
the change to be regarded as motion. You can for example specify intervals between motion
detection analysis and areas of a view in which motion should be ignored.
About dynamic sensitivity
Motion detection is per default set up for dynamic sensitivity. To adjust the sensitivity level
manually, see Enable manual sensitivity (on page 119).
Sony recommends that you do not enable manual sensitivity because:

With dynamic sensitivity, the system calculates and optimizes the sensitivity level
automatically and suppresses the motion detections that come from noise in the images.

Dynamic sensitivity improves motion detection at nighttime, where the noise in the images
often triggers false motion.

The system is not overloaded from too much recording.

The users are not missing results from too little recording.
Enable manual sensitivity
The sensitivity setting determines how much each pixel in the image must change before it is
regarded as motion.
1. Select the Motion tab's Manual Sensitivity check box.
2. Drag the slider to the left for a higher sensitivity level, and to the right for a lower
sensitivity level.
The higher the sensitivity level, the less change is allowed in each pixel before it is
regarded as motion.
The lower the sensitivity level, the more change in each pixel is allowed before it is
regarded as motion.
Pixels in which motion is detected are highlighted in green in the preview image.
3. Select a slider position in which only detections you consider motion are highlighted.
Highlighted motion in the preview image
Management Client elements
119
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
You can compare and set the exact sensitivity setting between cameras by the number in the right
side of the slider.
Specify threshold
The motion detection threshold determines how many pixels in the image must change before it
is regarded as motion.
1. Drag the slider to the left for a higher motion level, and to the right for a lower motion
level.
2. Select a slider position in which only detections that you consider motion are detected.
The black vertical line in the motion indication bar shows the motion detection threshold: When
detected motion is above the selected detection threshold level, the bar changes color from green
to red, indicating a positive detection.
Motion indication bar: changes color from green to red when above the threshold, indicating a
positive motion detection
Select keyframes settings
Determines if motion detection is done on keyframes only instead of on the entire video stream.
Only applies to MPEG4 and H.264.
Motion detection on keyframes reduces the amount of processing power used to carry out the
analysis.

Select Keyframes only (MPEG) to do motion detection on keyframes only.
Select image processing interval
You can select how often the system performs the motion detection analysis.
From the Process image every (msec) list:

Select the interval. For example, every 1000 milliseconds is once every second. Default
value is every 500 milliseconds.
The interval is applied if the actual frame rate is higher than the interval you set here.
Specify detection method
Lets you optimize motion detection performance by analyzing only a selected percentage of the
image, for example 25%. By analyzing 25%, only every fourth pixel in the image is analyzed
instead of all pixels.
Using optimized detection reduces the amount of processing power used to carry out the analysis,
but also means a less accurate motion detection.

In the Detection method list, select the wanted detection method.
About generate motion data for smart search
With Generate motion data for smart search enabled, the system generates motion data for
the images used for motion detection. For example, if you select motion detection on keyframes
only, the motion data is also produced for keyframes only.
Management Client elements
120
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
The extra motion data enables the client user, via the smart search function, to quickly search for
relevant recordings based on motion in the selected area of the image. The motion data is not
generated for areas with privacy masks.
Motion detection threshold and exclude regions do not influence the generated motion data.
You specify the default setting of generating smart search data for cameras on the Tools >
Options > General tab.
Specify exclude regions
You can disable motion detection in specific areas of a camera view.
Disabling motion detection in specific areas helps you avoid detection of irrelevant motion, for
example if the camera covers an area where a tree is swaying in the wind or where cars regularly
pass by in the background.
When you use exclude regions with PTZ cameras and you pan-tilt-zoom the camera, the excluded
area does not move accordingly because the area is locked to the camera image, and not the
object.
1. To use exclude regions, select the Use exclude regions check box.
A grid divides the preview image into selectable sections.
2. To define exclude regions, drag the mouse pointer over the required areas in the preview
image while you press the left mouse button. Right mouse button clears a grid section.
You can define as many exclude regions as needed. Excluded regions appear in blue.
Three exclude regions defined in the preview window. In this case, the grid is visible.
The blue exclude areas only appear in the preview image on the Motion tab, not in any other
preview images in the Management Client or access clients.
Client
About clients
The Client section of the Management Client consists of:
Management Client elements
121
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Name
Description
Network Video Management
System Smart Wall
Network Video Management System Smart Wall is an add-on that
allows you to send view content from Network Video Management
System Smart Client to dedicated video wall.
For more detailed information about Network Video Management
System Smart Wall, see About Network Video Management
System Smart Wall (on page 209).
View groups
The way in which video from cameras is presented is called a
view. To control who can see what in Network Video Management
System Smart Client, you can create view groups to group views
in logical entities. You can assign access to these view groups
through roles and limit who can access individual view groups to
specific roles. Select View Groups to design and work with view
groups to fit your surveillance needs.
Smart Client profiles
To differentiate Network Video Management System Smart Client
users, you can create Smart Client profiles, prioritize these and
customize their profiles as needed for the different tasks at hand.
Matrix
Matrix is a feature for distributing video remotely. If you use
Matrix, you can push video from any camera on your system's
network to any running Network Video Management System
Smart Client.
View groups
About view groups
The way in which the system presents video from one or more cameras in clients is called a view. A
view group is a container for one or more logical groups of such views. In clients, a view group is
presented as an expandable folder from which users can select the group and the view they want
to see:
Example from Network Video Management System Smart Client: Arrow indicates a view group,
which contains a logical group (called Amenities), which in turn contains 3 views.
About view groups and roles
By default, each role you define in the Management Client is also created as a view group. When
you add a role in the Management Client, the role by default appears as a view group for use in
clients.

You can assign a view group based on a role to users/groups assigned to the relevant role.
You may change these view group rights by setting this up in the role afterwards.

A view group based on a role carries the role's name.
Management Client elements
122
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Example: If you create a role with the name Building A Security Staff, it appears in
Network Video Management System Smart Client as a view group called Building A
Security Staff.
In addition to the view groups you get when adding roles, you may create as many other
view groups as you like. You can also delete view groups, including those automatically
created when adding roles.

Even if a view group is created each time you add a role, view groups do not have to
correspond to roles. You can add, rename or remove any of your view groups if required.
Note that if you rename a View group, client users already connected must log out and log in again
before the name change is visible.
Add a view group
1. Right-click View Groups, and select Add View Group. This opens the Add View Group
dialog box.
2. Type the name and an optional description of the new view group and click OK.
Note: No roles have the right to use the newly added view group until you have specified such
rights. If you have specified which roles that can use the newly added view group, already
connected client users with the relevant roles must log out and log in again before they can see the
view group.
Smart Client profiles
About Smart Client profiles
Smart Client profiles allows system administrators to control how Network Video Management
System Smart Client should look and behave and what features and panes Network Video
Management System Smart Client users have access to. You can set up user rights for: panes and
options, minimize/maximize options, inactivity time-control, remember password or not, view
shown after log in, layout of print reports, export path, and more.
To manage Smart Client profiles in the system, expand Client and select Smart Client Profiles.
You can also learn about the relationship between Smart Client profiles, roles and time profiles and
how to use these together (see "Create and set up Smart Client profiles, roles and time profiles" on
page 124).
Add and configure a Smart Client profile
You must create a Smart Client profile before you can configure it.
1. Right-click Smart Client Profiles.
2. Select Add Smart Client Profile.
3. In the Add Smart Client Profile dialog box, type a name and description of the new
profile and click OK.
4. In the Overview pane, click the profile you created to configure it.
Management Client elements
123
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
5. Adjust settings on one, more or all of the available tabs and click OK.
Copy a Smart Client profile
If you have a Smart Client profile with complicated settings or rights and need a similar profile, it
might be easier to copy an already existing profile and make minor adjustments to the copy than
to creating a new profile from scratch.
1. Click Smart Client Profiles, right-click the profile in the Overview pane, select Copy
Smart Client Profile.
2. In the dialog box that appears, give the copied profile a new unique name and description.
Click OK.
3. In the Overview pane, click the profile you just created to configure it. This is done by
adjusting settings on one, more or all of the available tabs. Click OK.
Create and set up Smart Client profiles, roles and time
profiles
When you work with Smart Client profiles, it is important to understand the interaction between
Smart Client profiles, roles and time profiles.

Smart Client profiles deal with user right settings in Network Video Management System
Smart Client

Roles deal with security settings in clients, MIP SDK and more

Time profiles deal with time aspects of the two profiles-types
Together these three features provide unique control and customizing possibilities with regards to
Network Video Management System Smart Client user rights.
Example: You need a user in your Network Video Management System Smart Client setup
who should only be allowed to view live video (no playback) from selected cameras, and
only during normal working hours (8.00 to 16.00). One way of setting this up could be as
follows:
1. Create a Smart Client profile, and name it, for example, Live only.
2. Specify the needed live/playback settings on Live only.
3. Create a time profile, and name it, for example, Daytime only.
4. Specify the needed time period on Daytime only.
5. Create a new role and name it, for example, Guard (Selected cameras).
6. Specify which cameras Guard (Selected cameras) can use.
7. Assign the Live only Smart Client profile and the Daytime only time profile to the Guard
(Selected cameras) role to connect the three elements.
You now have a mix of the three features creating the wanted result and allowing you room for
easy fine-tuning and adjustments. Note also that you can do the setup in a different order, for
example, creating the role first and then the Smart Client profile and the time profile, or any other
order you prefer.
Management Client elements
124
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Set simplified mode as the default mode
Through the Smart Client profiles, you can configure your system to automatically open Network
Video Management System Smart Client in simplified mode with a limited set of features and tabs.
By default Network Video Management System Smart Client opens in advanced mode with the
complete set of features and tabs.
If the Network Video Management System Smart Client operator at some point decides to switch to
a different mode than the default mode, Network Video Management System Smart Client
remembers this setting the next time the operator opens the program.
1. In Management Client, expand the Client node.
2. Select the relevant Smart Client profile.
3. Click the General tab.
4. In the Default Smart Client mode list, select Simplified. Network Video Management
System Smart Client now opens in simplified mode for those users associated with the
current Smart Client profile.
See also
Prevent operators from switching between simple and advanced mode (on page 126)
Management Client elements
125
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Prevent operators from switching between simple and
advanced mode
In Network Video Management System Smart Client, operators can switch between simple and
advanced mode. However, you can prevent the Network Video Management System Smart Client
operators from switching between modes. Technically, you must lock the setting that determines
whether Network Video Management System Smart Client opens in simple mode or advanced
mode.
1. In Management Client, expand the Client node.
2. Select the relevant Smart Client profile.
3. Click the General tab.
4. Verify that the Default Smart Client mode list has the proper value. If Enabled, Network
Video Management System Smart Client opens in simple mode.
5. Select the Locked check box. The mode toggling button in Network Video Management
System Smart Client is hidden.
See also
Set simple mode as the default mode (see "Set simplified mode as the default mode" on page 125)
Management Client elements
126
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Smart Client profile properties
The following tabs allow you to specify the properties of each Smart Client profile. You can lock the
settings in the Management Client if required, so the users of Network Video Management System
Smart Client cannot change them:
Tab
Description
Name and description, priority of existing profiles and an
overview of which roles use the profile.
Info
General
If a user is a member of more than one role, each with their
individual Smart Client profile, the user gets the Smart Client
profile with the highest priority.
Settings such as show/hide and mini- and maximize menu
settings, login/-out, startup, timeout, info and messaging options,
and Sequence Explorer settings.
Advanced settings such as maximum decoding threads,
deinterlacing and time zone settings.
Advanced
Maximum decoding threads controls how many decoding
threads are used to decode video streams. It can help improve
performance on multi-core computers in live as well as playback
mode. The exact performance improvement depends on the video
stream. It is mainly relevant if using heavily coded highresolution video streams like H.264, for which the performance
improvement potential can be significant, and less relevant if
using, for example, JPEG or MPEG-4.
With deinterlacing, you convert video into a non-interlaced
format. Interlacing determines how an image is refreshed on a
screen. The image is refreshed by first scanning the odd lines in
the image, then scanning the even lines. This allows a faster
refresh rate because less information is processed during each
scan. However, interlacing may cause flickering, or the changes
in half of the image's lines may be noticeable.
Live
Availability of live tabs/panes, camera playback and overlay
buttons, bounding boxes, and live-related MIP plug-ins.
Playback
Availability of playback tabs/panes, layout of print reports,
independent playback, bounding boxes, and playback-related MIP
plug-ins.
Setup
Availability of general setup/panes/buttons, setup-related MIP
plug-in and rights to edit a map and to edit live video buffering.
Exports
Paths, privacy masks, video and still image formats and what to
include when exporting these, export formats for Network Video
Management System Smart Client – Player and much more.
Timeline
Whether to include audio or not, visibility of indication of time and
motion, and finally how to handle playback gaps.
View Layouts
Which type(s) of views should be available. Expand the Layouts
folder and, if relevant, use Select All or Select None as
shortcuts when making your selections.
Management Client elements
127
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Matrix
About Matrix
With Matrix, you can send video from any camera on a network operating your system to Matrixrecipients. A Matrix recipient is a computer that can display Matrix-triggered video. There are two
kinds of Matrix recipients:

computers running a dedicated Matrix application and

computers running Network Video Management System Smart Client.
To see a list of Matrix recipients configured in the Management Client, expand Client in the Site
Navigation pane, then select Matrix. A list of Matrix configurations is displayed in the Properties
pane.
Each Matrix recipient, regardless whether it is a computer with the Matrix Monitor or the Network
Video Management System Smart Client, must be configured to receive Matrix-triggered video. See
the Matrix Monitor and Network Video Management System Smart Client documentation for more
information.
Add Matrix recipients
To add an existing Matrix recipient, for example an existing Matrix Monitor or Network Video
Management System Smart Client installation, through the Management Client:
1. Expand Clients, then select Matrix.
2. Right-click Matrix Configurations and select Add Matrix.
3. Fill out the fields in the Add Matrix dialog box.
4. In the Address field enter the IP address or the host name of the required Matrix recipient.
5. In the Port field enter the port number used by the Matrix recipient installation. You can
find the port number and password in this way: For a Matrix Monitor application, go to the
Matrix Monitor Configuration dialog box. For Network Video Management System Smart
Client, see the Network Video Management System Smart Client documentation.
6. Click OK.
You can now use the Matrix recipient in rules.
Note: Your system does not verify that the specified port number or password is correct or that
the specified port number, password, or type corresponds with the actual Matrix recipient. Make
sure that you enter the correct information.
Define rules sending video to Matrix-recipients
To send video to Matrix-recipients you must include the Matrix recipient in a rule that triggers the
video transmission to the related Matrix-recipient. To do so:
1. In the Site Navigation pane, Expand Rules and Events > Rules. Right-click Rules to
open the Manage Rule wizard. In the first step, select a rule type and in the second step,
a condition.
2. In Manage Rule's step 3 (Step 3: Actions) select the Set Matrix to view <devices>
action.
Management Client elements
128
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
3. Click the Matrix link in the initial rule description.
4. In the Select Matrix Configuration dialog box, select the relevant Matrix-recipient, and
click OK.
5. Click the devices link in the initial rule description, and select from which cameras you
would like to send video to the Matrix-recipient, then click OK to confirm your selection.
6. Click Finish if the rule is complete or define if required additional actions and/or a stop
action.
If you delete a Matrix-recipient, any rule that includes the Matrix-recipient stops working.
Send the same video to several Network Video Management
System Smart Client views
If the Matrix-recipient is Network Video Management System Smart Client, you can send the same
video to Matrix positions in several of Network Video Management System Smart Client’s views,
provided the views' Matrix positions share the same port number and password:
1. In Network Video Management System Smart Client, create the relevant views and Matrix
positions that share the same port number and password.
2. In the Management Client, add the relevant Network Video Management System Smart
Client as a Matrix-recipient.
3. You may include the Matrix-recipient in a rule.
Rules and events
About rules and events
Rules are a central element in your system. Rules determine highly important settings, such as
when cameras should record, when PTZ cameras should patrol, when notifications should be sent,
etc.
Example: A rule specifying that a particular camera should begin recording when it detects motion.
Events are central elements when using the Manage Rule wizard. In the wizard, events are
primarily used for triggering actions. For example, you can create a rule which specifies that in the
event of detected motion, the surveillance system should take the action of starting recording of
video from a particular camera.
Two types of conditions can trigger rules:
Management Client elements
129
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Name
Description
Events
When events occur on the surveillance system, for example when
motion is detected, when the system receives input from external
sensors.
When you enter specific periods of time, for example:
Thursday 16th August 2007 from 07.00 to 07.59
Time
or every Saturday and Sunday.
You can work with the following under Rules and Events:

Rules: Rules are a central element in the system. The behavior of your surveillance system
is to a very large extent determined by rules. When creating a rule, you can work with all
types of events.

Time profiles: Time profiles are periods of time defined in the Management Client. You
use them when you create rules in the Management Client, for example to create a rule
which specifies that a certain action should take place within a certain time profile.

Notification profiles: You can use notification profiles to set up ready-made email
notifications, which can automatically be triggered by a rule, for example when a particular
event occurs.

User-defined events: User-defined events are custom-made events that makes it
possible for users to manually trigger events in the system or react to inputs from the
system.

Analytics events: Analytics events are data received from an external third-party video
content analysis (VCA) providers. You can use analytics events as basis for alarms.

Generic events: Generic events allow you to trigger actions in the Network Video
Management System event server by sending simple strings via the IP network to your
system.
See Events overview (on page 137) for a list of events.
About actions and stop actions
When you add rules (see "Add a rule" on page 145) in the Manage Rule wizard, you can select
between different actions:
Example: Selecting actions
Some of the actions require a stop action. Example: If you select the action Start recording,
recording starts and potentially continues indefinitely. As a result, the action Start recording has
a mandatory stop action called Stop recording.
Management Client elements
130
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
The Manage Rule wizard makes sure you specify stop actions when necessary:
Selecting stop actions. In the example, note the mandatory stop action (selected, dimmed), the
non-relevant stop actions (dimmed) and the optional stop actions (selectable).
Each type of action from your Network Video Management System is described. You may have
more actions available if your system installation uses add-on products or vendor-specific plug-ins.
For each type of action, stop action information is listed if relevant:
Action
Description
Start recording on
<devices>
Start recording and saving data in the database from the selected devices.
When your select this type of action, the Manage Rule wizard prompts
you to specify:
When recording should start. This happens either immediately or a number
of seconds before the triggering event/beginning of the triggering time
interval and on which devices the action should take place.
This type of action requires that you have enabled recording on the devices
to which the action are linked. You can only save data from before an event
or time interval if you have enabled pre-buffering for the relevant devices.
You enable recording and specify pre-buffering settings for a device on the
Record tab.
Stop action required: This type of action requires one or more stop
actions. In one of the following steps, the wizard automatically prompts
you to specify the stop action: Stop recording.
Without this stop action, recording would potentially continue indefinitely.
You also have the option of specifying further stop actions.
Start feed on
<devices>
Begin data feed from devices to the system. When the feed from a device
is started, data is transferred from the device to the system, in which case
you may view and record, depending on the data type.
When you select this type of action, the Manage Rule wizard prompts you
to specify on which devices to start the feeds. Your system includes a
default rule which ensures that feeds are always started on all cameras.
Stop action required: This type of action requires one or more stop
actions. In one of the following steps, the wizard automatically prompts
you to specify the stop action: Stop feed.
You can also specify further stop actions.
Note that using the mandatory stop action Stop feed to stop the feed from
a device means that data is no longer transferred from the device to the
system, in which case live viewing and recording of video, for example, is
no longer possible. However, a device on which you have stopped the feed
can still communicate with the recording server, and you can start the feed
again automatically through a rule, as opposed to when you manually have
disabled the device.
Management Client elements
131
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Action
Description
Important: While this type of action enables access to selected devices'
data feeds, it does not guarantee that data is recorded, as you must
specify recording settings separately.
Set <Smart Wall>
to <preset>
Sets the Network Video Management System Smart Wall to a selected
preset. Specify the preset on the Smart Wall Presets tab.
No mandatory stop action: This type of action does not require a stop
action. You can specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an
event or after a period of time.
Set <Smart Wall>
<monitor> to
show cameras
Sets a specific Network Video Management System Smart Wall monitor to
display live video from the selected cameras on this site or any child site
configured in .
No mandatory stop action: This type of action does not require a stop
action. You can specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an
event or after a period of time.
Set <Smart Wall>
<monitor> to
show text
<messages>
Sets a specific Network Video Management System Smart Wall monitor to
display a user-defined text message of up to 200 characters.
Remove cameras
from <Smart
Wall> monitor
<monitor>
Stop displaying video from a specific camera.
Set live frame rate
on <devices>
Sets a particular frame rate to use when the system displays live video
from the selected cameras that substitutes the cameras' default frame
rate. Specify this on the Settings tab.
No mandatory stop action: This type of action does not require a stop
action. You can specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an
event or after a period of time.
No mandatory stop action: This type of action does not require a stop
action. You can specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an
event or after a period of time.
When you select this type of action, the Manage Rule wizard prompts you
to specify which frame rate to set, and on which devices. Always verify that
the frame rate you specify is available on the relevant cameras.
Stop action required: This type of action requires one or more stop
actions. In one of the following steps, the wizard automatically prompts
you to specify the stop action: Restore default live frame rate.
Without this stop action, the default frame rate would potentially never be
restored. You also have the option of specifying further stop actions.
Set recording
frame rate on
<devices>
Sets a particular frame rate to use when the system saves recorded video
from the selected cameras in the database, instead of the cameras' default
recording frame rate.
When you select this type of action, the Manage Rule wizard prompts you
to specify which recording frame rate to set, and on which cameras.
You can only specify a recording frame rate for JPEG, a video codec with
which each frame is separately compressed into a JPEG image. This type of
action also requires that you have enabled recording on the cameras to
which the action is linked. You enable recording for a camera on the
Record tab. The maximum frame rate you can specify depends on the
relevant camera types, and on their selected image resolution.
Stop action required: This type of action requires one or more stop
Management Client elements
132
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Action
Description
actions. In one of the following steps, the wizard automatically prompts
you to specify the stop action: Restore default recording frame rate.
Without this stop action, the default recording frame rate would potentially
never be restored. You also have the option of specifying further stop
actions.
Set recording
frame rate to all
frames for
H.264/MPEG4 on
<devices>
Sets the frame rate to record all frames when the system saves recorded
video from the selected cameras in the database, instead of keyframes
only. Enable the recording keyframes only function on the Record tab.
When you select this type of action, the Manage Rule wizard prompts you
to select which devices the action should apply for.
You can only enable keyframe recording for H.264 and MPEG4. This type of
action also requires that you have enabled recording on the cameras to
which the action is linked. You enable recording for a camera on the
Record tab.
Stop action required: This type of action requires one or more stop
actions. In one of the following steps, the wizard automatically prompts
you to specify the stop action:
Restore default recording frame rate of keyframes for
H.264/MPEG4
Without this stop action, the default setting would potentially never be
restored. You also have the option of specifying further stop actions.
Start patrolling on
<device> using
<profile> with PTZ
priority <priority>
Begins PTZ patrolling according to a particular patrolling profile for a
particular PTZ camera with a particular priority. This is an exact definition
of how patrolling should be carried out, including the sequence of preset
positions, timing settings, and more.
When you select this type of action, the Manage Rule wizard prompts you
to select a patrolling profile. You can only select one patrolling profile on
one device and you cannot select several patrolling profiles.
This type of action requires that the devices to which the action is linked
are PTZ devices.
You must define at least one patrolling profile for the device(s). You define
patrolling profiles for a PTZ camera on the Patrolling tab.
Stop action required: This type of action requires one or more stop
actions. In one of the following steps, the wizard automatically prompts
you to specify the stop action:
Stop patrolling
Without this stop action, patrolling would potentially never stop. You can
also specify further stop actions.
Pause patrolling
on <devices>
Pauses PTZ patrolling. When you select this type of action, the Manage
Rule wizard prompts you to specify the devices on which to pause
patrolling.
This type of action requires that the devices to which the action is linked
are PTZ devices.
You must define at least one patrolling profile for the device(s). You define
patrolling profiles for a PTZ camera on the Patrolling tab.
Management Client elements
133
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Action
Description
Stop action required: This type of action requires one or more stop
actions. In one of the following steps, the wizard automatically prompts
you to specify the stop action: Resume patrolling
Without this stop action, patrolling would potentially pause indefinitely. You
have also the option of specifying further stop actions.
Move <device> to
<preset> position
with PTZ priority
<priority>
Moves a particular camera to a particular preset position - however always
according to priority. When selecting this type of action, the Manage Rule
wizard prompts you to select a preset position. Only one preset position on
one camera can be selected. It is not possible to select several preset
positions.
This type of action requires that the devices to which the action is linked
are PTZ devices.
This action requires that you have defined at least one preset position for
those devices. You define preset positions for a PTZ camera on the Presets
tab.
No mandatory stop action: This type of action does not require a stop
action. You can specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an
event or after a period of time.
Move to default
preset on
<devices> with
PTZ priority
<priority>
Moves one or more particular cameras to their respective default preset
positions - however always according to priority. When you select this type
of action, the Manage Rule wizard prompts you to select which devices
the action should apply for.
This type of action requires that the devices to which the action is linked
are PTZ devices.
This action requires that you have defined at least one preset position for
those devices. You define preset positions for a PTZ camera on the Presets
tab.
No mandatory stop action: This type of action does not require a stop
action. You can specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an
event or after a period of time.
Set device output
to <state>
Sets an output on a device to a particular state (activated or deactivated).
When you select this type of action, the Manage Rule wizard prompts you
to specify which state to set, and on which devices.
This type of action requires that the devices to which the action is linked
each have at least one external output unit connected to an output port.
No mandatory stop action: This type of action does not require a stop
action. You can specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an
event or after a period of time.
Management Client elements
134
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Action
Description
Send notification
to <profile>
Sends a notification, using a particular notification profile. When you select
this type of action, the Manage Rule wizard prompts you to select a
notification profile, and which devices to include pre-alarm images from.
You can only select one notification profile and you cannot select several
notification profiles. Note that a single notification profile may contain
several recipients.
You can also create more rules to the same event and send different
notifications to each of the notification profiles. You can copy and re-use
the content of rules by right-clicking a rule in the Rules list.
This type of action requires that you have defined at least one notification
profile. Pre-alarm images are only included if you have enabled the
Include images option for the relevant notification profile.
No mandatory stop action: This type of action does not require a stop
action. You can specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an
event or after a period of time.
Make new <log
entry>
Generates an entry in the rule log. When selecting this type of action, the
Manage Rule wizard prompts you to specify a text for the log entry. When
you specify the log text, you can insert variables, such as $DeviceName$,
$EventName$, into the log message.
No mandatory stop action: This type of action does not require a stop
action. You can specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an
event or after a period of time.
Start plug-in on
<devices>
Starts one or more plug-ins. When you select this type of action, the
Manage Rule wizard prompts you to select required plug-ins, and on
which devices to start the plug-ins.
This type of action requires that you have at least one or more plug-ins
installed on your system.
No mandatory stop action: This type of action does not require a stop
action. You can specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an
event or after a period of time.
Stop plug-in on
<devices>
Stops one or more plug-ins. When you select this type of action, the
Manage Rule wizard prompts you to select required plug-ins, and on
which devices to stop the plug-ins.
This type of action requires that you have at least one or more plug-ins
installed on your system.
No mandatory stop action: This type of action does not require a stop
action. You can specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an
event or after a period of time.
Management Client elements
135
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Action
Description
Apply new settings Changes device settings on one or more devices. When you select this type
on <devices>
of action, the Manage Rule wizard prompts you to select relevant devices,
and you can define the relevant settings on the devices you have specified.
If you define settings for more than one device, you can only change
settings that are available for all of the specified devices.
Example: You specify that the action should be linked to Device 1 and
Device 2. Device 1 has the settings A, B and C, and Device 2 has the
settings B, C and D. In this case, you can only change the settings that are
available for both devices, namely settings B and C.
No mandatory stop action: This type of action does not require a stop
action. You can specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an
event or after a period of time.
Set Matrix to view
<devices>
Makes video from the selected cameras appear on a computer capable of
displaying Matrix-triggered video such as a computer on which you have
installed either Network Video Management System Smart Client or the
Matrix Monitor application.
When you select this type of action, the Manage Rule wizard prompts you
to select a Matrix recipient, and one or more devices from which to display
video on the selected Matrix recipient.
This type of action allows you to select only a single Matrix recipient at a
time. If you want to make video from the selected devices appear on more
than one Matrix recipient, you should create a rule for each required Matrix
recipient or use the Network Video Management System Smart Wall
feature. By right-clicking a rule in the Rules list, you can copy and re-use
the content of rules. This way, you can avoid having to create nearidentical rules from scratch.
As part of the configuration on the Matrix recipients themselves, users
must specify the port number and password required for the
Matrix communication. Make sure that the users have access to this
information. The users must typically also define the IP addresses of
allowed hosts from which commands regarding display of Matrix-triggered
video is accepted. In that case, the users must also know the IP address of
the management server, or any router or firewall used.
Send SNMP trap
Generates a small message which logs events on selected devices. The text
of SNMP traps are auto-generated and cannot be customized. It can
contain the source type and name of the device on which the event
occurred.
No mandatory stop action: This type of action does not require a stop
action. You can specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an
event or after a period of time.
Retrieve and store
remote recordings
from <devices>
Retrieves and stores remote recordings from selected devices (that support
edge recording) in a specified period before and after the triggering event.
Note that this rule is independent of the Automatically retrieve remote
recordings when connection is restored setting.
No mandatory stop action: This type of action does not require a stop
action. You can specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an
event or after a period of time.
Management Client elements
136
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Action
Description
Retrieve and store
remote recordings
between <start
and end time>
from <devices>
Retrieves and stores remote recordings in a specified period from selected
devices (that support edge recording).
Note that this rule is independent of the Automatically retrieve remote
recordings when connection is restored setting.
No mandatory stop action: This type of action does not require a stop
action. You can specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an
event or after a period of time.
Save attached
image
Ensures that when an image is received from the Images Received event
(sent via SMTP email from a camera), it is saved for future usage. In
future, other events can possibly also trigger this action.
No mandatory stop action: This type of action does not require a stop
action. You can specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an
event or after a period of time.
Activate archiving
on <archives>
Starts archiving. When you select this type of action, the Manage Rule
wizard prompts you to select relevant archives.
No mandatory stop action: This type of action does not require a stop
action. You can specify optional stop actions to be performed on either an
event or after a period of time.
Events overview
When you add an event-based rule in the Manage Rule wizard, you can select between a number
of different event types. In order for you to get a good overview, events you can select are listed in
groups according to whether they are:
Hardware:
Some hardware is capable of creating events themselves, for example to detect motion. You can
use these as events but you must configure them on the hardware before you can use them in the
system. You may only be able to use the events listed on some hardware as not all types of
cameras can detect tampering or temperature changes.
Hardware - Configurable events:
Configurable events from hardware are automatically imported from device drivers. This means
that they vary from hardware to hardware and are not documented here. Configurable events are
not triggered until you have added them to the system and configured them on the Event tab for
hardware. Some of the configurable events also require that you configure the camera (hardware)
itself.
Hardware - Predefined events:
Event
Description
Communication Error
(Hardware)
Occurs when a connection to the hardware is lost.
Management Client elements
137
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Event
Description
Communication Started
(Hardware)
Occurs when communication with the hardware is successfully
established.
Communication Stopped
(Hardware)
Occurs when communication with the hardware is successfully
stopped.
Devices - Configurable events:
Configurable events from devices are automatically imported from device drivers. This means that
they vary from device to device and are not documented here. Configurable events are not
triggered until you have added them to the system and configured them on the Event tab on a
device.
Devices - Predefined events:
Event
Description
Communication Error
(Device)
Occurs when a connection to a device is lost, or when an attempt
is made to communicate with a device, and the attempt is
unsuccessful.
Communication Started
(Device)
Occurs when communication with a device is successfully
established.
Communication Stopped
(Device)
Occurs when communication with a device is successfully
stopped.
Feed overflow (media overflow) occurs when a recording server
cannot process received data as quickly as specified in the
configuration and therefore is forced to discard some recordings.
Feed Overflow Started
If the server is healthy, feed overflow usually happens because of
slow disk writes. You can resolve this either by reducing the
amount of data written, or by improving the storage system's
performance. Reduce the amount of written data by reducing
frame rates, resolution or image quality on your cameras, but this
may degrade recording quality. If you are not interested in that,
instead improve your storage system's performance by installing
extra drives to share the load or by installing faster disks or
controllers.
You can use this event to trigger actions that helps you avoid the
problem, for example, to lower the recording frame rate.
Feed Overflow Stopped
Occurs when feed overflow (see description of the Feed
Overflow Started event) ends.
Occurs when client users request a live stream from a device.
Live Client Feed Requested
Live Client Feed Terminated
Management Client elements
The event occurs upon the request even if the client user's
request later turns out to be unsuccessful, for example because
the client user does not have the rights required for viewing the
requested live feed or because the feed is for some reason
stopped.
Occurs when client users no longer request a live stream from a
device.
138
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Event
Description
Occurs when a client user starts a recording session for a camera.
Manual Recording Started
The event is triggered even if the device already is being
recorded via rule actions.
Occurs when a client user stops a recording session for a camera.
Manual Recording Stopped
If the rule system also have started a recording session it
continues recording even after the manual recording is stopped.
Occurs when the system detects motion in video received from
cameras.
This type of event requires that the system's motion detection is
enabled for the cameras to which the event is linked.
Motion Started
In addition to the system's motion detection, some cameras can
detect motion themselves and trigger the Motion Started (HW)
event, but it depends on the configuration of the camera
hardware and in the system. See Hardware - Configurable
events above.
Occurs when motion is no longer detected in received video. See
also the description of the Motion Started event.
This type of event requires that the system's motion detection is
enabled for the cameras to which the event is linked.
Motion Stopped
In addition to the system's motion detection, some cameras can
detect motion themselves and trigger the Motion Stopped (HW)
event, but it depends on the configuration of the camera
hardware and in the system. See Hardware - Configurable
events above.
Occurs when an external output port on a device is activated.
Output Activated
Output Changed
This type of event requires that at least one device on your
system supports output ports.
Occurs when the state of an external output port on a device is
changed.
This type of event requires that at least one device on your
system supports output ports.
Occurs when an external output port on a device is deactivated.
Output Deactivated
PTZ Manual Session Started
This type of event requires that at least one device on your
system supports output ports.
Occurs when a manually operated PTZ session (as opposed to a
PTZ session based on scheduled patrolling or automatically
triggered by an event) is started on a camera.
This type of event requires that the cameras to which the event is
linked are PTZ cameras.
Management Client elements
139
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Event
Description
Occurs when a manually operated PTZ session (as opposed to a
PTZ session based on scheduled patrolling or automatically
PTZ Manual Session Stopped triggered by an event) is stopped on a camera.
This type of event requires that the cameras to which the event is
linked are PTZ cameras.
Recording Started
Occurs whenever recording is started. There is a separate event
for manual recording started.
Recording Stopped
Occurs whenever recording is stopped. There is a separate event
for manual recording stopped.
Settings Changed
Occurs when settings on a device are successfully changed.
Settings Changed Error
Occurs when an attempt is made to change settings on a device,
and the attempt is unsuccessful.
External events - Predefined events:
Event
Description
Activated when start recordings are requested via the MIP
Software Development Kit (SDK).
Request Start Recording
Through the MIP SDK a third party vendor can develop custom
plug-ins (for example, integration to external access control
systems or similar) for your system.
Activated when stop recordings are requested via the MIP SDK.
Request Stop Recording
Through the MIP SDK a third party vendor can develop custom
plug-ins (for example, integration to external access control
systems or similar) for your system.
External events - Generic events:
Generic events allow you to trigger actions in the system by sending simple strings via the IP
network to the system. The purpose of generic events is to allow as many external sources as
possible to interact with the system.
External events - User-defined events:
A number of events custom made to suit your system may also be selectable. You can use such
user-defined events for:

Making it possible for client users to manually trigger events while viewing live video in the
clients.

Countless other purposes. For example, you may create user-defined events which occur if
a particular type of data is received from a device.
See About user-defined events (on page 154) for more information.
Management Client elements
140
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Recording servers:
Event
Description
Archive Available
Occurs when an archive for a recording server becomes available
after having been unavailable (see Archive Unavailable).
Archive Unavailable
Occurs when an archive for a recording server becomes
unavailable, for example if the connection to an archive located
on a network drive is lost. In such cases, you cannot archive
recordings.
You can use the event to, for example, trigger an alarm or a
notification profile so that an email notification is automatically
sent to relevant people in your organization.
Archive Not Finished
Occurs when an archive for a recording server is not finished with
the last archiving round when the next is scheduled to start.
Occurs when a database disk is full. A database disk is considered
to be full when there is less than 5GB of space is left on the disk:
Database Disk Full
The oldest data in a database is always auto-archived (or deleted
if no next archive is defined) when less than 5GB of space is free.
If less than 1GB space is free, data is deleted even if a next
archive is defined. A database always requires 250MB of free
space. If this limit is reached (if data is not deleted fast enough),
no more data is written to the database until enough space has
been freed. The actual maximum size of your database is the
amount of gigabytes you specify, minus 5GB.
Database Full - Auto Archive
Occurs when an archive for a recording server is full and needs to
auto-archive to an archive in the storage.
Database Repair
Occurs if a database becomes corrupted, in which case the
system automatically attempts two different database repair
methods: a fast repair and a thorough repair.
Database Storage Available
Occurs when a storage for a recording server becomes available
after having been unavailable (see Database Storage
Unavailable).
You can, for example, use the event to start recording if it has
been stopped by a Database Storage Unavailable event.
Database Storage
Unavailable
Occurs when a storage for a recording server becomes
unavailable, for example if the connection to a storage located on
a network drive is lost. In such cases, you cannot archive
recordings.
You can use the event to, for example, stop recording, trigger an
alarm or a notification profile so an e-mail notification is
automatically sent to relevant people in your organization.
Events from add-on products and integrations:
Events from add-on products and integrations can be used in the rule system, for example:

Analytics events can also be used in the rule system.
Management Client elements
141
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Rules
About rules
Rules specify actions to carry out under particular conditions. Example: When motion is detected
(condition), a camera should begin recording (action).
The following are examples of what you can do with rules:

Start and stop recording

Set non-default live frame rate

Set non-default recording frame rate

Start and stop PTZ patrolling

Pause and resume PTZ patrolling

Move PTZ cameras to specific positions

Set output to activated/deactivated state

Send notifications via e-mail

Generate log entries

Generate events

Apply new device settings, for example a different resolution on a camera

Make video appear in Matrix recipients

Start and stop plug-ins

Start and stop feeds from devices
Stopping a device means that video is no longer transferred from the device to the system, in
which case you cannot view live video nor record video. In contrast, a device on which you have
stopped the feed can still communicate with the recording server, and you can start the feed from
the device automatically through a rule, as opposed to when the device is manually disabled in the
Management Client.
Important: Some rule content may require that certain features are enabled for the relevant
devices. For example, a rule specifying that a camera should record does not work as intended if
recording is not enabled for the relevant camera. Before creating a rule, Sony recommends that
you verify that the devices involved can perform as intended.
About default rules
Your system includes a number of default rules that you can use basic features without needing to
set anything up. You can deactivate or modify the default rules as you need. If you modify or
deactivate the default rules, your system may not work as desired nor guarantee that video feeds
or audio feeds are automatically fed to the system.
Management Client elements
142
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Default rule
Goto Preset when PTZ is
done
Description
Ensures that PTZ cameras go to their respective default preset
positions after you have operated them manually. This rule is not
enabled by default.
Even when you have enabled the rule, you must have defined
default preset positions for the relevant PTZ cameras in order for
the rule to work. You do this on the Presets tab.
Ensures that as long as motion is detected in video from cameras,
the video is recorded, provided recording is enabled for the
relevant cameras. Recording is by default enabled.
Record on Motion
Record on Request
While the default rule specifies recording based on detected
motion, it does not guarantee that the system records video, as
you may have disabled individual cameras' recording for one or
more cameras. Even when you have enabled recording,
remember that the quality of recordings may be affected by
individual camera's recording settings.
Ensures that video is recorded automatically when an external
request occurs, provided recording is enabled for the relevant
cameras. Recording is enabled by default.
The request is always triggered by a system integrating
externally with your system, and the rule is primarily used by
integrators of external systems or plug-ins.
Ensures that audio feeds from all connected microphones and
speakers are automatically fed to the system.
Start Audio Feed
While the default rule enables access to connected microphones'
and speakers' audio feeds immediately upon installing the
system, it does not guarantee that audio is recorded, as you must
specify recording settings separately.
Ensures that video feeds from all connected cameras are
automatically fed to the system.
Start Feed
While the default rule enables access to connected cameras' video
feeds immediately upon installing the system, it does not
guarantee that video is recorded, as cameras' recording settings
must be specified separately.
Ensures that data feeds from all connected cameras are
automatically fed to the system.
Start Metadata Feed
While the default rule enables access to connected cameras' data
feeds immediately upon installing the system, it does not
guarantee that data is recorded, as cameras' recording settings
must be specified separately.
Recreate default rules
If you accidentally delete any of the default rules, you can recreate them by typing the following
content:
Management Client elements
143
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Default rule
Goto preset when PTZ is
done
Record on Motion
Text to type
Perform an action on PTZ Manual Session Stopped from All
Cameras
Move immediately to default preset on the device on which event
occurred
Perform an action on Motion Started from All Cameras start
recording three seconds before on the device on which event
occurred
Perform stop action on Motion Stopped from All Cameras stop
recording three seconds after
Record on Request
Start Audio Feed
Perform an action on Request Start Recording from External start
recording immediately on the devices from metadata
Perform stop action on Request Stop Recording from External
stop recording immediately
Perform an action in a time interval always start feed on All
Microphones, All Speakers
Perform an action when time interval ends stop feed immediately
Start Feed
Perform an action in a time interval always start feed on All
Cameras
Perform an action when time interval ends stop feed immediately
Start Metadata Feed
Perform an action in a time interval always start feed on All
Metadata
Perform an action when time interval ends stop feed immediately
About validating rules
You can validate the content of an individual rule or all rules in one go. When you create a rule, the
Manage Rule wizard ensures that all of the rule's elements make sense. When a rule has existed
for some time, one or more of the rule's elements may have been affected by other configuration,
and the rule may no longer work. For example, if a rule is triggered by a particular time profile, the
rule does not work if you have deleted that time profile or if you no longer have permissions to it.
Such unintended effects of configuration may be hard to keep an overview of.
Rule validation helps you keep track of which rules have been affected. Validation takes place on a
per-rule basis and each rule is validated by themselves. You cannot validate rules against each
other, for example in order to see whether one rule conflicts with another rule, not even if you use
the Validate All Rules feature.
Note that you cannot validate whether configuration of prerequisites outside the rule itself may
prevent the rule from working. For example, a rule specifying that recording should take place
when motion is detected by a particular camera validates OK if the elements in the rule itself are
correct, even if motion detection, which is enabled on a camera level, not through rules, has not
been enabled for the relevant camera.
You validate an individual rule or all rules in one go by right-clicking the rule you want to validate
and select Validate Rule or Validate All Rules. A dialog box informs you whether the rule(s)
validated successfully or not. If you chose to validated more than one rule and one or more rules
did not succeed, the dialog box lists the names of the affected rules.
Management Client elements
144
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
About rule complexity
You exact number of options depends on the type of rule you want to create, and on the number of
devices available on your system. Rules provide a high degree of flexibility: you can combine event
and time conditions, specify several actions in a single rule, and very often create rules covering
several or all of the devices on your system.
You can make your rules as simple or complex as required. For example, you can create very
simple time-based rules:
Example
Explanation
Very Simple Time-Based
Rule
On Mondays between 08.30 and 11.30 (time condition), Camera
1 and Camera 2 should start recording (action) when the time
period begins and stop recording (stop action) when the time
period ends.
Very Simple Event-Based
Rule
When motion is detected (event condition) on Camera 1, Camera
1 should start recording (action) immediately, then stop recording
(stop action) after 10 seconds.
Even if an event-based rule is activated by an event on one
device, you can specify that actions should take place on one or
more other devices.
Rule Involving Several
Devices
When motion is detected (event condition) on Camera 1, Camera
2 should start recording (action) immediately, and the siren
connected to Output 3 should sound (action) immediately. Then,
after 60 seconds, Camera 2 should stop recording (stop action),
and the siren connected to Output 3 should stop sounding (stop
action).
Rule Combining Time,
Events, and Devices
When motion is detected (event condition) on Camera 1, and the
day of the week is Saturday or Sunday (time condition), Camera
1 and Camera 2 should start recording (action) immediately, and
a notification should be sent to the security manager (action).
Then, 5 seconds after motion is no longer detected on Camera 1
or Camera 2, the 2 cameras should stop recording (stop action).
Depending on your organization's needs, it is often a good idea to create many simple rules rather
than a few complex rules. Even if it means you have more rules in your system, it provides an easy
way to maintain an overview of what your rules do. Keeping your rules simple also means that you
have much more flexibility when it comes to deactivating/activating individual rule elements. With
simple rules, you can deactivate/activate entire rules when required.
Add a rule
When you create rules, you are guided by the wizard Manage Rule which only lists relevant
options.
Management Client elements
145
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
It ensures that a rule does not contain missing elements. Based on your rule's content, it
automatically suggests suitable stop actions, that is what should take place when the rule no longer
applies, ensuring that you do not unintentionally create a never-ending rule.
1. Right-click the Rules item > Add Rule. This opens the Manage Rule wizard. The wizard
guides you through specifying the content of your rule.
2. Specifying a name and a description of the new rule in the Name and Description fields
respectively.
3. Select the relevant type of condition for the rule: either a rule which performs one or more
actions when a particular event occurs, or a rule which performs one or more actions when
you enter a specific period of time.
4. Click Next to go to the wizard's second step. On the wizard's second step, define further
conditions for the rule.
5. Select one or more conditions, for example Day of week is <day>:
Example only. Your selections may be different
Depending on your selections, edit the rule description in the lower part of the wizard
window:
Example only. Your selections may be different
Click the underlined items in bold italics to specify their exact content. For example,
clicking the days link in our example lets you select one or more days of the week on which
the rule should apply.
6. Having specified your exact conditions, click Next to move to the next step of the wizard
and select which actions the rule should cover. Depending on the content and complexity of
your rule, you may need to define more steps, such as stop events and stop actions. For
example, if a rule specifies that a device should perform a particular action during a time
interval (for example, Thursday between 08.00 and 10.30), the wizard may ask you to
specify what should happen when that time interval ends.
7. Your rule is by default active once you have created it if the rule's conditions are met. If
you do not want the rule to be active straight away, clear the Active check box.
8. Click Finish.
Edit, copy and rename a rule
1. In the Overview pane, right-click the relevant rule.
2. Select either:
Edit Rule or Copy Rule or Rename Rule. The wizard Manage Rule opens.
Management Client elements
146
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
3. In the wizard, rename and/or change the rule. If you selected Copy Rule, the wizard
opens, displaying a copy of the selected rule.
4. Click Finish.
Deactivate and activate a rule
Your system applies a rule as soon as the rule's conditions apply which means it is active. If you do
not want a rule to be active, you can deactivate the rule. When you deactivate the rule, the system
does not apply the rule even if the rule's conditions apply. You can easily activate a deactivated
rule later.
Deactivating a rule
1. In the Overview pane, select the rule.
2. Clear the Active check box in the Properties pane.
3. Click Save in the toolbar.
4. An icon with a red x indicates that the rule is deactivated in the Rules list:
Example: The added x on the icon indicates that the third rule is deactivated
Activating a rule
When you want to activate the rule again, select the rule, select the Activate check box, and save
the setting.
Time profiles
About time profiles
Time profiles are periods of time defined by the administrator. You can use time profiles when
creating rules, for example, a rule specifying that a certain action should take place within a certain
time period.
Time profiles are also assigned to roles, along with Smart Client profiles. Per default, all roles are
assigned the default time profile Always. This means that members of roles with this default time
profile attached has no time-based limits to their user rights in the system. You can also assign an
alternative time profile to a role.
Time profiles are highly flexible: you can base them on one or more single periods of time, on one
or more recurring periods of time, or a combination of single and recurring times. Many users may
be familiar with the concepts of single and recurring time periods from calendar applications, such
as the one in Microsoft® Outlook.
Time profiles always apply in local time. This means that if your system has recording servers
placed in different time zones, any actions, for example recording on cameras, associated with time
profiles are carried out in each recording server's local time. Example: If you have a time profile
Management Client elements
147
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
covering the period from 08.30 to 09.30, any associated actions on a recording server placed in
New York is carried out when the local time is 08.30 to 09.30 in New York, while the same actions
on a recording server placed in Los Angeles is carried out some hours later, when the local time is
08.30 to 09.30 in Los Angeles.
You create and manage time profiles by expanding Rules and Events > Time Profiles. A Time
Profiles list opens:
Example only
For an alternative to time profiles, see Day length time profiles (see "About day length time
profiles" on page 150).
Specify a time profile
1. In the Time Profiles list, right-click Time Profiles > Add Time Profile. This opens the
Time Profile window.
2. In the Time Profile window, type a name for the new time profile in the Name field.
Optionally, type a description of the new time profile in the Description field.
3. In the Time Profile window's calendar, select either Day View, Week View or Month
View, then right-click inside the calendar and select either Add Single Time or Add
Recurrence Time.
4. When you have specified the time periods for your time profile, click OK in the Time
Profile window. Your system adds your new time profile to the Time Profiles list. If at a
later stage you wish to edit or delete the time profile, you do that from the Time Profiles
list as well.
Add a single time
When you select Add Single Time, the Select Time window appears:
Time and date format may be different on your system
1. In the Select Time window, specify Start time and End time. If the time is to cover
whole days, select the All day event box.
2. Click OK.
Management Client elements
148
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Specify a recurring time
When you select Add Recurring Time, the Select Recurring Time window appears:
Time and date format may be different on your system
1. In the Select Time window, specify time range, recurrence pattern and range of
recurrence.
2. Click OK.
A time profile can contain several periods of time. If you want your time profile to contain further
periods of time, add more single times or recurring times.
Edit a time profile
1. In the Overview pane's Time Profiles list, right-click the relevant time profile, and select
Edit Time Profile. This opens the Time Profile window.
2. Edit the time profile as needed. If you have made changes to the time profile, click OK in
the Time Profile window. You return to the Time Profiles list.
You browse months by clicking the small back/forward buttons.
Note: In the Time Profile Information window, you can edit the time profile as needed.
Remember that a time profile may contain more than one time period, and that time periods may
be recurring. The small month overview in the top right corner can help you get a quick overview
of the time periods covered by the time profile, as dates containing specified times are highlighted
in bold.
In this example, the bold dates indicate that you have specified time periods on several days, and
that you have specified a recurring time on Mondays.
Management Client elements
149
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
About day length time profiles
When you place cameras outside, you must often lower the camera resolution, enable black/white
or change other settings when it gets dark or when it gets light. The further north or south from
the equator the cameras are placed, the more the sunrise and sunset time varies during the year.
This makes it impossible to use normal fixed time profiles to adjusts camera settings according to
light conditions.
In such situations, you can create day length time profiles instead to define the sunrise and sunset
in a specified geographical area. Via GPS coordinates, the system calculates the sunrise and sunset
time, even incorporating daylight saving time on a daily basis. As a result, the time profile
automatically follows the yearly changes in sunrise/sunset in the selected area, ensuring the profile
to be active only when needed. All times and dates are based on the management servers time
and date settings. You can also set a positive or negative offset (in minutes) for the start (sunrise)
and end time (sunset). The offset for the start and the end time can be identical or different.
You can use day length profiles both when you create rules and roles.
Create a day length time profile
1. Expand the Rules and Events folder > Time Profiles.
2. In the Time Profiles list, right-click Time Profiles, and select Add Day Length Time
Profile.
3. In the Day Length Time Profile window, fill in the needed information. To deal with
transition periods between lightness and darkness, you can offset activation and
deactivation of the profile. The time and the name of months are shown in the language
used your computer's language/regional settings.
4. To see the location of the entered GPS coordinates in a map, click Show Position in
Browser. This opens a browser where you can see the location.
5. Click OK.
Day length time profile properties
Set the following properties for day length time profile:
Name
Description
Name
The name of the profile.
Description
A description of the profile (optional).
GPS coordinates
GPS coordinates indicating the physical location of the camera(s)
assigned to the profile.
Sunrise offset
Number of minutes (+/-) by which activation of the profile is
offset by sunrise.
Sunset offset
Number of minutes (+/-) by which deactivation of the profile is
offset by sunset.
Time zone
Time zone indicating the physical location of the camera(s).
Management Client elements
150
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Notification profiles
About notification profiles
Notification profiles allow you to set up ready-made email notifications, which can automatically be
triggered by a rule, for example when a particular event occurs. You can include still images and
AVI video clips in the email notifications.
The system does not support TLS (Transport Layer Security) and its predecessor SSL (Secure
Socket Layer). If the sender belongs on a server that requires TLS or SSL, email notifications do
not work properly. Also, you may need to disable any email scanners that could prevent the
application from sending the email notifications.
Prerequisites
Before you can create notification profiles, you must specify settings for the outgoing SMTP mail
server for the email notifications.
If you want the email notifications to be able to include AVI movie clips, you must also specify the
compression settings to use. To do so, go to Tools > Options. This opens the Options window.
Specify the Outgoing SMTP Mail Server on the Mail Server tab and the compression settings on
the AVI Generation tab.
Add notification profiles
1. Expand Rules and Events, right-click Notification Profiles > Add Notification Profile.
This opens the Add Notification Profile wizard.
2. Specify name and description. Click Next.
3. Specify recipient, subject, message text and time between emails:
4. To send a test email notification to the specified recipients, click Test E-mail.
Management Client elements
151
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
5. To include pre-alarm still images, select Include images, and specify number of images,
time between images and whether to embed images in emails or not.
6. To include AVI video clips, select Include AVI, and specify the time before and after event
and frame rate.
7. Click Finish.
Use rules to trigger email notifications
You use the Manage Rule for creating rules. The wizard takes you through all relevant steps. You
specify the use of a notification profile during the step on which you specify the rule's actions.
When you select the action Send notification to <profile>, you can select the relevant
notification profile and which cameras any recordings to include in the notification profile's email
notifications should come from:
Example only. In Manage Rule, you click the links to make your selections
Remember that you cannot include recordings in the notification profile's email notifications unless
something is actually being recorded. If you want still images or AVI video clips in the email
notifications, verify that the rule specifies that recording should take place. The following example
is from a rule which includes both a Start recording action and a Send notification to action:
Notification profile (properties)
Specify the following properties for notification profiles:
Component
Requirement
Name
Type a descriptive name for the notification profile. The name
appears later whenever you select the notification profile during
the process of creating a rule.
Description (optional)
Type a description of the notification profile. The description
appears when you pause your mouse pointer over the notification
profile in the Overview pane's Notification Profiles list.
Recipients
Type the e-mail addresses to which the notification profile's email notifications should be sent. To type more than one e-mail
address, separate addresses with a semicolon. Example:
[email protected];[email protected];[email protected]
Management Client elements
152
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Component
Requirement
Type the text you want to appear as the subject of the e-mail
notification.
Subject
Message text
You can insert system variables, such as Device name, in the
subject and message text field. To insert variables, click the
required variable links in the box below the field.
Type the text you want to appear in the body of the e-mail
notifications. In addition to the message text, the body of each email notification automatically contains this information:

What triggered the e-mail notification.

The source of any attached still images or AVI video clips
Specify required minimum time (in seconds) to pass between the
sending of each e-mail notification. Examples:
Time between e-mails

If specifying a value of 120, a minimum of 2 minutes pass
between the sending of each e-mail notification, even if the
notification profile is triggered again by a rule before the 2
minutes have passed.

If specifying a value of 0, e-mail notifications is sent each
time the notification profile is triggered by a rule. This can
potentially result in a very large number of e-mail
notifications being sent. If using the value 0, you should
therefore carefully consider whether you want to use the
notification profile in rules which are likely to be triggered
frequently.
Number of images
Specify the maximum number of still images you want to include
in each of the notification profile's e-mail notifications. Default is
five images.
Time between images (ms)
Specify the number of milliseconds you want between the
recordings presented on the included images. Example: With the
default value of 500 milliseconds, the included images show
recordings with half a second between them.
Time before event (sec.)
This setting is used to specify the start of the AVI file. By default,
the AVI file contains recordings from 2 seconds before the
notification profile is triggered. You can change this to the
number of seconds you require.
Time after event (sec.)
This setting is used to specify the end of the AVI file. By default,
the AVI file ends 4 seconds after the notification profile is
triggered. You can change this to the number of seconds you
require.
Frame rate
Specify the number of frames per second you want the AVI file to
contain. Default is five frames per second. The higher the frame
rate, the higher the image quality and AVI file size.
Embed images in e-mail
If selected (default), images are inserted in the body of e-mail
notifications. If not, images are included in e-mail notifications as
attached files.
Management Client elements
153
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
User-defined events
About user-defined events
If the event you require is not on the Events Overview list, you can create your own user-defined
events. Use such user-defined events to integrate other systems with your surveillance system.
With user-defined events, you can use data received from a third-party access control system as
events in the system. The events can later trigger actions. This way, you can, for example, begin
recording video from relevant cameras when somebody enters a building.
You can also use user-defined events for manually triggering events while viewing live video in
Network Video Management System Smart Client or automatically if you use them in rules. For
example, when user-defined event 37 occurs, PTZ camera 224 should stop patrolling and go to
preset position 18.
Through roles, you define which of your users are able to trigger the user-defined events. You can
use user-defined events in two ways and at the same time if required:
Events
Description
For providing the ability to
manually trigger events in
Network Video Management
System Smart Client
In this case, user-defined events make it possible for end users
to manually trigger events while viewing live video in Network
Video Management System Smart Client. When a user-defined
event occurs because a user of Network Video Management
System Smart Client triggers it manually, a rule can trigger that
one or more actions should take place on the system.
In this case, you can trigger user-defined events outside the
surveillance system. Using user-defined events this way requires
that a separate API (Application Program Interface. A set of
building blocks for creating or customizing software applications)
is used when triggering the user-defined event. Authentication
through Active Directory is required for using user-defined events
this way. This ensures that even if the user-defined events can
be triggered from outside the surveillance system, only
authorized users are to do it.
For providing the ability to
trigger events through API
Also, user-defined events can via API be associated with metadata, defining certain devices or device groups. This is highly
usable when using user-defined events to trigger rules: you avoid
having a rule for each device, basically doing the same thing.
Example: A company uses access control, having 35 entrances,
each with an access control device. When an access control
device is activated, a user-defined event is triggered in the
system. This user-defined event is used in a rule to start
recording on a camera associated with the activated access
control device. It is defined in the meta-data which camera is
associated with what rule. This way the company does not need
to have 35 user-defined events and 35 rules triggered by the
user-defined events. A single user-defined event and a single rule
are enough.
When you use user-defined events this way, you may not always
want them to be available for manual triggering in Network Video
Management System Smart Client. You can use roles to define
which user-defined events should be visible in Network Video
Management System Smart Client.
Management Client elements
154
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
No matter how you want to use user-defined events, you must add each user-defined event
through the Management Client.
If you rename a user-defined event, already connected Network Video Management System Smart
Client users must log out and log in again before the name change is visible.
Also note that if you delete a user-defined event, this affects any rules in which the user-defined
event is in use. Also, a deleted user-defined event only disappears from Network Video
Management System Smart Client when the Network Video Management System Smart Client
users log out.
Add a user-defined event
1. Expand Rules and Events > User-defined Events.
2. In the Overview pane, right-click Events > Add User-defined Event.
3. Type a name for the new user-defined event, and click OK. The newly added user-defined
event now appears in the list in the Overview pane.
4. The user can now trigger the user-defined event manually in Network Video Management
System Smart Client if the user has rights to do so.
Rename a user-defined event
1. Expand Rules and Events > User-defined Events.
2. In the Overview pane, select the user-defined event.
3. In the Properties pane, overwrite the existing name.
4. In the toolbar, click Save.
Analytics events
About analytics events
Analytics events are typically data received from an external third-party video content analysis
(VCA) providers.
Using analytics events as basis for alarms is basically a three step process:

Part one, enabling the analytics events feature and setting up its security. Use a list of
allowed addresses to control who can send event data to the system and which port the
server listens on.

Part two, creating the analytics event, possibly with a description of the event, and testing
it.

Part three, using the analytics event as the source of an alarm definition.
You set up analytics events on the Rules and Events list in the Site Navigation pane.
To use VCA-based events, a third-party VCA tool is required for supplying data to the system.
Which VCA tool to use is entirely up to you, as long as the data supplied by the tool adheres to the
format. Contact your system provider for more details. Third-party VCA tools are developed by
Management Client elements
155
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
independent partners delivering solutions based on a Sony open platform. These solutions can
impact performance on the system.
Add and edit an analytics event
Add an analytics event
1. Expand Rules and Events, right-click Analytics Events. Select Add New. The Analytics
Events Information window appears.
2. Type a name for the event in the Name field.
3. Type a description text in the Description field if needed.
4. In the toolbar, click Save. You can test the validity of the event by clicking Test Event.
You can continually correct errors indicated in the test and run the test as many times as
you want and from anywhere in the process.
Edit an analytics event
1. Click an existing analytics event to open the Analytics Event Information window, where
you can edit relevant fields.
2. You can test the validity of the event by clicking Test Event. You can continually correct
errors indicated in the test and run the test as many times as you want and from anywhere
in the process.
Test analytics event
To test an analytics event, you must first create one. See Create a new analytics event.
1. Click an existing analytics event. This opens a new window.
2. In this window, click Test Event.
3. This opens the Test Analytics Event window which goes through a number of conditions
that must be successful for analytics events to work. The window consists of two tabs,
Tasks and Errors. See more information about the information on these tabs below this
procedure.
Example of the Test Analytics Event window. May look different in different contexts.
4. Remember to save any changes made during the test. In the toolbar, click Save.
Management Client elements
156
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
When you are done, check the presence of your test event in the Network Video Management
System Smart Client's Alarm list. Sort by type: Test Alarm. See the Network Video Management
System Smart Client documentation for more details. You can carry out this test at any step of the
analytics event creation/editing process and as many times as you want to.
Information on the Tasks tab
The first tab, the Task tab, lists these conditions in the order they are tested:
Error
Solution/explanation
Changes saved (step 1)
If the event is new, is it saved? Or if there are changes to the
event name, are these changes saved?
Analytics Events enabled
(step 2)
Is the analytics event feature enabled?
Address allowed (step 3)
Is the IP address/hostname of the computer that sends the
event(s) allowed (listed on the address list)?
Analytics event used in
alarm definition (step 4)
Is the analytics event used actively in any alarm definitions?
Send analytics event (step
5)
Did sending a test event to the event server succeed?
Each step is marked by either failed:
or successful:
.
Information on the Errors tab
The second tab, the Errors tab, shows a list of errors corresponding to any possibly failed
conditions. Possible errors are:
Step 1:
Error
Solution/explanation
Save changes before testing
Save changes.
analytics event
Step 2:
Analytics events have not
been enabled
Enable analytics events.
Step 3:
The local host name must be
added as allowed address
Add your computer to the list of allowed IP addresses/hostnames.
for the Analytics Event
service
Error resolving the local
host name
The IP address/hostname of the computer cannot be found or is
invalid.
Step 4:
Analytics event is not used
in any alarm definition
Use the analytics event in an alarm definition.
Step 5:
Management Client elements
157
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Event server not found
Unable to find event server on the list of registered services.
Error connecting to event
server
Unable to connect to event server on the stated port, most likely
due to network problems, event server being stopped or similar
incident.
Error sending analytics
event
Connection to event server established but event cannot be sent
(most likely due to network problems, for example time out).
Error receiving response
from event server.
Event sent to event server but no reply received, most likely due
to network problems or the port being busy. See the event server
log, typically located at ProgramData\Sony\- Network VMS Event
Server\logs\.
Analytics event unknown by
event server
Event server does not know the event (most likely due to the
event or changes to the event not having been saved).
Invalid analytics event
received by event server.
Event format is somehow incorrect.
Sender unauthorized by
event server
Most likely because your computer is not on the list of allowed IP
addresses/hostnames.
Internal error in event
server.
Event server error. See the event server log, typically located at
ProgramData\Sony\- Network VMS Event Server\logs\.
Invalid response received
from Event server
Response is invalid (possibly due to port being busy or network
problems. See the event server log, typically located at
ProgramData\Sony\- Network VMS Event Server\logs\.
Unknown response from
event server
Response is valid, but not understood (possibly due to port being
busy or network problems. See the event server log, typically
located at ProgramData\Sony\- Network VMS Event Server\logs\.
Unexpected error
Not likely to occur, but if the accompanying text in the error does
not provide enough information and problem continues, contact
Sony support for help.
Edit analytics events settings
In the toolbar, go to the Tools > Options > Analytics Events tab to edit relevant settings.
Generic events
About generic events
Important: This feature does not work if you do not have the Network Video Management System
event server installed.
Generic events allow you to trigger actions in the Network Video Management System event server
by sending simple strings via the IP network to your system.
You can use any hard- or software, which can send strings via TCP or UDP, to trigger generic
events. Your system can analyze received TCP or UDP data packages, and automatically trigger
generic events when specific criteria are met. This way, you may integrate your system with
external sources, for example access control systems and alarm systems. The aim is to allow as
many external sources as possible to interact with the system.
Management Client elements
158
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
With the concept of data sources, you avoid having to adapt third-party tools to meet the
standards of your system. With data sources, you can communicate with a particular piece of hardor software on a specific IP port and fine-tune how bytes arriving on that port are interpreted. Each
generic event type pairs up with a data source and makes up a language used for communication
with a specific piece of hard- or software.
Working with data sources requires general knowledge of IP networking and specific knowledge of
the individual hard- or software you want to interface from. There are many parameters you can
use and no ready-made solution on how to do this. Basically, your system provides the tools, but
not the solution. Unlike user-defined events, generic events has no authentication. This makes
them easier to trigger but, to avoid jeopardizing security, only events from local host are accepted.
You can allow other client IP addresses from the Generic Events tab of the Options menu.
Add a generic event
1. Expand Rules and Events, right-click Generic Events, and select Add New.
2. Fill in the needed information and properties. See Generic event properties (see "Generic
event (properties)" on page 160).
3. Optional: In the Check if expression matches event string: field, enter the expression
you want to validate.
4. Optional: Below the Check if expression matches event string: field, you see either
Match or No match as indication of whether your string can be validated against the
expression entered in the Expression: field or not. If not, change the string and/or
relevant settings and try again.
5. Click Yes.
Test a generic event
1. Expand Rules and Events > Generic Events.
2. Select the top-node Generic Event.
3. In the Properties pane, fill in the needed information.
4. Click Send.
5. Depending on your selected data source, you may get a response (an echo from the event
server) in the Echo from event server and local error message field. This can be either
successful or failed.
See also Generic event test properties (see "Generic event test (properties)" on page 162).
Example: Create and test a basic generic event
To trigger recording on Camera1, send the string RecordCamera1 to a TCP port on the event
server and teach the event server to understand what RecordCamera1 means.
Create the scenario
1. Expand Rules and Events, right-click Generic Events, and select Add New.

In the Name: field enter, for example, RecCam1.
Management Client elements
159
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual

In the Expression: field enter RecordCamera1.

In the Data source: field select International.
2. Save your changes. Add a rule defining that when the generic event RecCam1 is triggered,
recording should start on Camera1.
Test scenario
1. Expand Rules and Events, select Generic Events.
2. In the Overview pane, select the top-node Generic Event.
3. In the Properties pane:

In String to send as generic event: enter Please RecordCamera1 that would
be nice.

In Data source to send event string to: select International.
4. Click Send.
If you did not change default echo settings, you should get the following response in Echo from
event server and local error message: 4,39,1,RecCam1. This means that request number 4
had 39 characters and that there was 1 match with a generic event named RecCam1.
To try out the event from a non-Network Video Management System application, start a DOS box,
enter telnet localhost 1235 and press Enter. Next, type RecordCamera1 that would be nice
and press Enter. You should get the same response.
Generic event (properties)
Component
Requirement
Name
Unique name for the generic event. Name must be unique among
all types of events. such as user defined events, analytics events,
and so on.
Enabled
Generic events are by default enabled. Clear the check box to
disable the event.
Management Client elements
160
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Expression that the system should look out for when analyzing
data packages. You can use the following operators:

( ): Used to ensure that related terms are processed
together as a logical unit. They can be used to force a certain
processing order in the analysis.
Example: The search criteria "(User001 OR Door053) AND
Sunday" first processes the two terms inside the parenthesis,
then combines the result with the last part of the string. So, the
system first looks for any packages containing either of the terms
User001 or Door053, then takes the results and run through
them in order to see which packages also contain the term
Sunday.
Expression

AND: With an AND operator, you specify that the terms on
both sides of the AND operator must be present.
Example: The search criteria "User001 AND Door053 AND
Sunday" returns a result only if the terms User001, Door053
and Sunday are all included in your expression. It is not enough
for only one or two of the terms to be present. The more terms
you combine with AND, the fewer results you retrieve.

OR: With an OR operator, you specify that either one or
another term must be present.
Example: The search criteria "User001 OR Door053 OR
Sunday" returns any results containing either User001,
Door053 or Sunday. The more terms you combine with OR, the
more results you retrieve.
Indicates how particular the system should be when analyzing
received data packages. The options are the following:

Search: In order for the event to occur, the received data
package must contain the text specified in the Expression:
field, but may also have more content.
Example: If you have specified that the received package
should contain the terms User001 and Door053, the event
is triggered if the received package contains the terms
User001 and Door053 and Sunday since your two required
terms are contained in the received package.
Expression type

Match: In order for the event to occur, the received data
package must contain exactly the text specified in the
Expression: field, and nothing else.

Regular expression: In order for the event to occur, the
text specified in the Expression: field must identify specific
patterns in the received data packages.
If you switch from Search or Match to Regular expression, the
text in the Expression field is automatically translated to a
regular expression.
Management Client elements
161
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
The priority must be specified as a number between 0 (lowest
priority) and 999999 (highest priority).
The same data package may be analyzed for different events. The
ability to assign a priority to each event lets you manage which
event should be triggered if a received package matches the
criteria for several events.
Priority
When the system receives a TCP and/or UDP package, analysis of
the packet starts with analysis for the event with the highest
priority. This way, when a package matches the criteria for
several events, only the event with the highest priority is
triggered. If a package matches the criteria for several events
with an identical priority, for example two events with a priority
of 999, all events with this priority is triggered.
Check if expression matches An event string to be tested against the expression entered in the
event string
Expression: field.
Generic event test (properties)
Component
Requirement
String to send as generic
event
An event string to be tested from within the system by the event
server as a generic event.
Data source to send event
string to
See Generic event data source properties (see "Generic event
data source (properties)" on page 163).
A window displaying the echo of the string from the event server
in the following default format:
[X],[Y],[Z],[Name of generic event]
[X] = request number.
Echo from event server and
local error message
[Y] = number of characters.
[Z] = number of matches with a generic event.
[Name of generic event] = name entered in the Name: field.
If no generic events are defined or if no data sources are enabled,
an information message is displayed instead. Other echo formats
can be selected (see "Generic Events tab (options)" on page
204).
Management Client elements
162
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Generic event data source (properties)
Component
Requirement
You can choose between two default data sources and define a
custom data source. What to choose depends on your third party
program and/or the hard- or software you want to interface from:
Compatible: Factory default settings are enabled, echoes all
bytes, TCP and UDP, Ipv4 only, port 1234, no separator, local
host only, current code page encoding (ANSI).
Data source
International: Factory default settings are enabled, echoes
statistics only, TCP only, Ipv4+6, port 1235, <CR><LF> as
separator, local host only, UTF-8 encoding. (<CR><LF> =
13,10).
[Data source A]
[Data source B]
and so on.
New
Click to create a new data source.
Name
Name of the data source.
Enabled
Data sources are by default enabled. Clear the check box to
disable the data source.
Reset
Click to reset all settings for the selected data source. The
entered name in the Name field remains.
Port
The port number of the data source.
Protocols which the system should listen for, and analyze, in
order to detect generic events:
Any: TCP as well as UDP.
Protocol type selector
TCP: TCP only.
UDP: UDP only.
TCP and UDP packages used for generic events may contain
special characters, such as @, #, +, ~, and more.
IP type selector
Selectable IP address types: IPv4, IPv6 or both.
Separator bytes
Select the separator bytes used to separate individual generic
event records. Default for data source type International (see
Data sources earlier) is 13,10. (13,10 = <CR><IF>).
Management Client elements
163
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Component
Requirement
Available echo return formats:

Echo statistics: Echoes the following format:
[X],[Y],[Z],[Name of generic event]
[X] = request number.
[Y] = number of characters.
Echo type selector
[Z] = number of matches with a generic event.
[Name of generic event] = name entered in the Name:
field.

Echo all bytes: Echoes all bytes.

No echo: Suppresses all echoing.
Encoding type selector
By default, the list only shows the most relevant options. Select
the Show all check box to display all available encodings.
Show all
See previous bullet.
Allowed external IPv4
addresses
Specify the IP addresses, that the management server must be
able to communicate with in order to manage external events.
You can also use this to exclude IP addresses that you do not
want data from.
Allowed external IPv6
addresses
Specify the IP addresses, that the management server must be
able to communicate with in order to manage external events.
You can also use this to exclude IP addresses that you do not
want data from.
Tip: Ranges can be specified in each of the four positions, like 100,105,110-120. As an example,
all addresses on the 10.10 network can be allowed by 10.10.[0-254].[0-254] or by
10.10.255.255.
Security
Roles
About roles
Roles determine which devices users can access. Roles also determine rights and handle security
within the video management system. First, you add roles, then you add users and groups and
finally a Smart Client profile as well as other default profiles that belong to each role. Roles you can
create in the system have their own view groups in Network Video Management System Smart
Client in which their views are created and stored.
The system comes with one predefined role which you cannot delete: the Administrators role.
Users and groups with the Administrators role have complete and unrestricted access to the
Management Client elements
164
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
entire system. For this reason, you cannot specify role settings for the Administrators role. The
Administrators role has the default Smart Client profile and does not have a time profile.
Users with local machine administrator rights on the computer running the management server
automatically have administrator rights on the management server. Only users whom you trust as
administrators of your system should have local machine administrator rights on the computer
running the management server. You cannot turn this off. You add users and groups to the
Administrators role just as with any other role. See Assign and remove users and groups to/from
roles (see "Assign/remove users and groups to/from roles" on page 167).
In addition to the Administrators role, you can add as many roles as required to suit your needs.
You may, for example, have different roles for users of Network Video Management System Smart
Client depending on which cameras you want them to access or similar restrictions. To set up roles
in your system, expand the Security > Roles.
About rights of a role
When you create a role in your system, you can give the role a number of rights to the system
components or features that the relevant role can access and use. You may, for example, want to
create roles that only have rights to functionality in Network Video Management System Smart
Client or other Sony viewing clients, with the rights to view only certain cameras. If you create
such roles, these roles should not have rights to access and use the Management Client, but only
have access to some or all functionality found in Network Video Management System Smart Client
or other clients. To address this, you may want to set up a role that has some or most typical
administrator rights, for example, the rights to add and remove cameras, servers and similar
functionality.
You can create roles that have some or most rights of a system administrator. This may, for
example, be relevant if your organization wants to separate between between people who can
administrate a subset of the system and people who can administrate the entire system. The
feature allows you to provide differentiated administrator permissions to access, edit or change a
large variety of system functions, for example, the right to edit the settings for servers or cameras
in your system. You specify these permissions on the Overall Security tab (see "Overall Security
tab (roles)" on page 169). As a minimum, to enable that the differentiated system administrator
can launch the Management Client, you must grant read permissions on the management server
for the role.
To give a role such differentiated administrator rights, the person with the default full administrator
role must set up the role under Security > Roles > Info tab > Add new. When you set up the
new role, you can then associate the role with your own profiles must similarly to when you set up
any other role in the system or use the system's default profiles. For more information, see Add
and manage a role (on page 166).
Once you have specified what profiles you want to associate the role with, go to the Overall
Security tab to specify the rights of the role.
About users
The term users primarily refers to users who connect to the surveillance system through the
clients. You can configure such users in two ways:

As basic users, authenticated by a user name/password combination.

As Windows users, authenticated based on their Windows login.
Management Client elements
165
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Windows Users
You add Windows Users through the use of Active Directory. Active Directory (AD) is a directory
service implemented by Microsoft for Windows domain networks. It is included in most Windows
Server operating systems. It identifies resources on a network in order for users or applications to
access them. Active Directory uses the concepts of users and groups.
Users are Active Directory objects representing individuals with a user account. Example:
Groups are Active Directory objects with several users. In this example, the Management Group
has three users:
Groups can contain any number of users. By adding a group to the system, you add all of its
members in one go. Once you have added the group to the system, any changes made to the
group in Active Directory, such as new members you add or old members you remove at a later
stage, are immediately reflected in the system. Note that a user can be a member of more than
one group at a time.
You can use Active Directory to add existing user and group information to the system with some
benefits:

Users and groups are specified centrally in Active Directory so you do not have to create
user accounts from scratch.

You do not have to configure any authentication of users on the system as Active Directory
handles authentication.
Before you can add users and groups through the Active Directory service, you must have a server
with Active Directory installed on your network.
Basic users
If your system does not have access to Active Directory, create a basic user (see "About basic
users" on page 182). For information about how to set up basic users, see Create basic user (see
"Create basic users" on page 182).
Add and manage a role
1. Expand Security and right-click Roles.
2. Select Add Role. This opens the Add Role dialog box.
Management Client elements
166
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
3. Type a name and description of the new role and click OK.
4. The new role is added to the Roles list. By default, a new role does not have any
users/groups associated with it, but it does have a number of default profiles associated.
5. To choose different Smart Client profiles or time profiles, click the drop-down lists.
6. You can now assign users/groups to the role, and specify which of the system’s features
they can access.
See also Assign/remove users and groups to/from roles (on page 167) and Role settings (see
"Roles settings" on page 169).
Copy, rename or delete a role
Copy a role
If you have a role with complicated settings and/or rights and need a similar or almost similar role,
it might be easier to copy the already existing role and make minor adjustments to the copy than
to creating a new role from scratch.
1. Expand Security, click Roles, right-click the relevant role and select Copy Role.
2. In the dialog box that opens, give the copied role a new unique name and description.
3. Click OK.
Rename a role
If you rename a role, this does not change the name of the view group based upon the role.
1. Expand Security, and right-click Roles.
2. Right-click required role and select Rename Role.
3. In the dialog box that opens, change the name of the role.
4. Click OK.
Delete a role
1. Expand Security, and click Roles.
2. Right-click the unwanted role and select Delete Role.
3. Click Yes.
Important: If you delete a role, this does not delete the view group based upon the role.
Assign/remove users and groups to/from roles
To assign or remove Windows users or groups or basic users to/from a role:
1. Expand Security and select Roles. Then select the required role in the Overview pane:
2. In the Properties pane, select the Users and Groups tab at the bottom.
Management Client elements
167
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
3. Click Add, select between Windows user or Basic user.
Assign Windows users and groups to a role
1. Select Windows user. This opens the Select Users, Computers and Groups dialog box:
2. Verify that the required object type is specified. If, for example, you need to add a
computer, click Object Types and mark Computer. Also verify that the required domain is
specified in the From this location field. If not, click Locations to browse for the required
domain.
3. In the Enter the object names to select box, type the relevant user names, initials, or
other types of identifier which Active Directory can recognize. Use the Check Names
feature to verify that Active Directory recognizes the names or initials you have typed.
Alternatively, use the "Advanced..." function to search for users or groups.
4. Click OK. The selected users/groups are now added to the Users and Groups tab's list of
users who you have assigned the selected role. You can add more users and groups by
entering multiple names separated by a semicolon (;).
Assign basic users to a role
1. Select Basic User. This opens the Select Basic Users to add to Role dialog box:
2. Select the basic user(s) that you want to assign to this role.
3. Optional: Click New to create a new basic user.
4. Click OK. The selected basic user(s) are now added to the Users and Groups tab's list of
basic users who you have assigned the selected role.
Remove users and groups from a role
1. On the Users and Groups tab, select the user or group you want to remove and click
Remove in the lower part of the tab. You can select more than one user or group, or a
combination of groups and individual users, if you need to.
2. Confirm that you want to remove the selected user(s) or and group(s). Click Yes.
A user may also have roles through group memberships. When that is the case, you cannot remove
the individual user from the role. Group members may also hold roles as individuals. To find out
which roles users, groups, or individual group members have, use the View Effective Roles
function.
View effective roles
With the Effective Roles feature, you can view all roles of a selected user or group. This is practical
if you are using groups and it is the only way of viewing which roles a specific user is a member of.
1. Open the Effective Roles window by expanding Security, then right-clicking Roles and
select Effective Roles.
2. If you want information about a basic user, type the name in the User name field. Click
Refresh to display the roles of the user.
3. If you use Windows users or groups in Active Directory, click the "..." browse button.
Select object type, enter the name, and click OK. The user's roles appear automatically.
Management Client elements
168
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Roles settings
Info tab (roles)
On the Info tab of a role, you can set the following:
Name
Description
Name
Type a name for the role.
Description
Type a description for the role.
Select a Smart Client profile to associate with the role.
Smart Client profile
Default time profile
Requires permissions to manage security on the management
server.
Select a default time profile to associate with the role.
You cannot apply this to the default Administrators role.
Select the check box to associate login authorization with the
role. It means that Network Video Management System Smart
Client or the Management Client asks for a second authorization,
typically by a superuser or manager, when the user logs in.
Login authorization required
To enable administrators to authorize users, configure the
management server's Authorize Users right on the Overall
Security tab.
You cannot apply this to the default Administrators role.
User and Groups tab (roles)
On the User and Groups tab, you assign users and groups to roles (see "Assign/remove users and
groups to/from roles" on page 167). You can assign Windows users and groups or basic users (see
"About users" on page 165).
Name
Description
Name
Displays the name of the user or group assigned to this role.
Description
Displays the description that you entered when the basic user
was created.
Overall Security tab (roles)
On the Overall Security tab, you set up overall rights for roles. For every component available in
your system, decide whether to Allow or Deny users with the role the rights to access and use
different areas on the relevant component.
The overall security settings only apply to the current site.
Management Client elements
169
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
You can associate a user with more than one role. If you select Deny on a security setting for one
role and Allow for another, the Deny right permission overrules the Allow right permission.
In the following, the descriptions show what happens on each individual right for the different
system components if you select Allow for the relevant role.
For every system component or functionality, the full system administrator can use the Allow or
Deny check boxes to set up security permissions for the role. Any security permissions you set up
here is set up for the whole system component or functionality. So if, for example, you select the
Deny check box on Cameras, all cameras added to the system are unavailable for the role. In
contrast, if you select the Allow check box instead, the role can see all added cameras to the
system. The result of selecting Allow or Deny on your cameras is that the camera settings on the
Device tab then inherit your selections on the Overall Security tab so that either all cameras are
available or unavailable to the particular role. If you want to set individual security permissions for
individual cameras or similar device channels, you can then only set these individual permissions
on the tab of the relevant system component or functionality if you have turned off any overall
settings for the system component or functionality on the Overall Security tab.
The descriptions below also apply to the rights that you can configure through the MIP SDKs.
Management Server
Security right
Description
Full control
Enables the right to manage all security entries on this
part of the system.
System Monitor
Enables the right to view the data of the System Monitor.
Status API
Enables the right to perform queries on the Status API
located on the recording server. This means that the role
with this right enabled, has access to read the status of
the items located on the recording server.
Authorize users
Enables the right to authorize users when they are asked
for a second login in Network Video Management System
Smart Client or Management Client. You define if a role
requires login authorization on the Info tab.
Cameras
Security right
Description
Full control
Enables the right to manage all security entries on this
part of the system.
Read
Enables the right to view camera devices in the clients.
View Live
Enables the right to view live video from cameras in the
clients.
layback
Enables the right to play back recorded video from
cameras in the clients.
Retrieve remote
recordings
Enables the right to retrieve edge recordings from
cameras or recordings from cameras on remote sites.
Management Client elements
170
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Security right
Description
Read sequences
Enables the right to read the sequence information
related to, for example, the Sequence explorer in the
clients.
Smart search
Enables the right to use the Smart search function in the
clients.
Export
Enables the right to export recordings from the clients.
Start manual
recording
Enables the right to start manual recording of video in
the clients.
Stop manual recording
Enables the right to stop manual recording of video in the
clients.
Enables the right to use auxillary (AUX) commands on
the camera from the clients.
AUX commands
AUX commands offer users the control of for example,
wipers on a camera connected via a video server.
Camera-associated devices connected via auxiliary
connections are controlled from the client.
Manual PTZ
Enables the right to use PTZ functions on PTZ cameras.
Activate PTZ presets
or patrolling profile
Manage PTZ presets
or patrolling profiles
Enables the right to move PTZ cameras to preset
positions, start and stop patrolling profiles, and pause a
patrolling.
To allow this role to use other PTZ functions on the
camera, enable the Manual PTZ right.
Enables the right to add, edit and delete PTZ presets and
patrolling profiles on PTZ cameras in the Management
Client.
To allow this role to use other PTZ functions on the
camera, enable the Manual PTZ right.
Microphones
Security right
Description
Full control
Enables the right to manage all security entries on this
part of the system.
Read
Enables the right to view microphone devices in the
clients.
Listen
Enables the right to listen to live audio from microphones
in the clients.
Playback
Enables the right to play back recorded audio from
microphones in the clients.
Management Client elements
171
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Security right
Description
Retrieve remote
recordings
Enables the right to retrieve edge recordings from
microphones or recordings from microphones on remote
sites.
Read sequences
Enables the right to read the sequence information
related to, for example, the Sequence explorer in the
clients.
Export
Enables the right to export recordings from the clients.
Start manual
recording
Enables the right to start manual recording of audio in
the clients.
Stop manual recording
Enables the right to stop manual recording of audio in the
clients.
Speakers
Security right
Description
Full control
Enables the right to manage all security entries on this
part of the system.
Read
Enables the right to view speaker devices in the clients.
Listen
Enables the right to listen to live audio from speakers in
the clients.
Speak
Enables the right to speak through the speakers in the
clients.
Playback
Enables the right to play back recorded audio from
speakers in the clients.
Retrieve remote
recordings
Enables the right to retrieve edge recordings from
speakers or recordings from speakers on remote sites.
Read sequences
Enables the right to use the Sequences feature while
browsing recorded audio from speakers in the clients.
Export
Enables the right to export recorded audio from speakers
in the clients.
Start manual
recording
Enables the right to start manual recording of audio in
the clients.
Stop manual recording
Enables the right to stop manual recording of audio in the
clients.
Management Client elements
172
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Metadata
Security right
Description
Full control
Enables the right to manage all security entries on this
part of the system.
Read
Enables the right to receive metadata in the clients.
Live
Enables the right to receive live metadata from cameras
in the clients.
Playback
Enables the right to play back recorded data from
metadata devices in the clients.
Retrieve remote
recordings
Enables the right to retrieve edge recordings from
metadata devices or recordings from metadata devices
on remote sites.
Read sequences
Enables the right to read the sequence information
related to, for example, the Sequence explorer in the
clients.
Export
Enables the right to export recordings in the clients.
Start manual
recording
Enables the right to start manual recording of metadata
in the clients.
Stop manual recording
Enables the right to stop manual recording of metadata in
the clients.
Input
Security right
Description
Read
Enables the right to view input devices in the clients.
Output
Security right
Description
Full control
Enables the right to manage all security entries on this
part of the system.
Read
Enables the right to view output devices in the clients.
Activate
Enables the right to activate outputs in the clients.
Management Client elements
173
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Smart Wall
Security right
Description
Full control
Enables the right to manage all security entries on this
part of the system.
Read
Enables the right to view Smart Walls in the clients.
Operate
Enables the right to operate Smart Walls, for example to
change presets or apply cameras on views in the clients.
Playback
Enables the right to play back recorded data from within
Smart Walls in the clients.
View Groups
Security right
Description
Full control
Enables the right to manage all security entries on this
part of the system.
Read
Enables the right to view the View Groups created in the
Management Client in the clients.
Delete
Enables the right to delete View Groups in the
Management Client.
Operate
Enables the right to use View Groups created in the
Management Client within the clients, that is to create
subgroups and views.
User-defined Events
Security right
Description
Full control
Enables the right to manage all security entries on this
part of the system.
Read
Enables the right to view user-defined events in the
Management Client and the clients.
Trigger
Enables the right to trigger user-defined events in the
clients.
Management Client elements
174
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Matrix
Security right
Description
Read
Enables the right to select and send video to the Matrix
recipient from the clients.
Network
Video
Manageme
nt System
Enterprise
Edition
SystemMonitors
Security right
Description
Full control
Enables the right to manage all security entries on this
part of the system.
Read
Enables the right to edit properties for System Monitors.
Edit
Enables the right to edit properties for System Monitors.
Network
Video
Manageme
nt System
Enterprise
Edition
Device tab (roles)
The Device tab lets you specify which features users/groups with the selected role can use for
each device (for example, a camera) or device group in Network Video Management System Smart
Client.
Remember to repeat for each device. You can also select a device group, and specify role rights for
all the devices in the group in one go.
You can still select or clear such square-filled check boxes, but note that your choice in that case
applies for all devices within the device group. Alternatively, select the individual devices in the
device group to verify exactly which devices the relevant right applies for.
Camera-related rights
Specify the following rights for camera devices:
Name
Description
Read
The selected camera(s) will be visible in the clients.
Management Client elements
175
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Name
Description
View live
Allows live viewing of video from the selected camera(s) in the
clients. For Network Video Management System Smart Client, it
requires that the role has been granted the right to view the
clients' Live tab. This right is granted as part of the application
rights. Specify the time profile or leave the default value.
Playback > Limit playback
to
Allows playback of recorded video from the selected camera(s) in
the clients. Specify a playback limit or apply no restrictions.
Read sequences
Allows reading the sequence information related to, for example,
the Sequence explorer in the clients.
Smart search
Allows the user to use the Smart search function in the clients.
Export
Allows the user to export recordings from the clients.
Start manual recording
Allows starting manual recording of video from the selected
camera(s) in the clients.
Stop manual recording
Allows stopping manual recording of video from the selected
camera(s) in the clients.
AUX commands
Allows the use of auxiliary commands from the clients.
Microphone-related rights
Specify the following rights for microphone devices:
Name
Description
Read
The selected microphone(s) will be visible in the clients.
Live > Listen
Allows listening to live audio from the selected microphones(s) in
the clients.
For Network Video Management System Smart Client, it requires
that the role has been granted the right to view the clients' Live
tab. This right is granted as part of the application rights. Specify
the time profile or leave the default value.
Playback > Limit playback
to
Allows playback of recorded audio from the selected
microphone(s) in the clients. Specify a playback limit or apply no
restrictions.
Read sequences
Allows reading the sequence information related to, for example,
the Sequence explorer in the clients.
Export
Allows the user to export recordings from the clients.
Start manual recording
Allows starting manual recording of audio from the selected
microphone(s) in the clients.
Stop manual recording
Allows stopping manual recording of audio from the selected
microphone(s) in the clients.
Management Client elements
176
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Speaker-related rights
Specify the following rights for speaker devices:
Name
Description
Read
The selected speaker(s) is visible in the clients.
Live > Listen
Allows listening to live audio from the selected speaker(s) in the
clients.
For Network Video Management System Smart Client, it requires
that the role has been granted the right to view the clients' Live
tab. This right is granted as part of the application rights. Specify
the time profile or leave the default value.
Playback > Limit playback
to
Allows playback of recorded audio from the selected speaker(s) in
the clients. Specify a playback limit or apply no restrictions.
Read sequences
Allows reading the sequence information related to, for example,
the Sequence explorer in the clients.
Export
Allows the user to export recordings from the clients.
Start manual recording
Allows starting manual recording of audio from the selected
speaker(s) in the clients.
Stop manual recording
Allows stopping manual recording of audio from the selected
speaker(s) in the clients.
Metadata-related rights
Specify the following rights for metadata devices:
Name
Description
Read
Enables the right to see metadata devices and retrieve data from
them in the clients.
Edit
Enables the right to edit metadate properties. It also allows users
to enable or disable metadata devices in the Management Client
and via the MIP SDK.
View Live
Enables the right to view metadata from cameras in the clients.
For Network Video Management System Smart Client, it requires
that the role has been granted the right to view the clients' Live
tab. This right is granted as part of the application rights.
Playback
Enables the right to play back recorded data from metadata
devices in the clients.
Read sequences
Enables the right to use the Sequences feature while browsing
recorded data from metadata devices in the clients.
Export
Enables the right to export recorded audio from metadata devices
in the clients.
Start manual recording
Enables the right to start manual recording of metadata in the
clients.
Management Client elements
177
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Name
Description
Stop manual recording
Enables the right to stop manual recording of metadata in the
clients.
Input-related rights
Specify the following rights for input devices:
Name
Description
Read
The selected input(s) will be visible in the clients as well as in
Network Video Management System Central, an add-on product
for providing complete overview of surveillance system status and
alarms.
Output-related rights
Specify the following rights for output devices:
Name
Description
Read
The selected output(s) will be visible in the clients. If visible, the
output will be selectable on a list in the clients.
Activate
The selected output(s) can be activated from the Management
Client and the clients. Specify the time profile or leave the default
value.
PTZ tab (roles)
You set up rights for pan-tilt-zoom (PTZ) cameras on the PTZ tab. You can specify the features
users/groups can use in the clients. You can select individual PTZ cameras or device groups
containing PTZ cameras.
Specify the following rights for PTZ:
Name
Description
Determines if the selected role can use PTZ functions and pause a
patrolling on the selected camera.
Manual PTZ
Management Client elements
Specify a time profile, select Always, or leave the default value
that follows the default time profile defined on the Info tab for
that role.
178
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Name
Description
Determines if the selected role can move the selected camera to
preset positions, start and stop patrolling profiles, and pause a
patrolling.
Activate PTZ presets or
patrolling profiles
Specify a time profile, select Always, or leave the default value
that follows the default time profile defined on the Info tab for
that role.
To allow this role to use other PTZ functions on the camera,
enable the Manual PTZ right.
Determines the priority of PTZ cameras. When several users on a
surveillance system want to control the same PTZ camera at the
same time, conflicts may occur.
PTZ Priority
Manage PTZ presets or
patrolling profiles
Lock/unlock PTZ presets
You can avoid such a situation by specifying a priority for use of
the selected PTZ camera(s) by users/groups with the selected
role. Specify a priority from 1 to 3, where 1 is the lowest priority.
The role with the highest priority number is the one who can
control the PTZ camera(s).
Determines the right to add, edit and delete PTZ presets and
patrolling profiles on the selected camera in both the
Management Client.
To allow this role to use other PTZ functions on the camera,
enable the Manual PTZ right.
Determines if the role can lock and unlock preset positions for the
selected camera.
Speech tab (roles)
Relevant only if you use speakers on your system. Specify the following rights for speakers:
Name
Description
Speak
Determine if users should be allowed to talk through the selected
speaker(s). Specify the time profile or leave the default value.
When several client users want to talk through the same speaker
at the same time, conflicts may occur.
Speak priority
Solve the problem by specifying a priority for use of the selected
speaker(s) by users/groups with the selected role. Specify a
priority from Very low to Very high. The role with the highest
priority is allowed use the speaker before other roles.
Should two users with the same role want to speak at the same
time, the first come, first served-principle applies.
Remote Recordings tab (roles)
Specify the following rights for remote recordings:
Management Client elements
179
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Name
Description
Retrieve remote recordings
Determines if users/groups with the selected role can retrieve
remote recordings.
Smart Wall tab (roles)
Through roles, you can grant your client users Smart Wall-related user rights for the Smart Wall
feature:
Name
Description
Read
Allows users to see Smart Walls in the clients.
Edit
Allows users to edit Smart Walls in the clients.
Delete
Allows users to delete Smart Walls in the clients.
Operate
Allows users to apply layouts on the selected monitor in the client
and to activate the selected preset.
External Event tab (roles)
Specify the following external event rights:
Name
Description
Read
Allows users to search for and view external system events in the
clients.
Edit
Allows users to edit external system events in the clients.
Delete
Allows users to delete external system events in the clients.
Trigger
Allows users to trigger external system events in the clients.
View Group tab (roles)
On the View Group tab, you specify which view groups the users and user groups with the
selected role can use in the clients.
Specify the following rights for view groups:
Name
Description
Read
Determine if the selected role can see the selected view group
(and any views contained in the view group) in the clients.
Edit
Determine if the selected role can make changes to the selected
view group (and any views contained in the view group) in the
clients.
Delete
Determine if the selected role can delete the selected view group
(and any views contained in the view group) in the clients.
Management Client elements
180
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Name
Description
Operate
Determine if the selected role can create subgroups and views in
the clients.
Matrix tab (roles)
If you have configured Matrix recipients on your system, you may configure Matrix role rights.
From a client, you can send video to selected Matrix recipients. Select the users who can receive
this on the Matrix tab.
The following rights are available:
Name
Description
Read
Determine if users and groups with the selected role can select
and send video to the Matrix recipient from the clients.
Alarms tab (roles)
If you use alarms in your system setup to provide central overview and control of your installation
(including any other Network Video Management System servers), you can use the Alarms tab to
specify the alarm rights users/groups with the selected role should have, for example, how to
handle alarms in the clients.
Specify the following rights for alarms:
Name
Description
Manage
Manage alarms, for example changing priorities of alarms and redelegate alarms to other users, acknowledge alarms and change
the state, for example from New to Assigned, of several alarms
at the same time.
View
View alarms and print alarm reports.
Disable alarms
Disable alarms.
MIP tab (roles)
Through the MIP Software Development Kit (SDK), a third-party vendor can develop custom plugins for your system, for example, integration to external access control systems or similar
functionality.
Which settings you change for your plug-in depend on the relevant plug-in. Find the custom
settings for the plug-ins on the MIP tab.
Management Client elements
181
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Basic users
About basic users
When you add a basic user to your system, you create a dedicated surveillance system user
account with basic user name and password authentication for the individual user. This is in
contrast to the Windows user, added through Active Directory.
When working with basic users, it is important to understand the difference between basic user and
Windows user.

Basic users are authenticated by a user name/password combination and are specific to
a system.

Windows users are authenticated based on their Windows login and are specific to a
machine.
Create basic users
To create a basic user on your system:
1. Expand Security > Basic Users.
2. In the Basic Users pane, right-click and select Create Basic User.
3. Specify a user name and a password, and repeat it to be sure you have specified it
correctly.
4. Click OK to create the basic user.
System dashboard
About system dashboard
System dashboard provides you with the functionality to monitor your system and its components.
Access the following functionality:
Name
Description
System Monitor
Monitor the status of your servers and cameras by parameters
you define.
System Monitor Thresholds
Set threshold values for monitored parameters on server and
monitor tiles used in System Monitor.
Current Task
Get an overview of ongoing tasks on a selected recording server.
Configuration Reports
Decide what to include in your system configuration reports
before printing.
Management Client elements
182
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
About system monitor
System monitor provides you with a quick, visual overview of the current state of your system's
servers and cameras through colored tiles that represent the system hardware. By default, the
system displays tiles that represent all Recording servers, All servers and All cameras.
The color of the tiles:
Tile color
Description
Green
Normal state. Everything is running normally.
Yellow
Warning state. One or more monitoring parameters is above the
threshold value (see "About system monitor thresholds" on page
185) for the Normal state.
Red
Critical state. One or more monitoring parameters is above the
threshold value for the Normal and Warning state.
You can customize the server and camera tiles if you want to display more or less tiles on the
dashboard. For example, you can set up tiles to represent a single server, a single camera, a group
of cameras, or a server group. You can also delete a tile if you do not want to use it or edit its
monitoring parameters. Monitoring parameters are, for example, CPU usage or memory available
for a server. If you remove these parameters from the server tile, the tile does not monitor the
these parameters on the relevant tile. Click Customize in the upper right corner of the tab to open
the Customize dashboard window. See Customize dashboard (on page 183) for more information.
Tiles change their state and thereby color based on threshold values set in System monitor
thresholds. While the system does set some default threshold values for you, you can decide for
yourself what the threshold value should be for each of the three states. To set up or change
threshold values, you can use System monitor thresholds. See About system monitor thresholds
(on page 185).
If a tile changes color and you want to know which server/parameter that makes the tile change
color, click the tile. This opens an overview in the bottom of the screen which shows the colors red,
yellow or green for each monitoring parameter you have enabled for your tile. Click the Details
button to get more detailed information about why the state has changed.
If you see a warning sign on a tile, a data collector for one of your monitored servers or cameras
may not be running. If you place your mouse above the tile, the system shows you when it last
collected data for the relevant tile.
Customize dashboard
Add a new camera or server tile
1. In the System monitor window, click Customize.
2. In the Customize dashboard window that opens, click New under Server tiles or
Camera tiles.
3. In the New server tile/New camera tile window, select the cameras or servers to
monitor.
Management Client elements
183
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
4. Under Monitoring parameters, select or clear check boxes for any parameters to add or
remove from the relevant tile.
5. Click OK. The new server or camera tile is now added to the tiles displayed on your
dashboard.
Edit monitoring parameters
1. In the System monitor dashboard window, click Customize.
2. In the Customize dashboard window that opens, click Edit under Server tiles or
Camera tiles.
3. In the Edit server tile or Edit camera tile window, select the server component or
cameras you want to edit.
4. In the Monitoring parameters box, select or clear the check boxes for the monitoring
parameters you want to add or remove from the relevant tile.
5. Click OK. The changed monitoring parameters are now a part of or removed from the
relevant tile.
You can enable and disable historical data on the system if you want to. If you disable this data,
you cannot see graphs of previous system behavior. If you want to reduce the load on the SQL
server database or on your bandwidth, you can reduce the sampling interval of historical data. If
you reduce the sampling interval of historical data, less details are available in graphs.
About system monitor details
If you click a server or camera tile, you can see the status of each selected monitoring parameter
below the dashboard.
Example: A camera's LIVE FPS monitoring parameters has reached the Warning state.
The State field shows the camera's state. For example, a red warning is shown if the connection to
the device is broken. The icon includes a tool tip with a short description of the issue that is causing
the warning.
The Used space field shows data from other recording servers where this device has recordings if,
for example, the device has been located on other recording servers previously.
If you click the Details button for the relevant camera/server, you can view system information
and create reports regarding:
Component
Description
Management server
Shows data from the selected management server
Management Client elements
184
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Component
Description
Shows data from the selected recording server. You can view
these per:
Recording server(s)

Disk

Storage

Network

Camera
Additional servers
Shows data on log server, event servers and more.
Cameras
Shows data from any camera in any camera group in your setup.
Each of these elements is an area you can click and expand. When you click this area, it provides
relevant dynamic data on this server or camera.
The Cameras bar contains a list of camera groups to select from. Once you select a group, select a
specific camera and see dynamic data for it. All servers display CPU usage and available memory
information. Recording servers also display connection status information. Within each view, find a
History link. Click it to view historic data and reports (to view reports on a camera, click the name
of the camera). For each historic report, you can view data for the last 24 hours, 7 days or 30
days. To save and/or print reports, click the Send to PDF icon. Use the < and home icons to
navigate System Monitor.
You can only create historical reports with data from the recording server where the device is
currently located.
Important: If you access the system monitor's details from a server operating system, you may
experience a message regarding Internet Explorer Enhanced Security Configuration. Follow
the instructions in the message to add the System Monitor page to the Trusted sites zone
before proceeding.
About system monitor thresholds
System monitor thresholds allow you to set up and adjust the global thresholds for when tiles on
System monitor should visually indicate that your system hardware changes state, for example
when the CPU usage of a server changes from a normal state (green) state to a warning state
(yellow).
The system is set up with default threshold values so that you can start monitoring your system
hardware from the moment your system is set up. You can change these values if you want to (see
"Set system monitor thresholds" on page 187).
As a default, the system is set up to show threshold values for all units of a particular hardware, for
example all cameras or servers. You can also set up threshold values for individual servers or
cameras or a subset of these. Setting threshold values for individual servers or cameras may be a
good idea if, for example, some cameras should be allowed to use a higher Live FPS or Recording
FPS that other cameras.
You can set the threshold values for servers, cameras, disks and storage. If you want to change
threshold values, you can use the threshold control slider. The threshold control slider allows you
to increase or decrease threshold values by dragging the handles separating states either up or
Management Client elements
185
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
down. The threshold control slider is divided into colors similar to those shown in your server or
camera tiles present in System monitor (see "About system monitor" on page 183).
To ensure that you do not see a Critical or Warning state in cases where the usage of or the load
on your system hardware reaches a high threshold value only for a second or similar, use the
Calculation interval. The Calculation interval averages out the effect of brief or frequent
changes to a system hardware state. In practice, this means that the Calculation interval evens
out the effect of hardware changes over time so that you do not get alerts every time a threshold
is exceeded.
For example, you can set the Calculation interval to one (1) minute which ensures that you only
get alerts if the average value for the whole minute exceeds the threshold. The benefit of this is
that you avoid alerts about frequent and maybe possibly irrelevant changes in hardware states and
only receive alerts that reflect sustained issues with, for example, CPU usage or memory
consumption.
Server thresholds
Threshold
Description
Unit
Memory
Thresholds for RAM memory in use on the
servers you monitor.
MB
CPU Usage
Thresholds for the CPU usage on the servers you
%
monitor.
Camera thresholds
Threshold
Description
Unit
Used space
Thresholds for the space used by cameras you
monitor.
GB
Recording FPS
Thresholds for cameras' FPS in use when the
system is recording video on cameras you
monitor.
%
Live FPS
Thresholds for cameras' FPS in use when live
video is shown on cameras you monitor.
%
Threshold
Description
Unit
Free space
Thresholds for available space on disks you
monitor.
GB
Disk thresholds
Storage thresholds
Threshold
Description
Retention time
Threshold showing a prediction for when you run
out of space on your storage. The state shown is
Days
based on your system setup and is updated
twice a day.
Management Client elements
Unit
186
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
You can also set up rules (see "About rules" on page 142) to perform specific actions or activate
alarms (see "About alarms" on page 193) when a threshold changes from one state to another.
Set system monitor thresholds
1. Select the Enable check box for the relevant system hardware if you have not already
enabled it
2. Drag the threshold control slider up or down to increase or decrease the threshold value.
There are two sliders available for each piece of system hardware shown in the threshold
control, separating the Normal, Warning and Critical levels.
3. Once you have set the relevant thresholds levels, select File > Save from the menu.
An example of how a threshold control slider could be set. Drag the sliders up and down to
increase or decrease any of the three threshold levels. Red indicates you have reached a Critical
state, Yellow is a Warning state indicating that you are close to reaching the Critical state and
Green indicates that things are at a normal state and within your selected threshold values.
About current tasks
Current Tasks show an overview of tasks under a selected recording server, their begin time,
estimated end time and progress. All information shown in Current Tasks are snapshots. You can
refresh these by clicking on the Refresh button in the lower right corner of the Properties pane.
About configuration reports
When you create PDF configuration reports, you can include any possible elements of your system
in the report. You can, for example, include licenses, device configuration, alarm configuration, and
much more. You can also customize your font and page setup and include a customized front page.
Add a configuration report
1. Expand System Dashboard and click Configuration Reports. This brings up the report
configuration page.
2. Select the elements that you want to include in your report.
3. Optional: Click Front Page to customize your front page. In the window that appears, fill
in the needed info. Select Front page as an element to include in you report, otherwise
the front page you customize is not included in your report.
Management Client elements
187
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
4. Click Formatting to customize your font, page size and margins. In the window that
appears, select the wanted settings.
5. When you are ready to export, click Export and select a name and save location for you
report.
Configure report details
The following is available when setting up reports:
Name
Description
Select All
Selects all elements in the list.
Clear All
Clears all elements in the list.
Front Page
Customize the front page of the report.
Formatting
Format the report.
Export
Select a save location for the report and create a PDF.
Server logs
About logs
You can view and export contents from different logs related to the system. The purpose of the
logs is to document activity, events, actions and errors in the system, for later analysis or
documentation.
The logs have different purposes:
Name
Description
System log
Logs system-related information.
Audit log
Logs user activity.
Rule log
Logs rules in which users have specified the Make new log entry
action.
Your system has a number of default settings related to the different logs. To change the settings,
see Server Logs tab (see "Server Logs tab (options)" on page 200) under Options.
You can view logs in a number of different languages and export logs as tab delimited text (.txt)
files.
Management Client elements
188
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
If a log contains more than one page of information, you can navigate between the log pages by
clicking the buttons in the bottom right corner of the log pane:
In the lower left corner, jump to a specific date and time in the log:
Search logs
To search a log, use Search criteria in the top part of the log pane:
1. Specify your search criteria from the lists.
2. Click Refresh to make the log page reflect your search criteria. To clear your search
criteria, and return to viewing all of the log's content, click Clear.
You can double-click any row to have all details presented in a Log Details window. In this way
you can also read the log entries that contain more text than can be displayed in a single line.
Export logs
You can export logs as tab delimited text (.txt) files. You can customize the log content by
specifying which log, log elements, and time range to include in the export. For example, you can
specify to include only the System Log error-related log entries from between January 2nd 2016
08:00:00 and January 6th 2014 07:59:59 in your export.
To export a log:
1. In the Export Log window's Filename field, specify a name for the exported log file.
By default, exported log files are saved in your My Documents folder. However, you can
specify a different location by clicking the browse button
next to the field.
2. Any criteria you have selected to target the content of the exported log is listed in the
Filters field. You cannot edit this field. If you need to change your criteria, close the
window, and repeat steps 1-2.
3. Specify the time period you want the export to cover. Specify the Start date and time
and End date and time fields respectively. You can select the date by clicking the arrow:
To specify an exact time, overwrite the required time elements (hours:minutes:seconds)
with the needed values. In this example, the hours element is being overwritten:
4. Click Export to export the log content.
Management Client elements
189
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Change log language
1. At the bottom part of the log pane, in the Show log in list, select the wanted language.
2. The log is displayed in the selected language. Next time your open the log, it is reset to the
default language.
System log (properties)
Each row in a log represents a log entry. A log entry contains a number of information fields:
Name
Description
Displays an icon that indicates the level of the log entry:
Level
- indicates info
- indicates warning
- indicates error
'blank' - indicates an undefined entry.
UTC Time
Timestamped in coordinated universal time (UTC).
Local Time
Timestamped in the local time of your system's server.
ID
The identification number for the logged incident.
Source Type
The type of equipment on which the logged incident occurred, for
example, server or device.
Source Name
Management server, the name of the recording server or device
on which the logged incident occurred.
Event Type
The type of event represented by the logged incident.
Description
Shows a description of the logged incident.
Audit log (properties)
Each row in a log represents a log entry. A log entry contains a number of information fields:
Name
Description
Displays an icon that indicates the level of the log entry:
Level
- indicates info
- indicates warning
- indicates error
'blank' - indicates an undefined entry.
UTC Time
Timestamped in coordinated universal time (UTC).
Local Time
Timestamped in the local time of your system's server.
ID
The identification number for the logged incident.
Management Client elements
190
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Name
Description
User
The user name of the remote user causing the logged incident.
User Location
The IP address or host name of the computer from which the
remote user caused the logged incident.
Permission
The information about whether the remote user action was
allowed (granted) or not.
Category
The type of logged incident.
Resource Type
The type of equipment on which the logged incident occurred, for
example, server or device.
Resource Name
Management server, or the name of the recording server or
device on which the logged incident occurred.
The name of the recording server that hosts a device or a storage
on which the logged incident occurred.
Resource Host
The name of the management server that hosts the recording
server or the management server on which the logged incident
occurred.
Description
Shows a description of the logged incident.
Rule log (properties)
Each row in a log represents a log entry. A log entry contains a number of information fields:
Name
Description
Displays an icon that indicates the level of the log entry:
Level
- indicates info
- indicates warning
- indicates error
'blank' - indicates an undefined entry.
UTC Time
Timestamped in coordinated universal time (UTC).
Local Time
Timestamped in the local time of your system's server.
ID
The identification number for the logged incident.
Service Name
The name of the service on which the logged incident occurred.
Rule Name
The name of the rule triggering the log entry.
Source Type
The type of equipment on which the logged incident occurred, for
example, server or device.
Source Name
Management server, the name of the recording server or device
on which the logged incident occurred.
Event Type
The type of event represented by the logged incident.
Management Client elements
191
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Name
Description
Generator Type
The type pf equipment on which the logged incident was
triggered. Log entries are administrator-defined and relate to
incidents in your system.
Generator Name
The name of the equipment on which the logged incident was
generated.
Description
Shows a description of the logged incident.
Alarms
About alarm configuration
Alarm configuration includes:

Dynamic role-based setup of alarm handling

Central technical overview of all components: servers, cameras, and external units

Setup of central logging of all incoming alarms and system information

Handling of plug-ins, allowing customized integration of other systems, for example
external access control or VCA-based systems.
In general, alarms are controlled by the visibility of the object causing the alarm. This means that
four possible aspects can play a role with regards to alarms and who can control/manage them and
to what degree:
Name
Description
Source/device visibility
If the device causing the alarm is not set to be visible to the
user's role, the user cannot see the alarm in the alarm list in
Network Video Management System Smart Client.
The right to trigger userdefined events
This right determines if the user's role can trigger selected userdefined events in Network Video Management System Smart
Client.
External plug-ins
If any external plug-ins are set up in your system, these might
control users rights to handle alarms.
General role rights
Determine whether the user is allowed to only view or also to
manage alarms.
What a user of Alarms can do with alarms depends on the user's
role and on settings configured for that particular role.
On the Event Server tab in Options, you can specify settings for alarms, events and logs.
Management Client elements
192
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
About alarms
Important: This feature does not work if you do not have the Network Video Management System
Event Server installed.
Based on functionality handled in the event server, the alarms feature provides central overview,
control and scalability of alarms in any number of installations (including any other Network Video
Management Systems) throughout your organization. You can configure it to generate alarms
based on either:

Internal system related events
For example, motion, server responding/not responding, archiving problems, lack of disk
space and more.

External integrated events
This group can consist of several types of external events:

Analytics events
Typically data received from an external third-party video content analysis (VCA)
providers.

MIP plug-in events
Through the MIP Software Development Kit (SDK) a third party vendor can develop
custom plug-ins (for example, integration to external access control systems or similar)
to your system.
Legend:
1.
Surveillance system
2.
Management Client
3.
Network Video Management System Smart Client
4.
Alarm configuration
5.
Alarm data flow
Management Client elements
193
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
You handle and delegate alarms in the alarm list in Network Video Management System Smart
Client. You can also integrate alarms with the Network Video Management System Smart Client's
map functionality.
Alarm Definitions
When your system registers an event on your system, you can configure the system to generate an
alarm in Network Video Management System Smart Client. You must define alarms before you can
use them, and alarms are defined based on events registered in your system servers. You can also
use user-defined events for triggering alarms and use the same event to trigger several different
alarms.
Add an alarm
To define an alarm, you need to create an alarm definition, where you specify, for example, what
triggers the alarm, instructions on what the operator needs to do, and what or when the alarm
stops. For detailed information about the settings, see Alarm Definitions (properties) (on page
195).
1. In the Site Navigation pane, expand Alarms, and right-click Alarm Definitions.
2. Select Add New.
3. Fill in these properties:

Name: Type a name for the alarm definition. The name of the alarm definition
appears whenever the alarm definition is listed.

Instructions: You can write instructions for the operator who receives the alarm.

Triggering event: Use the drop-down menus to select an event type and an event
message to be used when the alarm is triggered.
A list of selectable triggering events. The one highlighted is created and customized
using analytics events.

Sources: Select the cameras or other devices that the event should originate from
to trigger the alarm. Your options depend on the type of event you have selected.

Time profile: If you want the alarm to be activated during a specific time interval,
select the radio button and then a time profile in the drop-down menu.

Event based: If you want the alarm to be activated by an event, select the radio
button and specify which event will start the alarm. You also need to specify the
event that will stop the alarm.
4. In the Time limit drop-down menu, specify a time limit for when action is required by the
operator.
Management Client elements
194
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
5. In the Events triggered drop-down menu, specify which event to trigger when the time
limit has passed.
6. Specify additional settings, for example related cameras and initial alarm owner.
Alarm Definitions (properties)
The table describes the settings you can make when you create an alarm definition.
Alarm definition settings:
Enable
By default, the alarm definition is enabled. To disable it, clear the
check box.
Name
Alarm names do not have to be unique, but using unique and
descriptive alarm names are advantageous in many situations.
Instructions
Type a descriptive text about the alarm and how to resolve the
issue that caused the alarm.
The text appears in Network Video Management System Smart
Client when the user handles the alarm.
Select the event message to use when the alarm is triggered.
Choose from two drop-downs:

The first drop-down: Select the type of event, for example
analytics event and system events.

The second drop-down: Select the specific event message to
use. The messages available are determined by the event
type you selected in the first drop-down menu.
Triggering event
Sources
Specify the sources that the events originate from. Aside from
cameras or other devices, sources may also be plug-in defined
sources, for example VCA and MIP. The options depend on the
type of event you have selected.
Alarm trigger:
Time profile
Select the Time profile radio button to specify the time interval
during which the alarm definition is active. Only the time profile
you have defined under the Rules and Events node are
displayed in the list. If none are defined, only the Always option
is available.
Event based
If you want the alarm to be based on an event, select this radio
button. Once selected, specify the start and stop event. You can
select hardware events defined on cameras, video servers and
input (see "Events overview" on page 137). Also global/manual
event definitions can be used (see "About user-defined events" on
page 154).
Management Client elements
195
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Operator action required:
Time limit
Select a time limit for when operator action is required. The
default value is 1 minute. The time limit is not active before you
have attached an event in the Events triggered drop-down
menu.
Events triggered
Select which event to trigger when the time limit has passed.
Additional settings:
Related cameras
Select up to 15 cameras to include in the alarm definition, even if
these cameras themselves do not trigger the alarm. This can be
relevant, for example, if you have selected an external event
message (such as a door being opened) as the source of your
alarm. By defining one or more cameras near the door, you can
attach the cameras' recordings of the incident to the alarm.
Related map
Assign a map to the alarm when it is listed in the Network Video
Management System Smart Client's Alarm Manager.
Initial alarm owner
Select a default user responsible for the alarm.
Initial alarm priority
Select a priority (High, Medium, Low or none) for the alarm.
Use these priorities in Network Video Management System Smart
Client to determine the importance of an alarm.
Initial alarm category
Select an alarm category for the alarm, for example False alarm
or Need investigation.
Events triggered by alarm
Define an event that the alarm can trigger in Network Video
Management System Smart Client.
Auto-close alarm
If you want a particular event to automatically stop the alarm,
select this check box. Not all events can trigger alarms. Clear the
check box to disable the new alarm from the beginning.
See also
Add an alarm (on page 194)
Alarm Data Settings
When you configure alarm data settings, specify the following:
Alarm Data Levels tab
Priorities
Level
Add new priorities with level numbers of your choosing or
use/edit the default priority levels (numbers 1, 2 or 3). These
priority levels are used to configure the Initial alarm priority
setting.
Name
Type a name for the entity. You can create as many as you like.
Management Client elements
196
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Sound
Select the sound to be associated with the alarm. Use one if the
default sounds or add more in Sound Settings.
States
Level
In addition to the default state levels (numbers 1, 4, 9 and 11,
which can not be edited or reused), add new states with level
numbers of your choosing. These state levels are only visible in
the Network Video Management System Smart Client's Alarm
List.
Categories
Level
Add new categories with level numbers of your choosing. These
category levels are used to configure the Initial alarm category
setting.
Name
Type a name for the entity. You can create as many as you like.
Alarm List Configuration tab
Available columns
Use > to select which columns should be available in the Network
Video Management System Smart Client's Alarm List. Use < to
clear selection. When done, Selected columns should contain
the items to be included.
Reasons for Closing tab
Enable
Select to enable that all alarms must be assigned a reason for
closing before they can be closed.
Reason
Add reasons for closing that the user can choose between when
closing alarms. Examples could be Solved-Trespasser or False
Alarm. You can create as many as you like.
Sound Settings
When you configure sound settings, specify the following:
Select the sound to associate with the alarm. The list of sounds
contain a number of default Windows sounds. You cannot edit
these. However, you can add new sounds of the file type .wav,
but only if these are encoded in Pulse Code Modulation (PCM).
Sounds
Management Client elements
Even if the default sounds are standard Windows sound-files,
local Windows settings might cause these to sound different on
different machines. Some users might also have deleted one or
more of these sound-files and can therefore not play them. To
ensure an identical sound all over, you should import and use
your own .wav files encoded in PCM.
197
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Add
Add sounds. Browse to the sound to upload one or several .wav
files.
Remove
Remove a selected sound from the list of manually added sounds.
Default sounds cannot be removed.
Test
Test the sound. In the list, select the sound. The sound plays
once.
Options dialog box
In the Options dialog box, you can specify a number of settings related to the general appearance
and functionality of the system.
To access the dialog box, select Tools > Options.
The Options dialog box features the following tabs:

General tab (see "General tab (options)" on page 199)

Server Logs tab (see "Server Logs tab (options)" on page 200)

Mail Server tab (see "Mail Server tab (options)" on page 201)

AVI Generation tab (see "AVI Generation tab (options)" on page 202)
Management Client elements
198
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual

Network tab (see "Network tab (options)" on page 202)

User Settings tab (see "User Settings tab (options)" on page 203)

Analytics Events tab (see "Analytics Events tab (options)" on page 203)

Event Server tab (see "Event Server tab (options)" on page 203)

Generic Events tab (see "Generic Events tab (options)" on page 204)
General tab (options)
On the General tab, you can specify general settings for the Management Client and the recording
server.
Management Client
Name
Description
Number of log rows per
page
Select how many rows a single log page can contain. The default
value is 50 rows. If a log contains more rows, it displays the next
rows on the following pages.
Select frame rate for the thumbnail camera images displayed in
the Preview pane. Default is 1 frame per second.
Select Action > Refresh from the menu for the change to take
effect.
Default preview frame rate
Note that a high frame rate in combination with a large number
of thumbnail images in the Preview pane slows down the
computer that runs the Management Client. You can limit the
number of thumbnail images with the Max number of previews
setting.
Select the maximum number of thumbnail images displayed in
the Preview pane. Default is 64 thumbnail images.
Max number of previews
Select Action > Refresh from the menu for the change to take
effect.
Note that a large number of thumbnail images in combination
with a high frame rate may slow the system down. You can limit
the frame rate used for the thumbnail images with the Default
preview frame rate setting.
When adding new camera
devices automatically
enable:
Motion detection
Management Client elements
Select the check box to enable motion detection on new cameras,
when you add them to the system with the Add Hardware
wizard.
This setting does not affect motion detection settings on existing
cameras.
You enable and disable motion detection for a camera on the
Motion tab for the camera device.
199
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Name
Description
Generation of motion data for smart search requires that motion
detection is enabled for the camera.
When adding new camera
devices automatically
enable:
Select the check box to enable generation of smart search motion
data on new cameras, when you add them to the system with the
Add Hardware wizard.
Generate motion data for
smart search
This setting does not affect motion detection settings on existing
cameras.
You enable and disable the generation of smart search motion
data for a camera on the Motion tab for the camera device.
When adding new camera
devices automatically
enable:
Multicast
Language
Select the check box to enable multicast on new cameras when
you add them with the Add Hardware wizard.
This setting does not affect multicast settings on existing
cameras.
You enable and disable live multicasting for a camera on the
Client tab for the camera device.
Select the language of the Management Client.
Restart the Management Client to use the new language.
Recording server
Name
Description
Timeout for PTZ sessions
Client users with the necessary user rights can manually interrupt
the patrolling of PTZ cameras. Select how much time should pass
before regular patrolling is resumed after a manual interruption.
The setting applies for all PTZ cameras on your system.
Client users with a sufficient PTZ priority can pause patrolling on
PTZ cameras. Select how much time should pass before regular
Timeout for pause patrolling patrolling is resumed after a pause. The setting applies for all PTZ
cameras on your system. Default setting is 10 minutes.
sessions
If you want individual timeouts on the cameras, you specify this
on the Presets tab for the camera.
Ignore device
communication errors if
communication
reestablished before
Select for how long a communication error may exist before the
system logs it as an error and triggers the Communication
Error event.
Server Logs tab (options)
On the Server Logs tab, you can specify settings for the system’s management server logs.
See also About logs (on page 188) for more information.
Management Client elements
200
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Name
Description
Select the log that you want to configure:
Logs

System Log

Audit Log

Rule Log
Disable/enable the logs and specify the retention period and the
maximum number of rows for each log.
For System logs, specify the level of messages you want to log:
Settings

All - includes undefined messages

Information, warnings and errors

Warnings and errors

Errors (default setting)
For Audit logs, enable user access logging if you want the system
to log all user actions in Network Video Management System
Smart Client. These are, for example, exports, activating outputs,
viewing cameras live or in playback.
Specify:

the length of a playback sequence. This means that as long as
the user plays back within this period, the system only
generates one log entry. When playing back outside the
period, the system creates a new log entry.

the number of records (frames) a user has seen before the
system creates a log entry.
Mail Server tab (options)
On the Mail Server tab, you can specify the settings for your system's outgoing SMTP mail server.
See also About notification profiles (on page 151).
Name
Description
Sender e-mail address
Type the e-mail address you want to appear as the sender of email notifications for all notification profiles. Example:
[email protected]
Outgoing mail (SMTP)
server name
Type the name of the SMTP mail server that sends e-mail
notifications. Example: mailserver.organization.org.
Server requires login
Specify a user name and password for the users to log into the
mail server.
Management Client elements
201
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
AVI Generation tab (options)
On the AVI Generation tab, you can specify compression settings for the generation of AVI video
clip files. The settings are required if you want to include AVI files in e-mail notifications sent by
rule-triggered notification profiles.
See also Use rules to trigger email notifications (on page 152).
Name
Description
Compressor
Select the codec (compression/decompression technology) that
you want to apply. To have more codecs available in the list,
install them on the management server.
Not all cameras support all codecs.
(Not available for all codecs). Use the slider to select the degree
of compression (0-100) to be performed by the codec.
Compression quality
0 means no compression, generally resulting in high image
quality and large file size. 100 means maximum compression,
generally resulting in low image quality and small file size.
If the slider is not available, the compression quality is
determined entirely by the selected codec.
(Not available for all codecs). If you want to use keyframes,
select the check box and specify the required number of frames
between keyframes.
Keyframe every
A keyframe is a single frame stored at specified intervals. The
keyframe contains the entire view of the camera, whereas the
following frames contain only the pixels that change. This helps
greatly reduce the size of files.
If the check box is not available, or not selected, every frame
contains the entire view of the camera.
(Not available for all codecs). If you want to use a particular data
rate, select the check box and specify the number of kilobytes per
second.
Data rate
The data rate specifies the size of the attached AVI file.
If the check box is not available, or not selected, the data rate is
determined by the selected codec.
Network tab (options)
On the Network tab, you can specify the IP addresses of the local clients, if the clients are to
connect to the recording server via the Internet. The surveillance system then recognizes them as
coming from the local network.
You can also specify the IP version of the system: IPv4 or IPv6. Default value is IPv4.
Management Client elements
202
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
User Settings tab (options)
On the User Settings tab, you can specify user preference settings, for example, if a message
should be shown when remote recording is enabled.
Analytics Events tab (options)
On the Analytics Events tab, you can enable and specify the analytics events feature.
Name
Description
Enable
Specify if you want to use analytics events. As default, the
feature is disabled.
Specify the port used by this feature. The default port is 9090.
Port
Make sure that relevant VCA tool providers also use this port
number. If you change the port number, remember to change the
port number of the providers.
Specify if events from all IP addresses/hostnames are allowed, or
All network addresses or
only events from IP addresses/hostnames that are specified in
Specified network addresses
the Address list (see below).
Specify a list of trusted IP addresses/hostnames. The list filters
incoming data so that only events from certain IP
addresses/hostnames are allowed. You can use both Domain
Name System (DNS), IPv4 and IPv6 address formats.
Address list
You can add addresses to your list by manually entering each IP
address or hostname, or by importing an external list of
addresses.

Manual entering: Type the IP address/hostname in the
address list. Repeat for each required address.

Import: Click Import to browse for the external list of
addresses. The external list must be a .txt file and each IP
address or hostname must be on a separate line.
Event Server tab (options)
On the Event Server tab, you can specify settings for alarms, events and logs.
Name
Description
Keep closed alarms for
Select the number of days to keep closed alarms. Closed alarms
are in the states Closed, Ignore, and Reject.
Management Client elements
203
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Name
Description
Select the number of days to keep all other alarms than alarms in
the states Closed, Ignore, and Reject.
Keep all other alarms for
Important: Alarms always have timestamps. If the alarm is
triggered by a camera, the timestamp has an image from the
time of the alarm. The alarm information itself is stored on the
event server, while the video recordings corresponding to the
attached image are stored on the relevant surveillance system
server.
To be able to see the images of your alarms, keep video
recordings for at least as long as you intend to keep alarms on
the event server.
Keep events for
Specify the number of days for which to keep events.
Keep logs for
Specify the number of days for which to keep the Alarms log. You
can define any number up to 99.999 days, server space
permitting. You can use the value 0 to keep closed alarms
indefinitely, server space permitting.
Log server communication
Select the check box if you want to save a separate log of server
communication in addition to the regular log, for the number of
days specified.
Generic Events tab (options)
On the Generic Events tab, you can specify generic events and data source related settings.
For more information about how to configure actual generic events, see About generic events (on
page 158).
Name
Description
You can choose between two default data sources and define a
custom data source. What to choose depends on your third party
program and/or the hard- or software you want to interface from:
Compatible: Factory default settings are enabled, echoes all
bytes, TCP and UDP, Ipv4 only, port 1234, no separator, local
host only, current code page encoding (ANSI).
Data source
International: Factory default settings are enabled, echoes
statistics only, TCP only, Ipv4+6, port 1235, <CR><LF> as
separator, local host only, UTF-8 encoding. (<CR><LF> =
13,10).
[Data source A]
[Data source B]
and so on.
New
Click to define a new data source.
Name
Name of the data source.
Management Client elements
204
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Name
Description
Enabled
Data sources are by default enabled. Clear the check box to
disable the data source.
Reset
Click to reset all settings for the selected data source. The
entered name in the Name field remains.
Port
The port number of the data source.
Protocols which the system should listen for, and analyze, in
order to detect generic events:
Any: TCP as well as UDP.
Protocol type selector
TCP: TCP only.
UDP: UDP only.
TCP and UDP packages used for generic events may contain
special characters, such as @, #, +, ~, and more.
IP type selector
Selectable IP address types: IPv4, IPv6 or both.
Separator bytes
Select the separator bytes used to separate individual generic
event records. Default for data source type International (see
Data sources earlier) is 13,10. (13,10 = <CR><IF>).
Available echo return formats:

Echo statistics: Echoes the following format:
[X],[Y],[Z],[Name of generic event]
[X] = request number.
[Y] = number of characters.
Echo type selector
[Z] = number of matches with a generic event.
[Name of generic event] = name entered in the Name:
field.

Echo all bytes: Echoes all bytes.

No echo: Suppresses all echoing.
Encoding type selector
By default, the list only shows the most relevant options. Select
the Show all check box to display all available encodings.
Allowed external IPv4
addresses
Specify the IP addresses, that the management server must be
able to communicate with in order to manage external events.
You can also use this to exclude IP addresses that you do not
want data from.
Allowed external IPv6
addresses
Specify the IP addresses, that the management server must be
able to communicate with in order to manage external events.
You can also use this to exclude IP addresses that you do not
want data from.
Management Client elements
205
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Feature configuration
Failover management servers
About multiple management servers (clustering)
The management server can be installed on multiple servers within a cluster of servers. This
ensures that the system has very little down-time. If a server in the cluster fails, another server in
the cluster automatically takes over the failed server's job running the management server. The
automatic process of switching over the server service to run on another server in the cluster only
takes a very short time (up to 30 seconds).
It is only possible to have one active management server per surveillance setup, but other
management servers may be set up to take over in case of failure.
The allowed number of failovers is limited to two within a six hour period. If exceeded,
Management Server services are not automatically started by the clustering service. The number of
allowed failovers can be changed to better fit your needs. See Microsoft®'s homepage
http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc787861%28WS.10%29.aspx for more information.
Prerequisites for clustering

Two or more servers installed in a cluster:
- Regarding clusters in Microsoft Windows 2008®, see Failover clusters
http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc732488(WS.10).aspx.

Either an external SQL database installed outside the server cluster or an internal SQL
(clustered) service within the server cluster (creating an internal SQL service requires the
use of SQL Server Standard or a greater version which is capable of working as a clustered
SQL Server).

A Microsoft® Windows® Server (Enterprise or Data Center edition).
Install in a cluster
Descriptions and illustrations might differ from what your see on your screen.
Installation and change of URL address:
1. Install the management server and all its subcomponents on the first server in the cluster.
The management server must be installed with a specific user and not as a network
service. This requires that you use the Custom install option. Also, the specific user must
have access to the shared network drive and preferably a non-expiry password.
2. After you have installed the management server and the Management Client on the first
server in the cluster, open the Management Client, and from the Tools menu, select
Registered Services.
Feature configuration
206
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
a) In the Add/Remove Registered Services window, select Log Service in the list, click
Edit.
b) In the Edit Registered Service window, change the URL address of the log service to
the URL address of the cluster.
c) Repeat steps a and b for all services listed in the Add/Remove Registered Services
window. Click Network.
d) In the Network Configuration window, change the URL address of the server to the
URL address of the cluster. (This step only applies to the first server in the cluster.)
Click OK.
3. In the Add/Remove Registered Services window, click Close. Exit the Management
Client.
4. Stop the management server service and the IIS. Read about how to stop the IIS at
Microsoft's® homepage http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc732317(WS.10).aspx.
5. Repeat steps 1-4 for all subsequent servers in the cluster, this time pointing to the existing
SQL database. However, for the last server in the cluster on which you install the
management server, do not stop the Management Server service.
Next, in order to take effect, the Management Server service must be configured as a
generic service in the failover cluster:
1. On the last server on which you have installed the management server, go to Start >
Administrative Tools, open Windows' Failover Cluster Management. In the Failover
Cluster Management window, expand your cluster, right-click Services and
Applications, and select Configure a Service or Application.
Feature configuration
207
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
2. In the High Availability dialog box click Next, select Generic Service and click Next. Do
not specify anything on the third page of the dialog box, click Next.
3. Select the Sony – Network Video Management System Management Server service,
click Next. Specify the name (host name of the cluster) that clients use when accessing
the service, click Next.
4. No storage is required for the service, click Next. No registry settings should be replicated,
click Next. Verify that the cluster service is configured according to your needs, click Next.
The management server is now configured as a generic service in the failover cluster. Click
Finish.
5. In the cluster setup, the event server and the Data Collector should be set as a dependent
service of the management server, so the event server stops when the management server
is stopped.
6. To add the Sony – Network Video Management System Event Server service as a
resource to the Sony – Network Video Management System Management Server
Cluster service, right-click the cluster service and click Add a resource > 4 - Generic
Service and select Sony – Network Video Management System Event Server.
Upgrade in a cluster
Make sure to have a backup of the database before updating the cluster.
1. Stop the Management Server services on all management servers in the cluster.
2. Uninstall the management server on all servers in the cluster.
3. Use the procedure for installing multiple management servers in a cluster as described for
install in a cluster, see Install in a cluster (on page 206).
Important: When installing, make sure to reuse the existing SQL configuration database
(which is automatically upgraded from the old existing database version to the new one).
Feature configuration
208
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Network Video Management System Smart
Wall
About Network Video Management System Smart Wall
Network Video Management System Smart Wall is an advanced video wall product that provides
supreme situation awareness in larger surveillance centers and helps the surveillance operators to
focus on what is important ensuring higher efficiency and shorter response times.
Network Video Management System Smart Wall enables swift change of live video displayed on the
video wall to meet specific security scenarios and needs. One way to change what is displayed on
the video wall is with Smart Wall presets. The surveillance administrator define the Smart Wall
presets in the Management Client for optimizing the surveillance coverage for different recurring
surveillance scenarios. Smart Wall presets work for the entire video wall or parts of the video wall
and determine which cameras are displayed and the layout of the content on the monitors in the
video wall.
With Smart Wall presets, the display changes can be triggered automatically by rules. The display
changes can also be triggered manually by the surveillance operators using Network Video
Management System Smart Client by dragging and dropping views and cameras onto the logical
representation of the video wall in Network Video Management System Smart Client or by selecting
the different Smart Wall presets defined by the surveillance administrator.
See the Network Video Management System Smart Client documentation for more information
about how to use the Network Video Management System Smart Wall features in Network Video
Management System Smart Client.
Network Video Management System Smart Wall requires the following video wall-related licenses:

A base license for Network Video Management System Smart Wall that covers an
unlimited number of monitors displaying video on a video wall.
You can purchase a base license for Network Video Management System Smart Wall separately.
Configure Smart Walls
A Smart Wall configuration consists of defining the Smart Wall, adding monitors and defining the
monitor layout, and optionally specifying Smart Wall presets and the layout and content of the
different monitors.
Feature configuration
209
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
You need not define Smart Wall presets, if you only want to display cameras and Network Video
Management System Smart Client views that your Network Video Management System Smart
Client users manually can push onto the video wall.
If you want to use rules to change automatically what is displayed on the video wall and/or if you
have typically surveillance scenarios where you want to display the same content on the video wall
each time the scenario happens, you should define Smart Wall presets.
The configuration of the Smart Wall is very flexible. You can include all monitors on the video wall
in one Smart Wall or group the monitors and configure a Smart Wall for each group. Smart Wall
presets can change the layout and content of all monitors in a Smart Wall or only some of the
monitors. Monitors can be part of several Smart Walls and Smart Wall presets. Create as many
Smart Walls and Smart Wall presets you need to optimize the coverage of your typical surveillance
scenarios.
a. Define the Smart Wall
1. Expand Client, and select Smart Wall.
2. In the Overview pane, right-click Smart Walls and select Add Smart Wall.
3. Specify the settings for the Smart Wall.
4. In the General View Item Properties settings, define if you want system status
information and title bars to appear above the cameras' layout items.
5. Click OK.
b. Add monitors and define the monitor layout
1. Right-click the Smart Wall and select Add Monitor.
2. Configure the dimensions of the monitor so it resembles one of the physical monitors on
the video wall.
3. Use the preset behavior settings Empty preset and Empty preset item to define what is
displayed on a monitor with an empty preset layout or in a preset's empty preset items
when a new Smart Wall preset is automatically triggered or manually selected in Network
Video Management System Smart Client. You can use empty presets and empty preset
items for content not controlled by the Smart Wall preset.
4. Use the preset behavior setting Element insertion to define what should happen when a
user of Network Video Management System Smart Client drags a camera onto a layout
item in the Smart Wall preset. Select Independent to replace the camera already in the
preset item with the new camera or Linked to push the content of the layout items from
left to right from where you inserted the new camera.
5. Add as many monitors as you have on the physical video wall.
6. Select the Smart Wall and on the Layout tab, click Edit to position the different monitors
so their positions resemble the mounting of the physical monitors on the video wall.
7. Click OK. The same layout is used in Network Video Management System Smart Client.
c. Add Smart Wall presets (optionally)
1. Select the Smart Wall and from the Presets tab, click Add New.
2. Enter a name and a description and click OK.
Feature configuration
210
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
3. Click Activate to display the Smart Wall preset on the video wall.
4. Create as many Smart Wall presets as you need.
d. Add layout and cameras to the monitors (requires a Smart Wall
preset)
1. Select one of the monitors you created and from the Presets tab, select a preset from the
list to configure what you want the selected monitor to show when used with the selected
Smart Wall preset.
2. Click Edit.
3. Click the layout button to select which layout to use with your monitor, and click OK.
4. Drag cameras from the Device Groups or Recording Servers tab onto the different
layout items. You can leave layout items blank, so they are available for other content not
controlled by the Smart Wall preset.
5. If the monitor already has a layout for the selected preset, you can click Clear to define a
new layout or to exclude the monitor from the Smart Wall preset, so the monitor is
available for other content not controlled by the Smart Wall preset.
6. Click OK.
7. Repeat the steps, until you have added a layout and cameras on the monitors you want to
include in the Smart Wall preset.
Set up user rights for Network Video Management
System Smart Wall
You can control the tasks that Network Video Management System Smart Client users can perform
in Network Video Management System Smart Wall by specifying user rights for roles. The user
rights apply to all users who are assigned to the role. For more information, see Roles with Smart
Wall rights properties (see "Smart Wall tab (roles)" on page 180).
Selections for the Read, Edit, and Delete user rights are always applied. For the Operate and
Playback user rights, you can also grant the user rights for a specific period of time by selecting a
time profile. For example, this is useful if you want to allow a user to change the content that is
displayed on a Smart Wall, but only during their normal working hours.
To specify user rights for a role, follow these steps:
1. In the Site Navigation pane, expand Security, and select Roles.
2. In the Roles pane, select the role, or create a new role by right-clicking in the pane and
selecting Add Role.
3. In the upper part of the Role settings pane, select the Smart Wall.
4. In the lower part of the Role Settings pane, click the Smart Wall tab, and then select the
user rights to assign.

Read - View Smart Walls in client applications

Edit - Modify Smart Walls in client applications
Feature configuration
211
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual

Delete - Delete Smart Walls in client applications

Operate - Apply layouts on the selected monitor in client applications, and activate
presets

Playback - Review and manage live and recorded video
Note: If you do not select the Playback permission, users can view but not change the
content that is displayed on the video wall. If a user makes a change, the system
automatically disconnects from the shared state and the content on the video wall is not
affected. To return to the shared view, click Reconnect Smart Wall monitor.
5. Optional: To grant the Operate or Playback user rights for a specific period of time, select
the check box, and then select the time profile.
About using rules with Smart Wall presets
By combining rules and Smart Wall presets, you can control what is displayed on your video wall in
similar way as the system uses rules to control the behavior of cameras and more. For example, a
rule can trigger your video wall to display a certain Smart Wall preset during a certain day. You can
even use rules to control what individual monitors in a video wall display. See Add a rule (on page
145) for information about how to create rules.
Example of a rule triggering a Smart Wall preset.
Smart Wall properties
Info tab (Smart Wall properties)
On the Info tab for a Smart Wall, you can add and edit Smart Walls.
Name
Description
Name
The name of the Smart Wall. Displayed in the Network Video
Management System Smart Client as the Smart Wall view group
name.
Description
A description of the Smart Wall. The description is only used
internally in the Management Client.
Status text
If selected, camera and system status information is displayed
across cameras' layout items on the video wall.
No title bar
If selected, all Smart Wall layout items have no title bars on the
video wall.
Title bar
If selected, all Smart Wall layout items have title bars on the
video wall.
Title bar with live indicator
When selected, all Smart Wall layout items' title bars display live
and motion indicators on the video wall.
Feature configuration
212
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Presets tab (Smart Wall properties)
On the Presets tab for a Smart Wall, you can add and edit Smart Wall presets.
Name
Description
Add New
Click to add a preset to your Network Video Management System
Smart Wall installation.
Define a name and description for the new Smart Wall preset.
Edit
Edit the name and/or description of a Smart Wall preset.
Delete
Delete a Smart Wall preset.
Activate
Click to display the Smart Wall preset on the video wall. You must
create rules with the Smart Wall preset before the system can
automatically trigger the display of the Smart Wall preset. See
also About using rules with Smart Wall presets (on page 212).
Layout tab (Smart Wall properties)
On the Layout tab for a Smart Wall, you position the monitors in your Smart Wall so their
positions resemble the mounting of the physical monitors on the video wall. The layout is also used
in the Network Video Management System Smart Client.
Name
Description
Edit
Click to adjust the positioning of the monitors.
Movement
To move a monitor to a new position, select the relevant monitor
and drag it to the desired position, or click one of the arrow
buttons to move the monitor in the selected direction.
Zoom buttons
Click buttons to zoom in/out of the Smart Wall layout preview to
ensure you position the monitors correctly.
Name
The name of the monitor. The name is displayed in the Network
Video Management System Smart Client.
Size
The size of the physical monitor on the video wall.
Aspect ratio
The height/width relationship of the physical monitor on the video
wall.
Feature configuration
213
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Monitor properties
Info tab (monitor properties)
On the Info tab for a monitor in a Smart Wall preset, you can add monitors and edit the monitors'
settings.
Name
Description
Name
The name of the monitor. The name is displayed in the Network
Video Management System Smart Client.
Description
A description of the monitor. The description is only used
internally in the Management Client.
Size
The size of the physical monitor on the video wall.
Aspect ratio
The height/width relationship of the physical monitor on the video
wall.
Defines what should be displayed on a monitor with an empty
preset layout when a new Smart Wall preset is triggered or
selected in Network Video Management System Smart Client.
Empty preset
Select Preserve to keep the current content on the monitor.
Select Clear to clear all content so nothing is displayed on the
monitor.
Defines what should be displayed in an empty preset layout item
when a new Smart Wall preset is triggered or selected in Network
Video Management System Smart Client.
Empty preset item
Select Preserve to keep the current content in the layout item.
Select Clear to clear the content so nothing is displayed in the
layout item.
Defines how cameras are inserted in the monitor's layout when
viewed in the Network Video Management System Smart Client.
When selecting Independent, only the content of the affected
layout item changes, the rest of the content in the layout remain
the same. When selecting Linked, the contents of the layout
items are pushed from left to right. If, for instance, a camera is
inserted in position 1, the previous camera of position 1 is pushed
to position 2, the previous camera of position 2 is pushed to
position 3, and so on as illustrated in this example.
Element insertion
Before a new camera is inserted and after.
Feature configuration
214
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Presets tab (monitor properties)
On the Presets tab for a monitor in a Smart Wall preset, you can edit the layout and content of
the monitor in the selected Smart Wall preset.
Name
Description
Preset
A list of Smart Wall presets for the select Smart Wall.
Click Edit to edit the layout and the content of the selected
monitor.
Double-click a camera to remove a single camera.
Click Clear to define a new layout or to exclude the monitor in
the Smart Wall preset so the monitor is available for other
content not controlled by the Smart Wall preset.
Edit
Click
to select the layout you want to use with your monitor
in the selected preset, and click OK.
Drag cameras from the Device Groups or Recording Servers
tab onto the different layout items. You can leave layout items
empty, so they are available for other content not controlled by
the Smart Wall preset.
NVMS Mobile
NVMS Mobile introduction
About NVMS Mobile
NVMS Mobile consists of three components:

NVMS Mobile client

NVMS Mobile server

NVMS Mobile plug-in
The NVMS Mobile client is a mobile surveillance app that you can install and use on your Android
device, Apple device or Windows 8 Phone device. You can use as many installations of NVMS Mobile
client as you need.
For more information, download the NVMS Mobile Client User Guide from the Sony Corporation
website http://www.sony.net/CameraSystem/NVMS/Manuals.
The NVMS Mobile server and NVMS Mobile plug-in are covered in this manual.
Prerequisites for using NVMS Mobile
Before you can start using NVMS Mobile, you must make sure that you have the following:
Feature configuration
215
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual

A running VMS installed and configured with at least one user.

Cameras and views set up in Network Video Management System Smart Client.

A mobile device running Android or iOS with access to Google Play or App Store℠ from
which you can download the NVMS Mobile client application.
NVMS Mobile configuration
About NVMS Mobile server
NVMS Mobile server handles log-ins to the system from NVMS Mobile client from a mobile device or
Network Video Management System Web Client.
A NVMS Mobile server distributes video streams from recording servers to NVMS Mobile clients.
This offers a secure setup where recording servers are never connected to the Internet. When a
NVMS Mobile server receives video streams from recording servers, it also handles the complex
conversion of codecs and formats allowing streaming of video on the mobile device.
You must install NVMS Mobile server on any computer from which you want to access recording
servers. When you install NVMS Mobile server, make sure you log in using an account that has
administrator rights. Otherwise, installation will not complete successfully.
About and master/slave servers
If your system supports and/or master/slave servers, you can access such servers with your NVMS
Mobile client. Use this functionality to gain access to all cameras on all slave servers by logging in
to the master server.
This means that when users of the NVMS Mobile client log in to a server to see cameras from all
servers in your system, they must connect to the IP address of the master server. Users must have
administrator rights on all servers in the system in order for the cameras to show up in the NVMS
Mobile client.
Add or edit a Mobile server
1. Go to Servers > Mobile Servers. From the menu that appears, select Create New. Enter
or edit the settings.
Important: If you edit settings for Login method, All cameras view, and Outputs and events
while you or others are connected to the NVMS Mobile client, you must restart the NVMS Mobile
client for the new settings to take effect.
Set up investigations
Set up investigations so that people can use Web Client and NVMS Mobile to access recorded video
and investigate incidents, and prepare and download video evidence.
To set up investigations, follow these steps:
1. In Management Client, click the mobile server, and then click the Investigations tab.
2. Select the Enabled check box. By default, the check box is selected.
Feature configuration
216
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
3. In the Investigations folder field, specify where to store video for investigations.
4. In the Limit size of investigations to field, enter the maximum number of megabytes
that the investigation folder can contain.
5. Optional: To allow users to access investigations that other users create, select the View
investigations made by others check box. If you do not select this check box, users can
see only their own investigations.
6. Optional: To include the date and time that a video was downloaded, select the Include
timestamps for AVI exports check box.
7. In the Used codec for AVI exports field, select the compression format to use when
preparing AVI packages for download.
Note: The codecs in the list can differ, depending on your operating system. If you do not
see the codec you want to use, you can install it on the computer where Management Client
is running and it will display in this list.
Additionally, codecs can use different compression rates, which can affect video quality.
Higher compression rates reduce storage requirements but can also reduce quality. Lower
compression rates require more storage and network capacity, but can increase quality. It's
a good idea to research the codecs before you select one.
8. In the Failed export data (for MKV and AVI export) field, specify whether to keep the
data that was successfully downloaded, although it can be incomplete, or delete it.
9. To enable users to save investigations, you must grant the following permissions to the
security role assigned to the users:

In Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition products, grant the
Export permission.

In Network Video Management System Standard Edition products, grant the
Database permission.
Clean up investigations
If you have investigations or video exports that you no longer need to keep, you can delete them.
For example, this can be useful if you want to make more disk space available on the server.

To delete an investigation, and all of the video exports that were created for it, select the
investigation in the list, and then click Delete.

To delete individual the video files that were exported for an investigation, but keep the
investigation, select the investigation in the list. In the Investigation details group, click
the Delete icon to the right of the Database, AVI, or MKV fields for exports.
About using Video Push to stream video
You can set up Video Push so that users can keep others informed about a situation, or record
video to investigate it later, by streaming video from their mobile device's camera to your Network
Video Management System surveillance system.
Feature configuration
217
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Set up Video Push to stream video
To let users stream video from their mobile devices to an Network Video Management System
surveillance system, set up Video Push on a NVMS Mobile server.
In Management Client, perform these steps in the following order:
1. Set up a channel that the mobile device can use to stream video to the recording server.
2. Add the Video Push Driver as a hardware device on the recording server. The driver
simulates a camera device so that you can stream video to the recording server.
3. Assign the Video Push Driver device to the channel.
This topic describes each of these steps.
Set up a channel for streaming video
Note: Each channel requires a hardware device license.
To add a channel, follow these steps:
1. In the navigation pane, select Mobile Server, and select the mobile server.
2. On the Video Push tab, select the Video Push check box.
3. In the bottom right corner, click Add to add a video push channel under Channels
mapping.
4. Enter the user name of the user account that will use the channel. This user account must
be allowed to access the NVMS Mobile server and recording server.
Note: To use Video Push, users must log in to NVMS Mobile on their mobile device using
the user name and password for this account.
5. Make a note of the port number. You will need it when you add the Video Push driver as a
hardware device on the recording server.
6. Click OK to close the Video Push Channel dialog box and the save the channel.
Add the Video Push Driver as a hardware device on the recording server
1. In the navigation pane, click Recording Servers.
2. Right-click the server that you want to stream video to, and click Add Hardware to open
the Add Hardware wizard.
3. Select Manual as the hardware detection method, and click Next.
4. Enter credentials for the camera, as follows:

To use the factory default credentials from the camera factory, click Next.
Typically, factory settings are used.

If you have changed the credentials on the device, enter that information, and then
click Next.
Note: These are the credentials for the hardware, not for the user. They are not related to
the user name for the channel.
Feature configuration
218
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
5. In the list of drivers, expand Other, select the Video Push Driver check box, and then
click Next.
Note: The system generates a MAC address for the Video Push Driver device. We
recommend that you use this address. Change it only if you experience problems with the
Video Push Driver device. For example, if you need to add a new address and port number.
6. In the Address field, enter the IP address of the computer where NVMS Mobile server is
installed.
7. In the Port field, enter the port number for the channel you created for streaming video.
The port number was assigned when you created the channel.
8. In the Hardware model column, select Video Push Driver, and then click Next.
9. When the system detects the new hardware, click Next.
10. In the Hardware name template field, specify whether to display either the model of the
hardware and the IP address, or the model only.
11. Specify whether to enable related devices by selecting the Enabled check box. You can
add related devices to the list for Video Push Driver, even though they are not enabled.
You can enable them later.
Note: If you want to use location information when you stream video, you must enable the
Metadata port.
12. Select the default groups for the related devices on the left, or select a specific group in the
Add to Group field. Adding devices to a group can make it easier to apply settings to all
devices at the same time or replace devices.
Add the Video Push Driver device to the channel for video push
1. In the Site navigation pane, click Mobile Servers, and then click the Video Push tab.
2. Click Find Cameras. If successful, the name of the Video Push Driver camera displays in
the Camera Name field.
3. Save your configuration.
Remove a channel that you don't need
You can remove channels that you no longer use.

Select the channel to remove, and then click Remove in the lower right corner.
About actions
You can manage the availability of the Actions tab in the NVMS Mobile client by enabling or
disabling this on the Mobile server tab. Actions are by default enabled, and all available actions for
the connected devices are shown here.
About naming an output for use in NVMS Mobile
In order to get actions shown correctly together with current camera, it is important that the
output uses the exact same name as the camera.
Feature configuration
219
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Example:
If you have a camera named "AXIS P3301,P3304 - 10.100.50.110 - Camera 1", you must also
name the action "AXIS P3301,P3304 - 10.100.50.110 - Camera 1".
You can add a further description to the title afterwards, for example "AXIS P3301,P3304 10.100.50.110 - Camera 1 - Light switch".
Important: If you do not follow these naming conventions, actions are not available in the action
list for the associated camera's view. Instead, actions appear in the list of other actions on the
Actions tab.
Add an automatic export rule
1. In the Management Client, click the relevant Mobile server > Export Tab.
2. Under Automatic Exports, click Add to open the Auto Export Rule window.
3. Set the relevant Auto Export Rule window settings.
4. When finished, click OK.
Mobile server settings
General
The following table describes the settings on this tab.
Name
Description
Server name
Enter a name of the NVMS Mobile server.
Description
Enter an optional description of the NVMS Mobile server.
Mobile server
Choose between all NVMS Mobile servers currently installed to
the specific system. Only NVMS Mobile servers that are running
are shown in the list.
Login method
Select the authentication method to use when users log in to the
server. You can choose between the following options:
Automatic, Windows authentication, or Basic
authentication.
Enable Network Video
Management System Web
Client
Enable access to Network Video Management System Web Client.
Enable all cameras view
Include the All Cameras view. This view displays all of the
cameras that a user is allowed to view on a recording server.
Enable actions (outputs and
events)
Enable access to actions in NVMS Mobile clients.
Enable keyframes
Stream only keyframes when streaming video. This uses less
bandwidth.
Feature configuration
220
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Name
Description
Enable full-size images
Enable the NVMS Mobile server to send full-size images to the
NVMS Mobile client or Network Video Management System Web
Client.
Note that enabling full-size images uses more bandwidth.
Additionally, enabling this option disables all rules set up in the
Performance settings.
Enable direct streaming
Choose how to handle direct streaming in Network Video
Management System Web Client. Choose between enforcing the
use of direct streaming, enforcing it when possible, or never
enforcing it.
Enabled
Enable/disable logging of NVMS Mobile client's actions in a
separate log file.
Log file location
Path to where log files are saved.
Keep logs for
Number of days to keep logs for (default three days).
Configuration backup
Import or export your NVMS Mobile server configuration. Your
system stores the configuration in an XML file.
Connectivity
In the General section, specify the following settings.
Name
Description
Choose how clients should connect to the NVMS Mobile server.
You can choose between the following options: HTTP only,
HTTP and HTTPS or HTTPS Only.
Connection type
Client timeout (HTTP)
Note: If you select HTTPS Only, devices running iOS 9.0 or
later, can connect only if you have a certificate from a certificate
authority (CA) installed on your NVMS Mobile server. CAs issue
digital certificates that verify the identities of users and websites
that exchange data on the Internet. Examples of CAs are
companies like Comodo, Symantec, and GoDaddy. Before you
turn on secure connections, make sure that you are familiar with
digital certificates. To learn how to add a certificate in NVMS
Mobile server, see Edit certificate (on page 227).
Set a time frame for how often the NVMS Mobile client must
indicate to the Mobile server that it is up and running. The default
value is 30 seconds.
Sony recommends that you do not increase the time frame.
Settings in the Internet Access section are used in the following tasks:

Configure connection settings.

Send an email message to help users connect their mobile device to NVMS Mobile servers.
Feature configuration
221
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual

Enable connections to NVMS Mobile servers on a complex network.
Server Status
See the status details for your Mobile server. The details are read-only:
Name
Description
Server active since
Shows how long the Mobile server has been running since it was
last stopped.
CPU usage
Shows current CPU usage on the Mobile server.
Internal bandwidth
Shows the current bandwidth in use between the Mobile server
and the relevant recording server.
External bandwidth
Shows the current bandwidth in use between the mobile device
and Mobile server.
User Name column
Shows user name(s) of the Mobile server user(s) connected to
the Mobile server.
State column
Shows the current relation between the Mobile server and the
NVMS Mobile client user in question. Is the user connected (a
state preliminary to servers exchanging keys and encrypting
credentials) or is he/she actually logged in? Possible states are:
Connected and Logged In Network Video Management System.
Bandwidth Usage column
Shows the level of bandwidth used by the Mobile server client
user in question.
Live Streams column
Shows the number of live video streams currently open for the
NVMS Mobile client user in question.
Playback Streams column
Shows the number of playback video streams currently open for
the relevant mobile client user.
Video Push streams
Shows the number of Video Push stream currently open for the
relevant mobile client user.
Direct Streams
Shows the number of live video streams using Direct Streaming
that are currently open for the relevant mobile user.
Video Push
You can specify the following settings if you enable Video push:
Name
Description
Video push
Enable Video push on the Mobile server.
Number of channels
Specify the number of enabled Video push channels in your
Network Video Management System.
Channel column
Shows the channel number for the relevant channel. Noneditable.
Port
Port number for the relevant Video push channel.
Feature configuration
222
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Name
Description
MAC
MAC address for the relevant Video push channel.
User Name
Enter the user name associated with the relevant video push
channel.
Camera Name
Shows the name of the camera if the camera has been identified.
Once you have completed all necessary steps (see "Set up Video Push to stream video" on page
218), click Find Cameras to search for the relevant camera.
Investigations
You can enable investigations so that people can use Network Video Management System Web
Client and NVMS Mobile to access recorded video and investigate incidents, and prepare and
download video evidence.
The following table describes the settings for investigations.
Name
Description
Investigations folder
Specify where to store video for investigations.
Limit size of investigations
to
Enter the maximum number of megabytes that the investigations
folder can contain.
View investigations made by Select this check box to allow users to access investigations that
others
they did not create.
Include timestamps for AVI
exports
Select this check box to include the date and time that the AVI
file was downloaded.
Select the compression format to use when preparing AVI
packages for download.
Used codec for AVI exports
The codecs you can choose from can differ, depending on your
operating system. If you do not see the codec you want, you can
add it to the list by installing it on the computer where the NVMS
Mobile server is running.
Failed export data (for MKV
and AVI export)
Select whether to keep the data that was not successfully
prepared for download in an investigation, or delete it.
Performance
On the Performance tab, you can set the following limitations on the NVMS Mobile server's
performance:
Level 1
Level 1 is the default limitation placed on the NVMS Mobile server. Any limitations you set here are
always applied to the NVMS Mobile's video stream.
Feature configuration
223
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Name
Description
Level 1
Select the check box to enable the first level of limitations to
NVMS Mobile server performance.
Max FPS
Set a limit for the maximum number of frames per second (FPS)
to send from the NVMS Mobile server to clients.
Max image resolution
Set a limit for the image resolution to send from the NVMS Mobile
server to clients.
Level 2
If you would rather like to enforce a different level of limitations that the default one in Level 1,
you can select the Level 2 check box instead. You cannot set any settings higher than what you
have set them to in the first level. If you, for example, set the Max FPS to 45 on Level 1, you can
set the Max FPS on Level 2 only to 44 or below.
Name
Description
Level 2
Select the check box to enable the second level of limitations to
NVMS Mobile server performance.
CPU threshold
Set a threshold for the CPU load on the NVMS Mobile server
before the system enforces video stream limitations.
Bandwidth threshold
Set a threshold for bandwidth load on the NVMS Mobile server
before the system enforces video stream limitations.
Max FPS
Set a limit for the maximum number of frames per second (FPS)
to send from the NVMS Mobile server to clients.
Max image resolution
Set a limit for the image resolution to send from the NVMS Mobile
server to clients.
Level 3
You can also select a Level 3 check box to create a third level for limitations. You cannot set any
settings higher than what you have set them to in Level 1 and Level 2. If you, for example, set
the Max FPS to 45 on Level 1 and to level 32 on Level 2, you can set the Max FPS on Level 3
only to 31 or below.
Name
Description
Level 3
Select the check box to enable the second level of limitations to
NVMS Mobile server performance.
CPU threshold
Set a threshold for the CPU load on the NVMS Mobile server
before the system enforces video stream limitations.
Bandwidth threshold
Set a threshold for bandwidth load on the NVMS Mobile server
before the system enforces video stream limitations.
Max FPS
Set a limit for the frames per second (FPS) to send from the
NVMS Mobile server to clients.
Max image resolution
Set a limit for the image resolution to send from the NVMS Mobile
server to clients.
Feature configuration
224
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
The system does not instantly switch from one level to another level. If your CPU or bandwidth
threshold goes less than five percent above or below the indicated levels, the current level stays in
use.
Note that if you enable Enable full-size images on the General tab, none of the Performance
levels are applied.
Log Settings
Fill in and specify the following log settings:
Name
Description
Enabled
Enable/disable logging of NVMS Mobile client's actions in a separate
log file.
Log file location
Path to where log files are saved.
Keep logs for
Number of days to keep logs for (default three days).
CPU usage
Default level of CPU usage which will trigger a warning in the log.
Internal bandwidth
Default internal bandwidth usage which will trigger a warning in the
log.
External bandwidth
Default external bandwidth usage which will trigger a warning in the
log.
Check every
Default time frame (30 sec.) for checking warning levels.
Feature configuration
225
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Mobile Server Manager
About Mobile Server Manager
The Mobile Server Manager is a tray-controlled feature connected to the Mobile server. Rightclicking the Mobile Server Manager icon in the system tray opens a menu from which you can
easily access Mobile server functionality.
You can:

Open Network Video Management System Web Client (see "Access Network Video
Management System Web Client" on page 226)

Start, stop and restart the Mobile service (see "Start, stop and restart Mobile service" on
page 229)

Fill in or change surveillance server credentials (see "Fill in/edit surveillance server
credentials" on page 228)

Show/edit port numbers (on page 229)

Edit certificate (on page 227)

Open today's log file (see "About accessing logs and exports" on page 227)

Open log folder (see "About accessing logs and exports" on page 227)

Open export folder (see "About accessing logs and exports" on page 227)

Show Mobile server status (see "About show status" on page 227)
Access Network Video Management System Web Client
If you have a NVMS Mobile server installed on your computer, you can use the Network Video
Management System Web Client to access your cameras and views. Because you do not need to
install Network Video Management System Web Client, you can access it from the computer where
you installed the NVMS Mobile server, or any other computer you want to use for this purpose.
1. Set up the NVMS Mobile server in the Management Client.
2. If you are using the computer where NVMS Mobile server is installed, you can right-click
the NVMS Mobile Server icon in the system tray, and select Open Network Video
Management System Web Client.
3. If you are not using the computer where NVMS Mobile server is installed, you can access it
from a browser. Continue with step 4 in this process.
4. Open an Internet browser (Internet Explorer, Mozilla Firefox, Google Chrome or Safari).
5. Type the external IP address, that is, the external address and port of the server on which
the NVMS Mobile server is running.
Example: The NVMS Mobile server is installed on a server with the IP address 127.2.3.4 and
is configured to accept HTTP connections on port 8081 and HTTPS connections on port 8082
(default settings of the installer).
Feature configuration
226
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
In the address bar of your browser, type: http://1.2.3.4:8081 or https://1.2.3.4:8082,
depending on whether you want to use a standard HTTP connection or a secure HTTPS
connection. You can now begin using Network Video Management System Web Client.
6. Add the address as a bookmark in your browser for easy future access to Network Video
Management System Web Client. If you use Network Video Management System Web
Client on the local computer on which you installed the NVMS Mobile server, you can also
use the desktop shortcut which the installer creates. Click the shortcut to launch your
default browser and open Network Video Management System Web Client.
You must clear the cache of Internet browsers running the Network Video Management System
Web Client before you can use a new version of the Network Video Management System Web
Client. System administrators must ask their Network Video Management System Web Client users
to clear their browser cache after upgrading, or force this action remotely (you can do this action
only in Internet Explorer in a domain).
About show status
Right-click the Mobile Server Manager icon and select Show Status or double-click the Mobile
Server Manager icon to open a window that shows the status of the Mobile server. You can see the
following information:
Name
Description
Server running since
Time and date of the time when the Mobile server was last
started.
Connected users
Number of users currently connected to the Mobile server.
Hardware decoding
Indicates if hardware accelerated decoding is in action on the
Mobile server.
CPU usage
How many % of the CPU is currently being used by the Mobile
server.
CPU usage history
A graph detailing the history of CPU usage by the Mobile server.
About accessing logs and exports
The Mobile Server Manager lets you quickly access the log file of the day, open the folder to which
logs files are saved, and open the folder to which exports are saved.
To open any one of these, right-click the Mobile Server Manager and select Open Today's Log
File, Open Log Folder or Open Export Folder respectively.
Important: If you uninstall NVMS Mobile from your system, its log files are not deleted.
Administrators with proper rights can access these log files at a later timer, or decide to delete
them if they are not needed any longer. The default location of the log files is in the ProgramData
folder. If you change the default location of log files, existing logs are not copied to the new
location nor are they deleted.
Edit certificate
If you want to use a secure HTTPS protocol to establish connection between a NVMS Mobile server
and your mobile device or the Network Video Management System Web Client, you must have a
Feature configuration
227
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
valid certificate for the device or web browser to accept the connection. The certificate confirms
that the certificate holder is authorized to establish the connection.
When you install NVMS Mobile server, you generate a self-signed certificate if you run a Typical
installation. If you run a Custom installation, you can choose between generating a self-signed
certificate or loading a file that contains a certificate issued by another trusted site.
Note: If you want to use secure connections (HTTPS) devices running iOS 9.0 or later, can connect
only if you have a certificate from a certificate authority (CA) installed on your NVMS Mobile server.
CAs issue digital certificates that verify the identities of users and websites that exchange data on
the Internet. Examples of CAs are companies like Comodo, Symantec, and GoDaddy. Before you
turn on secure connections, make sure that you are familiar with digital certificates.
If you want use a different certificate, you can do the following.
1. On a computer where Management Client are installed, right-click the NVMS Mobile
Server icon and select Edit Certificate...
2. Choose one of the following:

Generate a self-signed certificate

Load a certificate file
Generate a self-signed certificate
1. Choose the Generate a self-signed certificate option and click OK.
2. Wait for a few seconds while the system installs the certificate.
3. When finished, a window opens and informs you that the certificate was installed
successfully. The Mobile service restarts to apply the change.
Locate a certificate file
1. Choose the Load a certificate file option.
2. Fill in the path for the certificate file or click the ... box to open a window where you can
browse for the file.
3. Fill in the password connected to the certificate file.
4. When finished, click OK.
Fill in/edit surveillance server credentials
1. Right-click the Mobile Server Manager and select Surveillance Server Credentials.
2. Fill in the Server URL.
3. Select what user you want to log in as:

Local system administrator (no credentials needed) or

A specified user account (credentials needed).
4. If you have chosen a specified user account, fill in User Name and Password.
5. When finished, click OK.
Feature configuration
228
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Show/edit port numbers
1. Right-click the Mobile Server Manager and select Show/Edit Port Numbers.
2. To edit the port numbers, type the relevant port number. You can indicate a standard port
number (for HTTP connections) and/or a secured port number (for HTTPS connections).
3. When you are done, click OK.
Start, stop and restart Mobile service
If needed, you can start, stop and restart the Mobile service from the Mobile Server Manager.

To perform any of these tasks, right-click the Mobile Server Manager and select Start
Mobile service, Stop Mobile service or Restart Mobile service respectively.
Frequently asked questions (FAQs)
1. Why can't I connect from my NVMS Mobile client to my recordings/NVMS Mobile
server?
In order to connect to your recordings, the NVMS Mobile server must be installed on the
server that runs your Network Video Management System or alternatively on a dedicated
server. The relevant NVMS Mobile settings are also needed in your Network Video
Management System video management setup. These are installed as either plug-ins or as
part of a product installation or upgrade. For details on how to get the NVMS Mobile server
and how to integrate the NVMS Mobile client-related settings in your Network Video
Management System, see the configuration section (see "NVMS Mobile configuration" on
page 216).
2. I installed the NVMS Mobile server to Network Video Management System
Enterprise Edition, but I can’t connect to the server from my device. What is the
problem?
After you have installed the NVMS Mobile server to your Network Video Management
System Enterprise Edition (4.0+), you must install the NVMS Mobile plug-in to see the
NVMS Mobile server in your Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition setup
(see "Install NVMS Mobile server" on page 40). When you have installed the NVMS Mobile
plug-in, locate the plug-in under Servers > Mobile Servers and right-click to add a new
mobile server. Here, you add the details about your NVMS Mobile server (Server name,
Description (optional), Server Address, Port and more). Once you finish, restart the NVMS
Mobile Service (from Windows Services) and try to reconnect with your device.
3. How do I add a NVMS Mobile server/location/site to my NVMS Mobile client?
You do this from the NVMS Mobile client. When you open it for the first time, you must add
one or more mobile servers in order to retrieve video from your cameras. Your added NVMS
Mobile servers will be listed alphabetically. You can add as many NVMS Mobile servers as
needed, as long as you have the needed log-in credentials.
4. Why is the image quality sometimes poor when I view video in the NVMS Mobile
client?
The NVMS Mobile server automatically adjusts image quality according to the available
bandwidth between the server and client. If you experience lower image quality than in the
Network Video Management System Smart Client, you might have too little bandwidth to
get full resolution images through the NVMS Mobile client. The reason for this can either be
Feature configuration
229
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
too little upstream bandwidth from the server or too little downstream bandwidth on the
client. See the Network Video Management System Smart Client User Manual which
you can download from our website http://www.sony.net/CameraSystem/NVMS/Manuals.
If you are in an area with mixed wireless bandwidth, you may notice that the image quality
improves when you enter an area with better bandwidth.
5. How do I create views?
You cannot create or configure views in the NVMS Mobile client. It uses views and related
names already created in the Network Video Management System Smart Client. If you do
not have any views set up, you can use the All cameras view to see all the cameras in
your system. You can always add more views to the Network Video Management System
Smart Client at a later time.
6. How do I add a new NVMS Mobile user?
A NVMS Mobile user is just like any other Network Video Management System user. You
add a new NVMS Mobile user the same way you normally add a new user in your
Management Client: right-click on Users in the Navigation Pane and select Add new basic
user or Add new Windows user. If you select new basic user, you must change the
server login method to Automatic or Basic Only depending on your system. You change
your server login method from the Login method drop-down menu on the General tab of
the Mobile Server entry under Servers > Mobile Servers in the Management Client.
7. Can I control my pant-tilt-zoom (PTZ) cameras and use presets from NVMS Mobile
client?
Yes, in the NVMS Mobile client, you can control your connected PTZ cameras and use
presets in live mode.
8. How can I navigate my recordings?
Android: You can navigate through your recordings in playback mode. Select the camera
you wish to view in playback mode and choose Menu > Playback. Once you are in
playback mode you can search through your recordings using the control buttons. You also
have the option to go to a specific time by choosing Menu > Go to time. Once you have
chosen Go To time, select the date and time you want to view.
iOS: You can navigate through your recordings in playback mode. Select the camera you
wish to view in playback mode and tap Playback. Once you are in playback mode, you can
search through your recordings using the control buttons. You also have the option to go to
a specific time by choosing Menu > Go to time. Once you have chosen Go to time, select
the date and time you want to view and click Confirm.
9. Can I view live and recorded video at the same time?
Yes, in playback mode, you get a small picture-in-picture (PiP) view live from the same
camera.
10. Can I use the NVMS Mobile client without a 3G data plan?
Yes, you can use NVMS Mobile through Wi-Fi. Either locally on the same network as your
Network Video Management System or at a different location, such as a public network in a
café or a home network. Note that bandwidth on public networks vary and may affect the
image quality of the video streams.
11. Can I use the NVMS Mobile client with a 4G/LTE data plan?
Yes, you can use any data connection on your mobile device that allows you to access the
internet to connect to your Network Video Management System video management system.
Feature configuration
230
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
12. Can I add multiple servers to the NVMS Mobile client?
When you open the NVMS Mobile client for the first time, you must add one or more mobile
servers in order to retrieve video from your cameras. These mobile servers are listed
alphabetically. If you want to retrieve video from additional servers, repeat this process.
You can add as many mobile servers as needed, as long as you have the relevant log-in
credentials.
13. Why is the image quality poor when I connect to my Network Video Management
System video management system at home through Wi-Fi at my office?
Check your home internet bandwidth. Many private internet connections have different
download and upload bandwidths often described as, for example, 20 Mbit/2 Mbit. This is
because home users rarely need to upload large amounts of data to the internet, but
consume a lot of data instead. The Network Video Management System video management
system needs to send video to the NVMS Mobile client and is limited by your connection’s
upload speed. If low image quality is consistent on multiple locations where the download
speed of the NVMS Mobile client’s network is good, the problem might be solved by
upgrading the upload speed of your home internet connection.
14. Where are my screenshots saved?
Android: Snapshots are saved to your device's SD card at: /mnt/sdcard/Network
Video Management System.
iOS: Snapshots are saved to your device and can be accessed from Photos on your device.
You cannot change the default settings on neither Android nor iOS.
15. How do I avoid the security warning when I run Network Video Management
System Web Client through an HTTPS connection?
The warning appears because the server address information in the certificate is incorrect.
The connection will still be encrypted.
The self-signed certificate in the NVMS Mobile server needs to be replaced with your own
certificate matching the server address used to connect to the NVMS Mobile server. These
certificates are obtained through official certificate signing authorities such as Verisign.
Consult the chosen signing authority for more details.
NVMS Mobile server does not use Microsoft IIS. This means that instructions provided for
generating certificate signing request (CSR) files by the signing authority using the IIS is
not applicable for the NVMS Mobile server. You must manually create CSR-file using
command line certificate tools or other similar third-party application. Note that this process
should be performed by system administrators and advanced users only.
16. Does my processor support hardware-accelerated decoding?
Only newer processors from Intel support hardware accelerated decoding. Check Intel
website
http://ark.intel.com/search/advanced?s=t&MarketSegment=DT&QuickSyncVideo=true if
your processor is supported.
In the menu, make sure Technologies > Intel Quick Sync Video is set to Yes.
If your processor is supported, hardware-accelerated decoding is enabled by default. You
can see the current status in Show status in the Mobile Server Manager (see "About show
status" on page 227).
17. Does my operating system support hardware-accelerated decoding?
Only Windows 8 and Windows Server 2012 or newer are supported.
Feature configuration
231
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Make sure you install the newest graphic drivers from the Intel website on your system.
These drivers are not available from Windows Update.
Hardware-accelerated decoding is not supported, if the mobile server is installed in a virtual
environment.
18. How do I disable hardware-accelerated decoding on the mobile server?
(Advanced)
If the processor on the mobile server supports hardware accelerated decoding, it is by
default enabled. To turn hardware-accelerated decoding off, do the following:
1. Locate the file VideoOS.MobileServer.Service.exe.config. The path is typically:
C:\Program Files\Sony\NVMS Mobile Server\VideoOS.MobileServer.Service.exe.config.
2. Open the file in Notepad or a similar text editor. If necessary, associate the file type
.config with Notepad.
3. Locate the field <add key="HardwareDecodingMode" value="Auto" />.
4. Replace the value "Auto" with "Off".
5. Save and close the file.
19. I just turned on my firewall, and now I can't connect a mobile device to my
server. Why not?
If your firewall was turned off while you installed NVMS Mobile server, you must manually
enable TCP and UDP communications.
Network Video Management System ONVIF
Bridge
About Network Video Management System ONVIF Bridge
Network Video Management System ONVIF Bridge is an add-on to Sony's IP video surveillance
solutions, Network Video Management System VMS products.
Network Video Management System ONVIF Bridge is an open ONVIF compliant interface for
standardized and secure video sharing from Network Video Management System VMS systems into
other IP-based security systems.
With Network Video Management System ONVIF Bridge installed, Sony ensures video
interoperability in multi-vendor installations. This enables law enforcement, surveillance centers, or
similar organizations (referred to as ONVIF clients) to access live and recorded H.264 video
streams from your Network Video Management System VMS system into their central monitoring
solution. The video streams are sent as RTSP streams over the Internet.
Network Video Management System ONVIF Bridge enforces security authorization of the ONVIF
clients, with the ability to control which cameras they can access, and the type of operations they
can perform. ONVIF clients can also pan-tilt-zoom PTZ cameras.
Network Video Management System ONVIF Bridge does not allow ONVIF clients to configure
anything within the Network Video Management System VMS systems.
Feature configuration
232
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
ONVIF compliance
Network Video Management System ONVIF Bridge is compliant with relevant parts of ONVIF Profile
G and Profile S, providing access to live and recorded H.264 video streams, including the ability to
control pan-tilt-zoom cameras.
For more information about the ONVIF standard, see the ONVIF® website http://www.onvif.org/.
Network Video Management System ONVIF Bridge architecture
Network Video Management System VMS
ONVIF clients
1. An ONVIF client connects to the Network Video Management System VMS via the ONVIF
Bridge server through Internet. The ONVIF client needs the ONVIF Bridge server IP address
(domain/hostname) and the ONVIF port number.
2. The ONVIF Bridge server connects to the user database on the surveillance/management
server to authorize the ONVIF client user.
3. After authorization, the recording server starts transmitting H.264 video streams from the
cameras to the ONVIF Bridge server.
Note: Only the default live stream from the camera is transmitted with ONVIF, other
streams are not accessible.
4. The ONVIF Bridge server sends the video as RTSP streams to the ONVIF client.
5. The ONVIF client user can pan-tilt-zoom PTZ cameras.
Note that Sony recommends that you install the ONVIF Bridge server in a demilitarized zone
(DMZ).
Feature configuration
233
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
About ONVIF clients
ONVIF clients are often servers, other bridges, or VMS systems. The RTSP port on the Network
Video Management System ONVIF Bridge server can be accessed directly, for example, with a
VideoLAN Client (VLC) media player or VLC plug-in.
Performance
CPU usage on the Network Video Management System ONVIF Bridge server is low, while the
network usage increases with the number of cameras that forward streams via the bridge.
Network Video Management System ONVIF Bridge components

Network Video Management System ONVIF Bridge server

Network Video Management System ONVIF Bridge 32-bit plug-in for Management
Application

Network Video Management System ONVIF Bridge 64-bit plug-in for Management Client
Licensing
Network Video Management System ONVIF Bridge does not require additional licenses. You can
download the software from the Sony Corporation website and start the installation (see "Installing
Network Video Management System ONVIF Bridge" on page 234).
Installing Network Video Management System ONVIF
Bridge
When you install Network Video Management System ONVIF Bridge, you install a server and a
plug-in for the Management Client. After the installation you can add one ONVIF Bridge to your
system. Multiple ONVIF clients can connect via one bridge, but it affects the network load.
You have two options when you install Network Video Management System ONVIF Bridge:

Typical: When you want to install both the ONVIF Bridge server and plug-in on the
computer with Management Client installed.

Custom: When you want to install the ONVIF Bridge server and the plug-in on different
computers.
Prerequisites
The computer where you want to install the Network Video Management System ONVIF Bridge
server component must have the following installed:

Microsoft® .NET Framework 3.5.

Microsoft® .NET Framework 4.5.1 or higher.

Visual C++ Redistributable Package for Visual Studio 2013 (x64).
Important: Currently only cameras with H.264 streaming support the RTSP streaming via the
Internet.
Feature configuration
234
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Installation
Download the installation file:
1. Enter our website http://www.sony.net/CameraSystem/NVMS/Software and locate the
Network Video Management System ONVIF Bridge product.
2. Click the Network Video Management System ONVIF Bridge installer file.
3. Select Run or Save and follow the instructions.
Run the installer:
1. Run the downloaded file on the computer where you want to install Network Video
Management System ONVIF Bridge. Click Yes to all warnings and unpacking starts.
2. Select the language for the installer. Click Continue.
3. Read and accept the license agreement. Click Continue.
4. Select the installation type.

Click Typical to install the ONVIF Bridge server and plug-in on one computer. Go to
step 6.

Click Custom if you want to install the ONVIF Bridge server and plug-in on separate
computers. Go to the next step.
5. If you chose Custom, select the server option. Click Continue.
6. Specify the primary surveillance system server:

Enter the server URL and port number.

Leave User account as log in.

Enter user name and password to be used by the service. Click Continue.
7. Select the file location and product language. Click Install.
8. When the installation is complete, you see the list of successfully installed components.
Click Close.
If you chose Custom, log into the computer with Management Client installed and run the installer
again to install the ONVIF Bridge plug-in.
The following components are now installed:

Network Video Management System ONVIF Bridge server.

Network Video Management System ONVIF Bridge plug-in that is visible in Management
Client in the Servers node.

Network Video Management System ONVIF Bridge Manager that is running and accessible
from the notification area on the server with the ONVIF Bridge server installed.

Network Video Management System ONVIF Bridge service that is registered as a service.
Feature configuration
235
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
You are ready for initial configuration (see "Initial configuring of Network Video Management
System ONVIF Bridge" on page 236).
Initial configuring of Network Video Management System
ONVIF Bridge
After you have installed Network Video Management System ONVIF Bridge, the ONVIF Bridge
service is running and the tray icon turns green. Now you have to add an ONVIF Bridge instance to
the Management Client and provide ONVIF client users with access to your Network Video
Management System.
Add an ONVIF Bridge to the Management Client
1. Open the Management Client.
2. Expand Servers, right-click ONVIF Bridge, and select Add New.
3. Enter a name for the ONVIF Bridge and click OK.
The ONVIF Bridge is added to the Network Video Management System.
Configure ONVIF client user settings
To provide ONVIF client users with access to your Network Video Management System, add them
to the User settings tab on the ONVIF Bridge.
Prerequisite:
You have set up the ONVIF client users as users in Management Client with access to relevant
cameras.
1. Open the Management Client.
2. Expand Servers, select ONVIF Bridge and then select the bridge you just added.
3. On the User settings tab, enter a user name and the password of the ONVIF client user as
configured under roles.
4. Click the Add user button.
The name of the ONVIF client user appears in the list of ONVIF user credentials and this user
can now access your system.
Managing Network Video Management System ONVIF
Bridge
Once you have completed the initial configuration of Network Video Management System ONVIF
Bridge, you have different options for monitoring the service and reconfigure settings:
View status of the ONVIF Bridge service
1. Access the computer with the ONVIF Bridge server installed.
Feature configuration
236
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
2. In the notification area, the ONVIF Bridge tray icon indicates the status of the ONVIF Bridge
service. If the service is running, the icon is green.
3. If it is not running, the icon is yellow or red. Right-click the icon and select Start ONVIF
Bridge service.
View logs
The ONVIF Bridge Manager saves log information about the ONVIF Bridge server and the RTSP
streams.
1. In the notification area on the computer with the ONVIF Bridge server installed, right-click
the ONVIF Bridge tray icon.
2. Select Show latest ONVIF log or Show latest RTSP log.
3. Review the logs to identify the root cause.
Reconfigure VMS address or login credentials
If you have changed the IP address or host name of the surveillance server or if you have changed
the user accounts that have access to the surveillance server service, you must update this
information for Network Video Management System ONVIF Bridge as well, to enable the ONVIF
Bridge service to continue running.
To change VMS address or login credentials:
1. In the notification area on the computer with the ONVIF Bridge server installed, right-click
the ONVIF Bridge tray icon.
2. In the menu that appears, stop the ONVIF Bridge service, if not already stopped.
3. Click Configuration.
Feature configuration
237
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
4. Specify the new URL and port number and/or the new user name and password.
5. Click OK.
6. Start the ONVIF Bridge service.
The ONVIF Bridge service is now running and the tray icon turns green.
Change sub-sites configuration
Network Video Management System ONVIF Bridge is initially configured to exclude sub-sites. This
means that ONVIF client users cannot access video from cameras that are installed on child sites.
You can change this, but Sony recommends that you only do it for very small systems.
To include sub-sites:
1. In the notification area, right-click the ONVIF Bridge tray icon.
2. In the menu that appears, stop the ONVIF Bridge service.
3. Click Configuration.
4. Enable the Include sub-sites option and click OK.
5. Start the ONVIF Bridge service.
Change the level of information in your logs
The ONVIF Bridge Manager saves log information about the ONVIF Bridge server and the RTSP
streams.
To change the level of information:
1. In the notification area, right-click the ONVIF Bridge tray icon.
2. In the menu that appears, stop the ONVIF Bridge service.
3. Select Configuration.
4. Specify how much information you want to save in your ONVIF and RTSP logs. The default
value is Information.
5. Click OK.
6. Start the ONVIF Bridge service.
Tips and tricks
The configuration created by ONVIF Bridge Manager is stored in a local file at ProgramData\Sony\Network VMS ONVIF Bridge. If this file is deleted, you must:
1. Open the Management Client.
2. Right-click the relevant ONVIF Bridge instance and click Delete.
3. Create a new ONVIF Bridge instance by expanding Servers, right-clicking ONVIF Bridge
and selecting Add New.
4. Enter a name for the ONVIF Bridge and click OK.
Feature configuration
238
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
ONVIF Bridge properties
User settings tab (properties)
The settings for the ONVIF Bridge server and ONVIF client users are:
Name
Description
ONVIF port
Type the port number of the ONVIF port. Through this port, the
ONVIF clients connect to the ONVIF Bridge server.
Default port is 580.
RTSP port
Type the port number of the RTSP port. Through this port, the
ONVIF clients stream RTSP video streams from the ONVIF Bridge
server.
Default port is 554.
ONVIF user credentials
User name
Lists the ONVIF client users that have access to the Network
Video Management System VMS system through the ONVIF
Bridge server.
Type the name of the ONVIF client user when you want to add a
new user account.
Prerequisite: You have set up the ONVIF client users as users in
Management Client with access to relevant cameras.
Password
Type the password for the ONVIF client user that you are adding.
Add user
When you have defined a user name and password, click the Add
user button to add the user.
Remove user
Select a user from the ONVIF user credentials list and click
Remove user.
Advanced settings tab (properties)
The advanced settings for the ONVIF Bridge list the default settings for all cameras that the ONVIF
Bridge provides to the ONVIF clients when the clients connect and request video streams.
The settings do not reflect the actual configuration of the cameras, but is an average that meets
most cameras to shorten the response time between the Network Video Management System and
the ONVIF client. You can change the default settings that ONVIF Bridge provides to the ONVIF
client, but you can also choose to use the actual configuration from the cameras:
Name
Description
Max days of retention
Default value is 30.
Frame per seconds
Default value is 5.
Width
Default value is 1920. This corresponds to full HD quality.
Height
Default value is 1080. This corresponds to full HD quality.
Bitrate Kbps
Default value is 512.
Feature configuration
239
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Name
Description
GOP size
Default value is 5.
Codec
Select one of the H.264 codec profiles. The default value is H.264
Baseline Profile.
Use configurations from
cameras
Enable this to use the actual configuration of the cameras instead
of the default average values defined above.
If you enable this setting, the response time between the
Network Video Management System and the ONVIF clients
increases.
Multi-domain with one-way trust
Setup with one-way trust
If you run your system in a multi-domain environment, you can configure this setup with one-way
trust. The system is installed on the trusting domain and users log in from trusting and trusted
domains.
1. Create a service account in the trusted domain. You can name it whatever you want, for
example, svcSony.
2. Add the new service account to the following local Windows user groups on the server
running the system, in the trusting domain:

Administrators

IIS_IUSRS (Windows Server 2008, necessary for Internet Information Services
(IIS) Application Pools)

IIS_WPG (Windows Server 2003, necessary for IIS Application Pools).
3. Make sure that the service account has system administrator rights on your SQL Database
or SQL Server Express, either directly or through the BUILTIN\Administrators group.
4. Set the identity of the ManagementServerAppPool Application Pool in the IIS to the
service account.
5. Reboot the server to make sure that all group membership and permission changes take
effect.
Feature configuration
240
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Important: To add trusted domain users to new or existing Network Video Management System
roles, log in to Windows as a trusted domain user. Next, launch the Management Client and log in
as user of either the trusting domain or the trusted domain. If you log in to Windows as a
trusting domain user, you are asked for credentials for the trusted domain in order to browse for
users.
Example illustration of multi-domain environments with one-way trust.
Legend:
1.
One-way outgoing domain trust
2.
MyDomain.local
3.
OtherDomain.edu
4.
Trusting domain user
5.
Management server
6.
Sony service account
7.
Trusted domain user
SNMP
About SNMP support
Your system supports Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP), a standard protocol for
monitoring and controlling network devices, for managing their configuration, collecting statistics
and more.
The system acts as an SNMP agent, which can generate an SNMP trap as a result of a triggered
rule. A third-party SNMP management console can then receive information about the ruletriggering event, and operators of the SNMP management console can configure their system for
further action as required.
The implementation uses Microsoft® Windows® SNMP Service for triggering SNMP traps. This means
that you must install the SNMP Service on recording servers. When you have configured the SNMP
Service through its own user interface, this enables recording servers to send .mib (Management
Information Base) files to the SNMP management console.
Install SNMP service
1. On the relevant recording servers, open Windows' Programs and Features functionality.
2. In the left side of the Programs and Features dialog box, click Turn Windows
functionality on or off. This opens the Windows feature window.
Feature configuration
241
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
3. In the dialog box, select the check box next to Simple Network Management Protocol
(SNMP) and click OK.
Configure SNMP service
1. On the required recording servers, select Start > Control Panel > Administrative Tools
> Services.
2. Double-click the SNMP Service.
3. Select the Traps tab.
4. Specify a community name, and click Add to list.
5. Select the Destinations tab.
6. Click Add, and specify the IP address or host name of the server running your third-party
SNMP management station software.
7. Click OK.
Feature configuration
242
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
System maintenance
Ports used by the system
If nothing else is mentioned, the ports are both inbound and outbound. The port numbers are the
default numbers. You can change the port numbers if needed. Contact Sony Support, if you need
to change ports that are not configurable through the Management Client.
Port
number
25
Protocol Used by
Purpose
SMTP
Listening for messages from devices to activate
events and for receiving images pre and post
recording.
Recording servers
The port is disabled per default.
80
HTTP
The IIS on the
management server
Running the Management Server service.
443
HTTPS
Management server
and service channel
Authentication of basic users.
554
RTSP
Recording servers
Traffic that controls streaming from cameras.
1024 and
higher
(except the
ports
mentioned
below)
HTTP
Recording servers
Outbound only. Traffic between cameras and
servers.
1234
TCP/UDP
Event Server
Listening for generic events from external
systems or devices.
1235
TCP
Event Server
Listening for generic events from external
systems or devices.
1433
TCP
All processes in the
system (among
others management
Communication with the SQL Server.
server, log server and
event server)
5432
TCP
Recording servers
System maintenance
Listening for event messages from devices.
243
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Port
number
Protocol Used by
Purpose
Communication with the SNMP extension agent.
7474
TCP
Recording servers
7475
TCP
Management server
Do not use the port for other purposes even if
your system does not apply SNMP.
Communication with the ImageServer interface.
TCP
Recording servers and
Network Video
Management System
Smart Client
7609
HTTP
Report server and
Data Collector Server
service
8080
UDP
Management server
Communication between internal processes on
the server.
8990
TCP
Management server
Monitoring the status of the Failover Server
service.
9090
TCP
Event Server
Listening for analytics events from external
systems or devices.
9993
TCP
Recording servers and
Communication between the two.
management server
TCP
Management server
and Network Video
Management System
Smart Client
TCP
Event server, Network
Video Management
System Smart Client
and Management
Client
TCP
Network Video
Management System
Screen Recorder and
recording servers
Do not use the port for other purposes even if
your system does not apply SNMP.
Communication with the SNMP extension agent.
7563
12345
22331
52111
System maintenance
Also handling of PTZ camera control commands
and for retrieving image streams from clients
etc.
Communication between the two.
The port must always be kept open on the
server running the Data Collector Server
service.
Communication between the system and Matrix
recipients.
You can change the port number in the
Management Client.
Inbound must be enabled to make Network
Video Management System add-on products,
Network Video Management System Smart
Client maps, Network Video Management
System Smart Client alarm lists, and MIP plugins work.
Communication between the two.
You can change the port number in the
Management Client.
244
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Port
number
Protocol Used by
Purpose
65101
UDP
Listening for event notifications from the
drivers.
Recording servers
Backing up and restoring system configuration
About backing up and restoring your system
configuration
Sony recommends that you make regular backups of your system configuration as a disaster
recovery measure. While it is rare to lose your configuration, it can happen under unfortunate
circumstances. Luckily, it takes only a minute to back up your existing configuration.
The system offers a built-in feature that backs up all the system configuration you can define in the
Management Client. Note that the log server database and the log files, including audit log files,
are not included in this backup.
If your system is large, Sony recommends that you define scheduled backups. This is done with the
third-party tool: Microsoft® SQL Server Management Studio. This backup includes the same data
as a manual backup.
During a backup, your system stays online. Depending on your system configuration, your
hardware, and on whether you have installed the SQL server, Event Server service and
Management Client on a single server or several servers (a distributed setup), backing up the
system configuration can take some time.
Each time you make a backup both manual and scheduled, the SQL Server's transaction log file is
flushed. For additional information about how to flush this log file, go to the Microsoft website and
search for "SQL Server transaction log".
Back up log server database
Handle the SurveillanceLogServer database by using the method that you use when handling
system configuration as described earlier. The SurveillanceLogServer database (the name may
be different if you renamed the system configuration database) contains all your system logs,
including errors reported by recording servers and cameras.
The database is located where the Log Server's SQL server is installed, typically the same place as
your management server's SQL server. Backing up this database is not vital since it does not
contain any system configuration, but you may later appreciate having access to system logs from
before the management server backup/restore.
System maintenance
245
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Manual backup and restore of system configuration
About manually backing up your system configuration
When you want to perform a manual backup of your system configuration, make sure that your
system stays online. Here are a few things to consider before you start the backup:

You cannot use a backup to copy configurations to other systems.

It can take some time to back up your configuration. It depends on your system
configuration, your hardware, and on whether your SQL server, management server and
Management Client are installed on the same computer.

Logs, including audit logs, are not part of the configuration backup.
About backing up and restoring the event server
configuration
The content of your event server configuration is included when you back up and restore system
configuration.
The first time you run the event server, all its configuration files are automatically moved to the
SQL server. You can apply the restored configuration to the event server without needing to restart
the event server, and the event server can start and stop all external communication while the
restoration of the configuration is being loaded.
About back up/restore fail and problem scenarios
If, after your last system configuration backup, you have moved the event server or other
registered services such as the log server, you must select which registered service configuration
you want for the new system. You can decide to keep the new configuration after the system is
restored to the old version. You decide by looking at the host names of the services.
If your restore of the system configuration fails because the event server is not located at the
specified destination (for example, if you have chosen the old registered service setup), do another
restore.
Back up system configuration manually
1. From the menu bar, select File > Backup Configuration.
2. Read the note in the dialog box and click Backup.
3. Enter a file name for the .cnf file.
4. Enter a folder destination and click Save.
5. Wait until the backup is finished and click Close.
Note: All relevant system configuration files are combined into one single .cnf file that is saved at a
specified location. During the backup, all backup files are first exported to a temporary system
backup folder on the management server. You can select another temporary folder by right-clicking
the notification area's management server service icon and by selecting Select shared backup
folder.
System maintenance
246
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Restore system configuration from a manual backup
Important information:

Both the user who installs and the user who restores must be local administrator of the
database on the management server and on the SQL server.

Except for your recording servers, your system is completely shut down for the duration of
the restore, which can take some time.

A backup can only be restored on the system installation where it was created. Make sure
that the setup is as similar as possible to when the backup was made. Otherwise, the
restore might fail.

If you do a backup of the database and restore it on a clean SQL server, then the raise
errors from the database will not work and you will only receive one generic error message
from the SQL server. To avoid that, first reinstall your Network Video Management System
using the clean SQL server and then restore the backup on top of that.

If restoring fails during the validation phase, you can start the old configuration again
because you have made no changes.
If restoring fails elsewhere in the process, you cannot roll back to the old configuration.
As long as the backup file is not corrupted, you can do another restore.

Restoring replaces the current configuration. This means that any changes to the
configuration since last backup are lost.

No logs, including audit logs, are restored.

Once restoring has started, you cannot cancel it.
Restoring:
1. Right-click the notification area's Management Server service icon and select Restore
Configuration.
2. Read the important note and click Restore.
3. In the file open dialog box, browse to the location of the configuration backup file, select it,
and click Open.
The backup file is located on the Management Client computer. If the Management Client is
installed on a different server, copy the backup file to this server before you select the
destination.
4. The Restore Configuration window opens. Wait for the restore to finish and click Close.
Select shared backup folder
Before backing up and restoring any system configuration, you must set a backup folder for this
purpose.
1. Right-click the notification area's management server service icon and select Select
shared backup folder.
2. In the window that appears, browse to the wanted file location.
3. Click OK twice.
4. If asked if you want to delete files in the current backup folder, click Yes or No depending
on your needs
System maintenance
247
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Scheduled backup and restore
About scheduled backup and restore of system configuration
Sony recommends that you make regular backups of your system configuration as a disaster
recovery measure. While it is rare to lose your configuration, it can happen under unfortunate
circumstances. Luckily, it takes only a minute to back up your existing configuration. Regular
backups also have the added benefit that they flush your Microsoft® SQL Server’s transaction log.
If you have a smaller setup and do not need scheduled backups, you can back up your system
configuration manually. For instructions, see Manual backup and restore of system configuration
(on page 246).
The management server stores your system's configuration in a database. When you back
up/restore management server(s), make sure that this database is included in the backup/restore.
Prerequisites for using scheduled backup and restore
Microsoft® SQL Server Management Studio, a tool download-able for free from their website
http://www.microsoft.com/downloads.
Apart from managing SQL Server databases, the tool includes some easy-to-use backup and
restoration features. Download and install the tool on your management server.
About the SQL server transaction log
Each time a change in the system's data occurs, the SQL Server log this change in its transaction
log, regardless whether it is a SQL Server on your network or a SQL Server Express edition.
The transaction log is essentially a security feature that makes it possible to roll back and undo
changes to the SQL Server database. By default, the SQL Server stores its transaction log
indefinitely, and over time the transaction log build up more and more entries. The SQL Server's
transaction log is by default located on the system drive, and if the transaction log keeps growing,
it may in the end prevent Windows from running properly.
To avoid such a scenario, flushing the SQL Serve's transaction log from time to time is a good idea.
However, flushing it does not in itself make the transaction log file smaller, but it prevents it from
growing out of control. Your system does not, however, automatically flush the SQL Server's
transaction log at specific intervals. You can also do several things on the SQL Server itself to keep
the size of the transaction log down.
For more information on this topic, go to the Microsoft support page http://support.microsoft.com
and search for SQL Server transaction log.
Back up system configuration with scheduled backup
1. From Windows' Start menu, launch Microsoft® SQL Server Management Studio..
2. When connecting, specify the name of the required SQL Server. Use the account under
which you created the database.
a) Find the Surveillance database that contains your entire system configuration,
including event server, recording servers, cameras, inputs, outputs, users, rules,
patrolling profiles, and more.
We assume that the database uses the default name.
System maintenance
248
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
b) Make a backup of the Surveillance database and make sure to:

Verify that the selected database is Surveillance.

Verify that the backup type is full.

Set the schedule for the recurrent backup. You can read more about scheduled
and automated backups on the Microsoft website
https://support.microsoft.com/en-us/kb/2019698.

Verify that the suggested path is satisfactory or select alternative path.

Select to verify backup when finished and to perform checksum before
writing to media.
3. Follow the instructions in the tool to the end.
Also consider backing up the SurveillanceLog database by using the same method.
Backup and restore event server configuration
The content of your event server configuration is included when you backup and restore system
configuration. The first time you run the event server, all its configuration files are automatically
moved to the SQL server. You can apply the restored configuration to the event server without
needing to restart the event server, and the event server is capable of starting and stopping all
external communication while the restoration of the configuration is being loaded.
Restore system configuration from a scheduled backup
Prerequisite: To prevent configuration changes being made while you restore the system
configuration database, stop the:

Management Server service (see "Managing server services" on page 257)

Event Server Service (can be done from Windows Services (search for services.msc on
your machine. Within Services, locate Sony – Network Video Management System
Event Server))

World Wide Web Publishing Service, also known as the Internet Information Service (IIS).
Learn how to stop the IIS http://technet.microsoft.com/enus/library/cc732317(WS.10).aspx.
Open Microsoft® SQL Server Management Studio from Windows' Start menu.
In the tool do the following:
1. When connecting, specify the name of the required SQL Server. Use the account under
which the database was created.
2. Find the Surveillance database that contains your entire system configuration, including
event server, recording servers, cameras, inputs, outputs, users, rules, patrolling profiles,
etc.
3. Make a restore of the Surveillance database and make sure to:

Select to backup from device

Select backup media type file

Find and select your backup file Surveillance.bak
System maintenance
249
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual

Select to overwrite the existing database.
4. Follow the instructions in the tool to the end.
If you also backed up the SurveillanceLog database from the old log server, restore it on the new
log server by using the same method.
Note that the system does not work while the Management Server service is stopped. It is
important to remember to start the services again once you have finished restoring the database.
Moving the management server
About moving the management server
You may sometimes need to move the management server installation from one physical server to
another. The management server stores your system configuration in a database. If you are
moving the management server from one physical server to another, it is vital that you make sure
that your new management server also gets access to this database. The system configuration
database can be stored in two different ways:

Network SQL Server: If you are storing your system configuration in a database on an
existing SQL Server on your network, you can point to the database's location on that SQL
Server when installing the management server software on your new management server.
In that case, only the following paragraph about management server hostname and IP
address applies and you should ignore the rest of this topic:
Management server hostname and IP address: When you move the management
server from one physical server to another physical server, it is by far the easiest to give
the new server the same hostname and IP address as the old one. This is due to the fact
that the recording server connects to the hostname and IP address of the old management
server. If you have given the new management server a new hostname and/or IP address,
the recording server cannot find the management server. Manually stop each recording
server in your system, change their management server URL, and when done, restart them.

Local SQL Server: If you are storing your system configuration in a local SQL Server
database on the management server itself, it is important that you back up the existing
management server's system configuration database before the move. By backing up the
database, and subsequently restoring it on the new server, you avoid having to reconfigure
your cameras, rules, time profiles, etc. after the move.
Prerequisites

Your software installation file for installation on the new management server.

Your software license file (.lic), that you received when you purchased your system and
initially installed it. You should not use the activated software license file which you have
received after a manual offline license activation. An activated software license file contains
information about the specific server on which the system is installed. Therefore an
activated software license file cannot be reused when moving to a new server.
Note that if you are also upgrading your system software in connection with the move, you have
received a new software license file. Simply use this.

Local SQL Server users only: Microsoft® SQL Server Management Studio.
System maintenance
250
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual

What happens while the management server is unavailable? (see "About unavailable
management servers" on page 251)

Copy log server database (see "Back up log server database" on page 245)
About unavailable management servers

Recording servers can still record: Any currently working recording servers received a
copy of their configuration from the management server, so they can work and store
recordings on their own while the management server is down. Scheduled and motiontriggered recording therefore works, and event-triggered recording works unless based on
events related to the management server or any other recording server because these go
through the management server.

Recording servers temporarily store log data locally: They automatically send log
data to the management server when it becomes available again.

Clients cannot log in: Client access is authorized through the management
server. Without the management server, clients cannot log in.

Clients that are already logged in can remain logged in for up to one hour:
When clients log in, they are authorized by the management server and can
communicate with recording servers for up to one hour. If you can get the new
management server up and running within an hour, many of your users are not
affected.

No ability to configure the system: Without the management server, you cannot
change the system configuration.
Sony recommends that you inform your users about the risk of losing contact with the surveillance
system while the management server is down.
Move the system configuration
Moving your system configuration is a three step process:
1. Make a backup of your system configuration. This is identical to making a scheduled
backup (see "Back up system configuration with scheduled backup" on page 248).
2. Install the new management server on the new server. See scheduled backup, step 2.
3. Restore your system configuration to the new system. See Restore system configuration
from scheduled backup (see "Restore system configuration from a scheduled backup" on
page 249).
Managing the SQL server
About updating the SQL server address
When you install a system as a trial, or if you restructure a large installation, you may need to use
a different SQL database. You can do this with the Update SQL Server Address tool.
System maintenance
251
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
With the tool, you can change the addresses of the SQL servers used by the management server,
the event server and the log server. The only limitation is that you cannot change the management
server and event server SQL address at the same time as the log server's SQL address. You can do
it one after another.
You must do SQL updates locally on the computer where you have installed the management
server/event server or log server. You cannot do it from the Management Client. If your
management server and event server are not located on the same computer, you can still use the
tool, but you must run it on both the computer on which the management server is installed and
on the computer on which the event server is installed.
You must copy the SQL databases before you proceed.
Update the log server's SQL address
Management server and log server located on the same computer
1. Go to the computer where your management server is installed.
2. Go to the notification area of the taskbar. Right-click the Management Server icon, select
Update SQL address. The Update SQL Server Address dialog box appears.
3. Select Log Server and click Next.
4. Enter or select the new SQL server and click Next.
5. Select the new SQL database and click Select.
6. Wait while the address change takes place. Click OK to confirm.
Management server and log server located on different computers
1. Go to the computer where your management server is installed and copy the directory
%ProgramFiles%\Sony\- Network VMS Management Server\Tools\ChangeSqlAddress\
(with content) to a temporary directory on the event server.
2. Paste the directory that you copied to a temporary place on the computer where the log
server is installed and run the included file:VideoOS.Server.ChangeSqlAddress.exe. The
Update SQL Server Address dialog box appears.
3. Select Log Server and click Next.
4. Enter or select the new SQL server and click Next.
5. Select the new SQL database and click Select.
6. Wait while the address change takes place. Click OK to confirm.
Update the management server or event server SQL
server address
1. If your management server and event server are located:
a) together on the same computer and you wish to update both SQL addresses, go to the
computer where your management server is installed.
System maintenance
252
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
b) on different computers and you wish to update the management server SQL address
(and later the event server SQL address), go to the computer where your
management server is installed.
c) on different computers and you wish to update the event server SQL address only (or
you have already updated it on the management server), go to the computer where
your management server is installed and copy the directory %ProgramFiles%\Sony\Network VMS Management Server\Tools\ChangeSqlAddress\ (with content) to
temporary directory on the event server.
2. If:

a and b, go to the notification area of the taskbar. Right-click the Management
Server icon, select Update SQL address.

c, paste the directory you copied to a temporary place on the computer where the
event server is installed and run the included
file:VideoOS.Server.ChangeSqlAddress.exe.
3. The Update SQL Server Address dialog box appears. Select Management Server and
Event Server and click Next.
4. Enter or select the new SQL server and click Next.
5. Select the new SQL database and click Select.
6. Wait while the address change takes place. When a confirmation message is presented,
click OK.
If you acted according to step 2 b, you have by now only updated the management server SQL
address. You must repeat the process to update the event server SQL address. When doing so,
make sure to select the scenario in step 2 c.
Replace hardware
When you replace a hardware device on your network with another hardware device, you must
know the IP address, port, user name and password of the new hardware device.
If you have not enabled automatic license activation and have used all device changes without
activation (see "About device changes without activation" on page 55), you must manually activate
your licenses after replacing hardware devices. If the new number of hardware devices exceeds
your total number of hardware device licenses, you have to purchase new hardware device
licenses.
1. Expand the required recording server, right-click the hardware you want to replace.
2. Select Replace Hardware.
3. The Replace Hardware wizard appears. Click Next.
4. In the wizard, in the Address field (marked by red arrow in the image), enter the IP
address of the new hardware. If known, select the relevant driver from the Hardware
Driver drop-down list. Otherwise select Auto Detect. If port, user name or password data
is different for the new hardware, correct this before starting the auto detect process
(if needed).
System maintenance
253
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
The wizard is prefilled with data from the existing hardware. If you replace it with a similar
hardware device, you can reuse some of this data - for example, port and driver
information.
5. Do one of the following:

If you selected the required hardware device driver directly from the list, click
Next.

If you selected Auto Detect in the list, click Auto Detect, wait for this process to
be successful (marked by a
to the far left), click Next.
This step is designed to help you map devices and their databases, depending on the
number of individual cameras, microphones, inputs, outputs and so on attached to the old
hardware device and the new respectively.
It is important to consider how to map databases from the old hardware device to
databases of the new hardware device. You do the actual mapping of individual devices by
selecting a corresponding camera, microphone, input, output or None in the right-side
column.
System maintenance
254
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Important: Make sure to map all cameras, microphones, inputs, outputs, etc. Contents
mapped to None, are lost.
Example of the old hardware device having more individual devices than the new one.
Click Next.
6. You are presented with a list of hardware to be added, replaced or removed. Click
Confirm.
7. Final step is a summary of added, replaced and inherited devices and their settings. Click
Copy to Clipboard to copy contents to the Windows clipboard or/and Close to end the
wizard.
Replace a recording server
If a recording server is malfunctioning and you want to replace it with a new server that inherits
the settings of the old recording server:
1. Retrieve the recording server ID from the old recording server:
1. Select Recording Servers, then in the Overview pane select the old recording server.
2. Select the Storage tab.
3. Press and hold down the CTRL key on your keyboard while selecting the Info tab.
4. Copy the recording server ID-number in the lower part of the Info tab. Do not copy the
term ID, only the number itself.
System maintenance
255
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
2. Replace the recording server ID on the new recording server:
1. Stop the Recording Server service on the old recording server, then in Windows'
Services set the service's Startup type to Disabled.
It is very important that you do not start two recording servers with identical IDs at
the same time.
2. On the new recording server, open an explorer and go to C:\ProgramData\Sony\Network VMS Recording Server or the path where your recording server is located.
3. Open the file RecorderConfig.xml.
4. Delete the ID stated in between the tags <id> and </id>.
5. Paste the copied recording server ID in between the tags <id> and </id>. Save the
RecorderConfig.xml file.
6. Go to the registry:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Wow6432Node\VideoOS\Recorder\Installation.
7. Open RecorderIDOnMachine and change the old recording server ID with the new
ID.
8. Restart the Recording Server service. When the new Recording Server service starts
up, it has inherited all settings from the old recording server.
Video device drivers
About video device drivers
Your system uses video device drivers to control and communicate with the camera devices
connected to a recording server. You must install video device drivers on each recording server on
your system.
When you install your system, video device drivers are part of the initial installation process. Sony
releases new versions of video device drivers regularly and makes them available on the download
page http://www.sony.net/CameraSystem/NVMS/Software on our website. When you update video
device drivers, you can install the latest version on top of any version you may have installed. Stop
the Recording Server before you install, otherwise you need to restart the computer.
To ensure best performance, always use the latest version of video device drivers.
About removing video device drivers
If you no longer require video device drivers on your computer, you can delete the device packs
from your system. To do so, follow the standard Windows procedure for removing programs.
If you remove video device drivers, the recording server and the camera devices cannot
communicate any longer. Do not remove device packs when you upgrade because you can install a
System maintenance
256
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
new version on top of an old one. Only if you uninstall the entire system, you may remove the
device pack.
Managing server services
On the computer running the servers, there is a notification area with tray icons. Through the
icons, you can get information about the server services and perform certain actions. This includes,
for example, checking the state of the services, viewing logs or status messages, and starting and
stopping the services.
Start or stop the Management Server service
In the notification area, a tray icon indicates the state of the Management Server service, for
example Running. Through this icon, you can start or stop the Management Server service. If you
stop the Management Server service, you cannot use Management Client.
1. In the notification area, right-click the tray icon for the Management Server. A contextmenu appears.
2. If the service has stopped, click Start Management Server service to start it. The tray
icon changes to reflect the new state.
3. To stop the service, click Stop Management Server service.
For more information about the tray icons, see About the tray icons (on page 262).
See also
Start, stop, or restart the Event Server service (on page 259)
Start or stop the Recording Server service (on page 258)
System maintenance
257
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Start or stop the Recording Server service
In the notification area, a tray icon indicates the state of the Recording Server service, for example
Running. Through this icon, you can start or stop the Recording Server service. If you stop the
Recording Server service, your system cannot interact with devices connected to the server. This
means you cannot view live video or record video.
1. In the notification area, right-click the tray icon for the Recording Server. A context-menu
appears.
2. If the service has stopped, click Start Recording Server service to start it. The tray icon
changes to reflect the new state.
3. To stop the service, click Stop Recording Server service.
For more information about the tray icons, see About the tray icons (on page 262).
See also
Start, stop, or restart the Event Server service (on page 259)
Start or stop the Management Server service (on page 257)
View status messages for Management Server or
Recording Server
In the notification area on the computer running the servers, tray icons indicate the state of the
Management Server and Recording Server. Through these icons, you can view status messages, for
example "Service started".
1. In the notification area, right-click the relevant tray icon. A context-menu appears.
System maintenance
258
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
2. Select Show Status Messages. Depending on the server type, either the Management
Server Status Messages or Recording Server Status Messages window appears,
listing time-stamped status messages:
Start, stop, or restart the Event Server service
In the notification area, a tray icon indicates the state of the Event Server service, for example
Running. Through this icon, you can start, stop, or restart the Event Server service. If you stop
the service, parts of the system will not work, including events and alarms. However, you can still
view and record video. For more information, see Stopping the Event Server service.
1. In the notification area, right-click the tray icon for the Event Server. A context-menu
appears.
2. If the service has stopped, click Start Event Server service to start it. The tray icon
changes to reflect the new state.
3. To restart or stop the service, click Restart Event Server service or Stop Event Server
service.
For more information about the tray icons, see About the tray icons (on page 262).
See also
Start or stop the Recording Server service (on page 258)
System maintenance
259
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Stopping the Event Server service
When installing MIP plug-ins in the Event Server, first you must stop the Event Server service and
then, afterward, restart it. However, while the service is stopped, many areas of the VMS system
will not function:

No events or alarms are stored in the Event Server. However, system and device events
still trigger actions, for example start recording.

Analytic events do not work.

Generic events do not work in Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition.

No alarms are triggered.

In Network Video Management System Smart Client, map view items, alarm list view
items, and the Alarm Manager workspace do not work.

MIP plug-ins in the Event Server cannot run.

MIP plug-ins in Management Client and Network Video Management System Smart Client
do not work correctly.
System maintenance
260
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
View Event Server or MIP logs
You can view time-stamped information about Event Server activities in the Event Server log.
Information about third party integrations is logged in the MIP log in a sub-folder in the Event
Server folder.
1. In the notification area, right-click the relevant tray icon. A context-menu appears.
2. To view the 100 most recent lines in the Event Server log, click Show Event Server Logs.
A log viewer appears.
1. To view the log file, click Open log file.
2. To open the log folder, click Open log folder.
3. To view the 100 most recent lines in the MIP log, go back to the context-menu and click
Show MIP logs. A log viewer is displayed.
If someone removes the log files from the log directory, the menu items are grayed out. To open
the log viewer, first you need to copy the log files back into one of these folders:
C:\ProgramData\Sony\- Network VMS Event Server\logs or C:\ProgramData\Sony\- Network VMS
Event Server\logs\MIPLogs.
System maintenance
261
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
About the tray icons
The tray icons in the table represent the possible states of the services running on Management
Server, Recording Server, and Event Server. They are all visible on the computers where the
servers are installed, in the notification area:
Management
Server
service
icon
Recording
Server
service
icon
Event
Server
service
icon
Description
Running
Appears when a server service is enabled and started.
Stopped
Appears when a server service has stopped.
Starting
Appears when a server service is in the process of
starting. Under normal circumstances, the tray icon
changes after a short while to Running.
Stopping
Appears when a server service is in the process of
stopping. Under normal circumstances, the tray icon
changes after a short while to Stopped.
In indeterminate state
Appears when the server service is initially loaded and
until the first information is received, upon which the
tray icon, under normal circumstances, changes to
Starting and afterwards to Running.
Running offline
Typically appears when the Recording Server service is
running but the Management Server service is not.
Must be authorized by administrator
Appears when the Recording Server service is loaded
for the first time. Administrators authorize the
recording server through the Management Client:
Expand the Servers list, select the Recording Server
node and in the Overview pane, right-click the
relevant recording server and select Authorize
Recording Server.
System maintenance
262
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Change settings for the Recording Server service
You can change the basic settings for the Recording Server service, such as which port numbers to
use.
Prerequisites: To change the settings, first you must stop the Recording Server service. While the
Recording Server service is stopped, the system cannot interact with devices connected to the
recording server. This means you cannot view live video or record video.
1. In the notification area, right-click the Recording Server tray icon. A context-menu
appears.
2. Select Stop Recording Server service.
3. Right-click tray icon again.
4. Select Change Settings. The Recording Server Settings window appears. Change the
appropriate settings.
See also
Recording Server Settings (on page 263)
Recording Server Settings
When you configure Recording Server settings, specify the following:
Name
Description
Address
IP address (example: 123.123.123.123) or host name (example:
ourserver) of the management server to which the recording
server should be connected. This information is necessary so that
the recording server can communicate with the management
server.
Port
Port number to be used when communicating with the
management server. Default is port 9993. You can change this if
you need to.
Web server port
Port number to be used for handling web server requests, for
example for handling PTZ camera control commands and for
browse and live requests from Network Video Management
System Smart Client. Default is port 7563. You can this if you
need to.
System maintenance
263
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Name
Description
Alert server port
Port number to be used when the recording server listens for TCP
information (some devices use TCP for sending event messages).
Default is port 5432. You can change this if you need to.
SMTP server port
Port number to be used when the recording server listens for
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) information. SMTP is a
standard for sending e-mail messages between servers. Some
devices use SMTP for sending event messages or images to the
surveillance system server via e-mail. Default is port 25, which
you can enable and disable. You can change the port number if
you need to.
Restart Data Collector Server service
Your system automatically installs the Data Collector Server service on the same computers as the
Management Server, Recording Server, Log Server, Event Server, and NVMS Mobile Server.
Normally, the Data Collector Server service requires no maintenance, but if the service does stop,
no live feed is sent to the System Monitor. This is indicated System Monitor with error messages.
1. On the computer where the Data Collector Server service is installed:
2. In Windows' Start menu, select Control Panel, and then:

If using Category view, find the System and Security category and click
Administrative Tools.

If using Small icons or Large icons, click Administrative Tools.
3. Double-click Services.
4. Locate the Sony – Network Video Management System Data Collector Server. Rightclick it and select Start to restart the service.
Registered services
Occasionally, you have servers and/or services which should be able to communicate with the
system even if they are not directly part of the system. Some services, but not all, can register
themselves automatically in the system. Services that can automatically be registered are:

Event Server service

Log Server service

Service Channel service
Automatically registered services are displayed in the list of registered services.
You can manually specify servers/services as registered services in the Management Client.
System maintenance
264
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
About the service channel
The service channel enables automatic and transparent configuration communication between
servers and clients in your system. For example, it is the service channel that makes sure that
when a shared view is changed on one client, the change is immediately reflected on other clients
using the relevant shared view. The service channel also facilitates configuration-related
communication between servers and clients in cases where you use various plug-ins or add-on
products with your system.
The service channel is typically installed as part of the management server installation and resides
on the management server computer, but if needed, you may just as well install it on another
server in your surveillance system.
Once installed, the service channel can register itself automatically with your system (meaning that
it automatically becomes listed by the registered services feature in the Management Client). Its
location is known by the system, and clients logging into the system can automatically benefit from
it.
If you later change the IP address or hostname of the server running the service channel service,
you must manually edit the information under Tool > Registered Services in the Management
Client. Also, if you later need to change the user under which the service channel service was
installed, you must remove the Service Channel service and afterwards install it again under the
new user.
It is important that any instance of Network Video Management System Smart Client is timesynchronized with the computer running the Service Channel service. If the Network Video
Management System Smart Client is not time-synchronized with the management server and the
computer running the Service Channel service, the Network Video Management System Smart
Client is not updated with information about configuration changes made by other users in Network
Video Management System Smart Client. This means that users risk overwriting each others’
configuration changes. If your Network Video Management System Smart Clients are not timesynchronized with the computer running the Service Channel service, you see an error informing
you of this.
Add and edit registered services
1. In the Add/Remove Registered Services window, click Add or Edit, depending on your
needs.
2. In the Add Registered Service or Edit Registered Service window (depending on your
earlier selection), specify or edit settings.
3. Click OK.
Manage network configuration
With the network configuration settings, you can specify the management server's server LAN and
WAN addresses so the management server and the trusted servers can communicate.
1. In the Add/Remove Registered Services window, click Network.
2. Specify the LAN and/or WAN IP address of the management server.
System maintenance
265
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
If all involved servers (both the management server and the trusted servers) are on your
local network, you can simply specify the LAN address. If one or more involved servers
access the system through an internet connection, you must also specify the WAN address.
3. Click OK.
Registered services properties
In the Add Registered Service or Edit Registered Service window, specify the following:
Component
Requirement
Type
Prefilled field.
Name
Name of the registered service. The name is only used for display
purposes in the Management Client.
URLs
Click Add to add the IP address or hostname of the registered
service. If specifying a hostname as part of a URL, the host must
exist and be available on the network. URLs must begin with
http:// or https:// and must not contain any of the following
characters: < > & ' " * ? | [ ] ".
Example of a typical URL format: http://ipaddress:port/directory
(where port and directory are optional). Note that you can add
more than one URL if required.
Trusted
Select if the registered service should be trusted immediately
(this is often the case, but the option gives you the flexibility to
add the registered service and then mark it as trusted by editing
the registered service later).
Note that changing the trusted state also changes the state of
other registered services sharing one or more of the URLs defined
for the relevant registered service.
Description
Description of the registered service. The description is only used
for display purposes in the Management Client.
Advanced
When a service is advanced, it has specific URI schemes (for
example, http, https, tcp or udp) that need to be set up for each
host address you define. A host address therefore has multiple
endpoints, each with its own scheme, host address and IP port
for that scheme.
System maintenance
266
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
About devices • 82, 85
Index
About dynamic sensitivity • 119
A
About generate motion data for smart search
A distributed system setup • 13
About and master/slave servers • 216
About accessing logs and exports • 228, 229
About actions • 221
About actions and stop actions • 99, 130
About alarm configuration • 192
About alarms • 187, 193
About analytics events • 155
About archive structure • 66
• 120
About generic events • 158, 204
About hardware • 74
About input devices • 87
About IPv6 and IPv4 • 19
About licenses • 18, 45, 54, 57
About local IP address ranges • 19
About logs • 188, 200
About manually backing up your system
configuration • 248
About back up/restore fail and problem
scenarios • 248
About backing up and restoring the event
server configuration • 248
About backing up and restoring your system
configuration • 45, 52, 247
About basic users • 166, 182
About camera devices • 38, 85
About camera settings • 92
About clients • 121
About Matrix • 128
About metadata devices • 87
About microphone devices • 86
About Mobile Server Manager • 228
About moving hardware • 77
About moving the management server • 252
About multicasting • 70, 115
About multiple management servers
(clustering) • 206
About configuration reports • 187
About multi-streaming • 93, 94
About current tasks • 187
About naming an output for use in NVMS
About day length time profiles • 148, 150
About daylight saving time • 48
Mobile • 221
About Network Video Management System
ONVIF Bridge • 234
About default rules • 142
About Network Video Management System
About device changes without activation • 54,
Smart Client • 16
55, 255
About device groups • 82
Index
267
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
About Network Video Management System
Smart Wall • 122, 209
About Network Video Management System
Web Client • 18
About notification profiles • 151, 201
About NVMS Mobile • 215
About NVMS Mobile client • 17
About NVMS Mobile server • 216
About output devices • 88
About pre-buffering • 97
About recording servers • 58
About remote recording • 101
About removing video device drivers • 258
About rights of a role • 165
About roles • 38, 164
About rule complexity • 145
About rules • 142, 187
About rules and events • 38, 129
About scheduled backup and restore of
system configuration • 250
About system monitor details • 184
About system monitor thresholds • 183, 185
About the Client tab • 114
About the Events tab • 112
About the Fisheye Lens tab • 111
About the Info tab • 91
About the Management Client • 16
About the Motion tab • 117
About the Patrolling tab • 108
About the Presets tab • 101
About the Privacy Mask tab • 115
About the Record tab • 95
About the service channel • 53, 267
About the Settings tab • 92
About the SQL server transaction log • 250
About the Streams tab • 93
About the tray icons • 259, 260, 261, 264
About time profiles • 147
About time servers • 48
About sending notifications • 217
About unavailable management servers • 253
About show status • 228, 229, 233
About updating the SQL server address • 253
About Smart Client profiles • 123
About upgrade • 22, 44
About SNMP support • 243
About user-defined events • 140, 154, 195
About speaker devices • 86
About users • 165, 169
About storage • 99
About using rules with Smart Wall presets •
About storage and archiving • 38, 62, 101
About system dashboard • 182
About system monitor • 183, 186
Index
212, 213
About using the system with IPv6 • 19
About using Video Push to stream video •
219
268
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
About validating rules • 144
Add and edit registered services • 267
About video device drivers • 78, 258
Add and manage a role • 165, 166
About view groups • 122
Add hardware • 38, 59, 74
About view groups and roles • 122
Add Matrix recipients • 128
About virus scanning • 25
Add notification profiles • 151
About writing IPv6 addresses • 20
Add or edit a Mobile server • 216
Access Network Video Management System
Add/publish Download Manager installer
Web Client • 228
components • 42
Activate input manually for test • 88
Advanced settings tab (properties) • 241
Activate licenses after grace period • 55, 57
Alarm Data Settings • 196
Activate licenses offline • 38, 55, 56, 57
Alarm Definitions • 194
Activate output manually for test • 89
Alarm Definitions (properties) • 194, 195
Active Directory • 15
Alarms • 192
Add a configuration report • 187
Alarms tab (roles) • 181
Add a device group • 83
Alternative upgrade for workgroup • 35, 46
Add a generic event • 159
Analytics events • 155
Add a new recording storage • 62, 64
Analytics Events tab (options) • 199, 203
Add a patrolling profile • 82, 109
Archive Settings properties • 38, 64, 69
Add a preset position (type 1) • 82, 102, 106
Assign a default preset position • 104
Add a rule • 130, 145, 212
Assign IP address range • 71
Add a stream • 95
Assign local IP ranges • 73
Add a user-defined event • 155
Assign/remove users and groups to/from
roles • 38, 165, 167, 169
Add a view group • 123
Add an alarm • 194, 196
Add an automatic export rule • 221
Add an event • 113
Add and configure a Smart Client profile •
123
Add and edit an analytics event • 156
Index
Attach a device or group of devices to a
storage • 38, 63, 65
Audit log (properties) • 190
Authorize a recording server • 38, 59, 78
AVI Generation tab (options) • 198, 202
B
Back up archived recordings • 65
269
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Back up log server database • 247, 253
Copy a Smart Client profile • 124
Back up system configuration manually • 248
Copy, rename or delete a role • 167
Back up system configuration with scheduled
Copyright, trademarks and disclaimer • 9
backup • 250, 253
Backing up and restoring system
configuration • 66, 247
Backup and restore event server
Create a day length time profile • 150
Create an archive within a storage • 62, 64
Create and set up Smart Client profiles, roles
and time profiles • 123, 124
configuration • 251
Basic users • 182
Basics • 54
Before you start • 10
Create basic users • 166, 182
Customize dashboard • 183
Customize transitions • 110
D
Before you start installation • 22
Best practices • 47
C
Change log language • 190
Change settings for the Recording Server
service • 265
Change Software License Code • 38
Change/verify the basic configuration of a
recording server • 59
Client • 121
Client tab (devices) • 114
Client tab properties • 115
Clients • 16
Configure report details • 188
Configure Smart Walls • 209
Configure SNMP service • 244
Configure the system in the Management
Client • 28, 31, 37
Day length time profile properties • 150
Deactivate and activate a rule • 147
Define public address and port • 73
Define rules sending video to Matrixrecipients • 128
Delete a storage • 67
Delete all hardware on a recording server •
59, 74
Delete an archive from a storage • 67
Determine SQL server type • 24
Device pack installer - must be downloaded •
42, 44
Device tab (roles) • 175
Devices • 82
Disable/enable hardware • 75
Download Manager/download web page • 41
Download Manager's default configuration •
41
Connectivity • 222
Index
270
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Download Manager's standard installers
(user) • 42
E
Edit a preset position (type 1 only) • 104,
106
Event tab (properties) • 114
Events overview • 130, 137, 195
Events tab (devices) • 86, 88, 112
Example
Create and test a basic generic event • 159
Edit a preset position name (type 2 only) •
104, 105
Export logs • 189
Edit a time profile • 149
External Event tab (roles) • 180
Edit analytics events settings • 158
F
Edit certificate • 223, 228, 229
Edit hardware • 75
Edit settings for a selected storage or archive
• 65
Failover management server • 14
Failover management servers • 206
Feature configuration • 10, 206
Fill in/edit surveillance server credentials •
228, 230
Edit, copy and rename a rule • 146
Enable and disable fisheye lens support • 112
Enable and disable motion detection • 118
Enable keyframe recording • 99
Enable manual sensitivity • 119
Enable multicasting • 71
Enable multicasting for individual cameras •
72
Enable PTZ on a video encoder • 81
Enable recording on related devices • 97, 114
Enable/disable devices via device groups •
85, 86, 87, 88, 89
Enable/disable individual devices • 76
Enable/disable privacy masking • 116
Enable/disable recording • 96
Event server • 14
Event Server tab (options) • 199, 203
Index
First time use • 10, 47
Fisheye lens tab (devices) • 111
Frequently asked questions (FAQs) • 231
G
General • 221
General tab (options) • 198, 199
Generic event (properties) • 159, 160
Generic event data source (properties) • 162,
163
Generic event test (properties) • 159, 162
Generic events • 158
Generic Events tab (options) • 162, 199, 204
Get additional licenses • 55, 57
H
Hard disk failure
protect your drives • 47
Hardware • 74
271
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Hide/remove Download Manager installer
components • 43
How the number of device changes without
activation is calculated • 55
I
Info tab (devices) • 86, 87, 88, 89, 91
Info tab (hardware) • 79
Info tab (monitor properties) • 214
Installation method • 22
Installation troubleshooting • 35
Installing Network Video Management
System ONVIF Bridge • 236
Introduction to the help • 10
Investigations • 224
Issue
Automatic installation of IIS failed • 36
Info tab (recording server) • 61
Changes to SQL server location prevents
database access • 36
Info tab (roles) • 49, 169
Recording server startup fails due to port
conflict • 35
Info tab (Smart Wall properties) • 212
Info tab properties • 61, 91
L
Layout tab (Smart Wall properties) • 213
Initial configuring of Network Video
Management System ONVIF Bridge • 238
Install a recording server silently • 31, 46
License information • 54
Licenses and hardware device replacement •
57
Install clients • 29, 39
Lock a preset position • 106
Install in a cluster • 206, 208
Log server • 15
Install Network Video Management System
Smart Client silently • 39
Install NVMS Mobile server • 40, 231
Install SNMP service • 243
Log Settings • 227
Login overview • 49
M
Mail Server tab (options) • 198, 201
Install the recording server • 29, 30, 46, 78
Manage hardware • 79
Install the system • 27, 38
Manage manual recording • 98
Install your system - Custom option • 27, 29
Manage network configuration • 267
Install your system - Distributed option • 27,
28
Install your system - Single Server option •
27
Manage pre-buffering • 98
Management Client elements • 10, 52, 54
Management Client overview • 16, 49
Installation • 10, 22
Management Client window overview • 49
Installation for workgroups • 34, 46
Management server • 13
Index
272
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Managing Network Video Management
System ONVIF Bridge • 238
Managing server services • 251, 259
Managing the SQL server • 253
Manual backup and restore of system
configuration • 248, 250
Matrix • 128
Notification profile (properties) • 152
Notification profiles • 151
Notifications • 225
NVMS Mobile • 215
NVMS Mobile configuration • 40, 216, 231
NVMS Mobile introduction • 215
O
Matrix tab (roles) • 181
Menu overview • 52
MIP tab (roles) • 181
ONVIF Bridge properties • 241
Options dialog box • 198
Overall Security tab (roles) • 49, 101, 165,
169
Mobile Server Manager • 228
Mobile server settings • 221
Monitor properties • 214
Motion tab (devices) • 85, 117
Move hardware • 59, 67, 77
Move hardware (wizard) • 77
Move non-archived recordings from one
storage to another • 67, 68
Move the system configuration • 253
Moving the management server • 252
Multicast tab (recording server) • 70
Multi-domain with one-way trust • 242
P
Panes overview • 51
Patrolling tab (devices) • 108
Performance • 225
Ports used by the system • 245
Power outages
use a UPS • 47
Prepare Active Directory • 22
Prerequisites • 151
Prerequisites for clustering • 206
Prerequisites for using NVMS Mobile • 215
Presets tab (devices) • 101
N
Navigate the built-in help system • 10
Presets tab (monitor properties) • 215
Network tab (options) • 199, 202
Presets tab (Smart Wall properties) • 213
Network tab (recording server) • 73
Prevent operators from switching between
Network Video Management System ONVIF
Bridge • 234
Network Video Management System Smart
Wall • 209
Index
simple and advanced mode • 125, 126
Privacy mask tab (devices) • 115
Privacy mask tab (properties) • 117
Product overview • 12
273
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Protect recording databases from corruption •
47, 60
S
Scheduled backup and restore • 250
PTZ session properties • 101, 107
Search logs • 189
PTZ tab (roles) • 101, 178
Security • 164
PTZ tab (video encoders) • 80
Select image processing interval • 120
R
Select keyframes settings • 120
Record tab (devices) • 85, 86, 87, 95
Recording server • 14
Recording Server Settings • 265
Recording server status icons • 60
Recording servers • 58
Register Software License Code • 27, 39
Registered services • 266
Registered services properties • 268
Remote Recordings tab (roles) • 179
Remove a recording server • 59, 73
Rename a user-defined event • 155
Replace a recording server • 77, 257
Select service account • 25
Select shared backup folder • 249
Send notifications to mobile devices • 218,
225
Send the same video to several Network
Video Management System Smart Client
views • 129
Server logs • 188
Server Logs tab (options) • 188, 198, 200
Server Status • 223
Servers and hardware • 58
Set simplified mode as the default mode •
125, 126
Replace hardware • 57, 255
Set system monitor thresholds • 185, 187
Restart Data Collector Server service • 266
Set up a secure connection to the hardware •
Restore system configuration from a manual
backup • 249
Restore system configuration from a
scheduled backup • 251, 253
76
Set up investigations • 216
Set up user rights for Network Video
Management System Smart Wall • 211
Roles • 164
Set up Video Push to stream video • 219, 224
Roles settings • 167, 169
Settings tab (devices) • 85, 86, 87, 88, 89,
Rule log (properties) • 191
92
Rules • 142
Settings tab (hardware) • 80
Rules and events • 129
Setup with one-way trust • 242
Show/edit port numbers • 228, 231
Index
274
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Site information • 58
Start or stop the Recording Server service •
259, 260, 261
Smart Client profile properties • 127
Smart Client profiles • 123
Smart Wall properties • 212
Start, stop and restart Mobile service • 228,
231
Start, stop, or restart the Event Server
Smart Wall tab (roles) • 180, 211
service • 259, 260, 261
SNMP • 243
Status icons of devices • 90
Sound Settings • 197
Stopping the Event Server service • 262
Specify a time profile • 148
Storage and Recording Settings properties •
64, 68
Specify an end position • 111
Specify common properties for all devices in
a device group • 83, 84
Storage tab (recording server) • 62
Streams tab (devices) • 85, 93
Specify datagram options • 72
System components • 13
Specify detection method • 120
System dashboard • 182
Specify event properties • 113
System log (properties) • 190
Specify exclude regions • 121
System maintenance • 10, 245
Specify fisheye lens settings • 112
System overview • 10, 12
Specify motion detection settings • 118, 119
System requirements • 21
Specify preset positions in a patrolling profile
T
• 109
Test a generic event • 159
Specify privacy mask settings • 116
Test a preset position (type 1 only) • 106
Specify PTZ session timeouts • 106
Test analytics event • 156
Specify recording frame rate • 99
Time profiles • 147
Specify the time at each preset position • 109
U
Specify threshold • 120
Update site information • 58
Specify which devices to include in a device
Update the log server's SQL address • 254
group • 83, 84
Speech tab (roles) • 179
Update the management server or event
server SQL server address • 254
SQL server • 15
Upgrade • 44
Start or stop the Management Server service
Upgrade best practices • 45, 46
• 259, 260
Index
275
Network Video Management System Enterprise Edition 2016 R2 - Administrator Manual
Upgrade in a cluster • 208
Upgrade prerequisites • 45, 46, 57
Use preset positions from the camera (type
2) • 104
Use rules to trigger email notifications • 152,
202
Use several instances of an event • 113
User and Groups tab (roles) • 169
User Settings tab (options) • 199, 203
User settings tab (properties) • 241
User-defined events • 154
V
Video device drivers • 258
Video Push • 224
View effective roles • 168
View Event Server or MIP logs • 263
View Group tab (roles) • 180
View groups • 122
View status messages for Management
Server or Recording Server • 260
Virtual servers • 15
W
Why use a public address? • 73
Windows Task Manager
be careful when you end processes • 47
Working with device groups • 82
Working with devices • 38, 85
Index
276
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement